jewellery design fashion design interior design batch (2020

1

FACULTY OF DESIGN

SYLLABUS AND COURSE STRUCTURE

BACHELOR IN DESIGN

SPECIALIZATION IN JEWELLERY DESIGN FASHION DESIGN INTERIOR DESIGN

BATCH (2020 – 24)

5

SUMMARY REPORT

Semester Wise Credit Distribution

1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th Total Minimum credit Required

21 18 18 19 20 24 21 15 156 156

Total Credit for Batch 2020-2024= 157

Total Relaxation= Nil

No relaxation in core and foundation subjects.

Options can be availed in Specialization, Interdisciplinary and General Subject

Choice Based Credit Summery Report of B.Des. Jewellery Design and Manufacturing

S.No. Category of Courses Credits(L,T,P) Total Credits

1 Foundation Courses (10,0,11) 21

2 Core Courses (30,0,97) 127

3 Departmental Electives (0,0,8) 8

4 Open E lectives (Nil) Nil

5 Total (40,0,116) 156

6

SUMMARY REPORT

1. Total Credit for Batch 2019-2024= 162

2. Total Relaxation= nil


1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th Total Minimum

credit

Required

21 21 21 20 18 24 22 15 162 NIL

Choice Based Credit Summery Report of B.Des Fashion Design



2 Core Courses (42,0,91) 133



5 Total (52,0,110) 162

7



credit

Required

21 19 19 22 24 24 20 18 167 167




Options can be availed in Specialization, Interdisciplinary and General Subjects.

Choice Based Credit Summery Report of B.Des.Interior Design



2 Core Courses (35,0,101) 136



5 Total (55,0,112) 167

12

INTRODUCTION The undergraduate Degree program in Jewellery Design manufacturing is a full time course, three-years in duration with a shared common first semester, offered by the Faculty of Design at JECRC University. The course is based on integrating design thinking, materials and techniques with traditional sensibilities. The program also aims to develop and foster links with India’s Gems and Jewellery industry at large and the international community. During the course, students develop a conceptual approach alongside a practical understanding of the materials and processes adopted by small and large jewellery artists and manufacturers. The course also develops independent and creative thinking through a series of increasingly complex design projects culminating in an exhibition of student work. The main aim of the first year is to give the students a basic introduction to drawing, 2 dimensional and 3 dimensional designs along with knowledge of art history and is seen as a “foundation year”. It is the prerequisite for advancement onto the specialized programs, of which Jewellery Design. The design of the curriculum reflects the transition from a closely supervised skill based, taught first year, to an experimental, exploratory approach in the second year, and ultimately the final year, where the student is more self-led. The credit system and modular weight age also reflect this progression with the first year having short tightly controlled, specific modules and the final year having more complex and broader modules like project management, entrepreneurship. The course culminates with a final major project where students demonstrate their accumulated knowledge, skills and expertise. The second year not only provides students knowledge about basic jewellery drawing, making and material exploration, but also supplements this knowledge with courses in CAD and design theory. The overall aim of the third year is to give students an opportunity to implement complex design skills, building upon the previous semesters, in particular working on a summer internship. Liaison with professionals in the industry is essential in developing this coursedevelops further integration between the taught courses. However, the emphasis is placed on the self directed project which leads them towards a graduate collection.

Jewellery Designer

Jewellery Artist/Studio Jewellery

Silversmith / Goldsmith

Accessory Designer (Fashion, Theatre, Film)

Producer

Retailer Sales/Marketing Consultants

Gemmologist

Entrepreneur

Design Education

Design Consultant Jewellery Blogger

13

VISSION STATEMENT The Faculty of Design at JECRC University is a platform for integrating contemporary design sensibilities with traditional aesthetic values. We provide a space for highly skilled crafts women/men, designers and new entrants who aspire to become professional advertising field and designers. To become a renowned centre of higher learning , work towards academic, professional, cultural and social enrichment of the individuals and communities.

MISSION STATEMENT

The mission of the Faculty of Design is to build a successful career of its students. The school provides a prolific and dynamic program designed to meet individual needs of students with diverse aspirations, learning capacities, Scopic regimes, artistic sensibilities and innovations.

14

PROGRAME MISSION STATEMENT (JEWELRY DESIGN & MANUFACTURING) The Program aims to encourage, foster and expose the students to a more diverse art and design practice through new research and developments within academic and professional parameters. From multidisciplinary approaches to self-directed studies, students initiate and integrate assimilated knowledge from a diverse range of subjects to arrive at innovative and challenging solutions to previously explored and unexplored notions including new technologies and techniques. Students are introduced to different ways of approaching, perceiving and appreciating jewellery through studio and theory components within the course structure. Workshops, Seminars and Field visits help students to source historical and modern contexts through a critical eye. Fundamental knowledge of tools, materials and processes is complemented with development of ideas and concepts, leading to development of wearable and non-wearable portfolios, for the domestic and international market.

PROGRAME OBJECTIVE

1. To enable the students to work systematically through a design brief to impart skills in research, conceptual development, design and fabrication for creative outcomes. 2. To give students a contextual reference in terms of design and how technological, environmental, economic, social and political issues influence the industry and the art and design world. 3. To develop linkages between academia, industry and the indigenous craft sector. 4. To train students to contribute to the community through design interventions within socio-cultural limitations. 5. Introduce students to the design process and in particular to the role research has to play in encouraging original and innovative thinking. 6. To encourage independent thinking through professional practice students are guided in the process of self-evaluation and criticism, placing their work in the broader contexts of society and with knowledge of current practitioners. 7. To gain an understanding of the basic financial aspects of entrepreneurial ventures plus marketing and sales.

15

STRETEGIC PLAN

The Faculty of Design at JECRC University is a platform for integrating contemporary design sensibilities with traditional aesthetic values. We provide a space for highly skilled crafts women/men, designers and new entrants who aspire to become professional jewellery makers and designers.

17

PROGRAME OBJECTIVE’S ASSESSMENT

The following table illustrates how each of the above program objectives is measured and the actions taken as a result of these measurements. The three tools for assessments of program objectives are: 1. Employer Survey

2. Alumni Survey

3. Graduating Students Survey 4. Existing student Survey 5. Parents Survey

Objectives How Measured

When to beMeasured

Improvement Identified

Improvement Made

1 Graduating Students Survey

At Conclusion of three year program

Better integration of skills required between different design areas

Development of projects and close monitoring of design objectives and outcomes

2 Alumni Survey Graduating Students Survey

Within one year of graduation

Diversity of exposure to various art and design outcomes

Close supervision of research oriented projects and following of design events, fairs and competitions

3 Employer Survey

Within one year of graduation After completion of community projects

Further development of Industry oriented assignments

More frequent interaction between academia and the industry through internships and visits

4 Graduating Students Survey

Conclusion of four year program

Identification of community related projects

Introduction of community based design modules as part of coursework

5 Alumni Survey Graduating Students Survey


More emphasis on research and analytical skills

Emphasis on research skill development through theory Courses

6. Alumni Survey Graduating Students Survey

Conclusion of four year program

Development of communication and presentation skills

Regular critiques and presentations to peers and professionals

18

7 Alumni Survey Employer Survey


Need for Market surveys and comparative costing modules

Inclusion of pricing, costing and sales modules in Jewellery Major Studios and marketing course

COURSE OUTCOMES

1. Problem Solving:Solve communication problems and carry projects from creation through to the

production process; including the skills of problem identification, research and information gathering, analysis, generation of alternative solutions, prototyping, user testing, integration of feedback and the evaluation of outcomes.

2.Communication: Describe and respond to the audiences and contexts, which communication

solutions must address, including recognition of the physical, cognitive, cultural, and social human factors that shape design decisions.

3. Demonstration:Create and develop visual concepts in response to communication problems,

including an understanding of the principles of visual organization, information hierarchy, symbolic representation, aesthetics, and the construction of original meaningful forms.

4. Technique:Understand tools and technology, including their roles in the creation, reproduction,

and distribution of visual messages. Relevant tools and technologies include drawing, designing, manufacturing, photography, and time-based project submission.

5. Application:Be able both to determine the mode(s) of production required to achieve a specific

product and to demonstrate level-appropriate mastery of skills, manual and/or digital, necessary to achieve those products. Apply the principles of color, composition, design and manufacturing as they relate in the various media that exist in design.

6.Aesthetic Fluency:Recognize and apply aesthetic principles of design history, theory, and criticism

19

from a variety of perspectives, including those of art history, linguistics, communication and information theory, technology, and the social and cultural use of design objects.

7.Professionalism:Understand the basic business practices and trade ethics related to graphic arts,

including the ability to organize design projects and to work productively in client-designer and team relationships in the implementation and evaluation of projects.

8.Portfolio:Organize and present a portfolio of work that gives evidence of the skills, knowledge, and

abilities to begin a Jewelry design career or transfer to a three-year college for additional study.

Program Specific Outcome:

PSO1: Demonstrate fluency in the visual vocabulary and technical skills relevant to graphic design: • Demonstrate excellence in typographic practice using text typography, display

typography, and grid systems across analogue and digital media.

• Display image-making expertise and the development of visual narratives using photography, illustration, and type-as-image across analog and digital media.

• Convey Ideas, clearly and confidently, in their work, their speech and their writing.

• Apply the rigor of research and conceptualization to their work via prototypes and presentations.

PSO2: Imagine and articulate research, conceptualization and varied solutions to any problem:

• Evaluate and synthesize different points of view and determine appropriate solutions to serve specific outcomes.

• Apply critical thinking and flexibility to formulate appropriate, practical, and actionable responses to any question.

• Think broadly, be receptive to provocative ideas, and be prepared to generate novel and unexpected outcomes

• Articulate the diverse ethical components associated with any cultural production. • Integrate life-long learning practices to constantly evolve career-relevant skills. • Recognize, be curious and tolerant of cultural and social diversity regarding both client

and audience.

PSO3: Leverage research, innovative processing and context to generate effective ideas:

• Constantly and prominently consider the cultural, social and economical environment in which their ideas, products, and strategies will live.

• Learn through our multicultural learning environment to become “visual translators”. • Move confidently and creatively between inquiry, theory, and practice. • Embrace the creative process as dynamic progression of research, speculation and

experimentation, prototyping and refinement. • Demonstrate knowledge of historical, current, and innovative events and ideas, and

interpret those viewpoints through the framework of communication design.

20

• Assess the impact their actions have on other individuals, communities and the sustainability of our environment.

Title of Degree Program B.DES in Jewelry Design & Manufacturing

Definition of credit hour: One credit hour is 1 hour of theory lecture andone credit hour is 2 hours of practical work.

Degree Plan Following is the list of courses from

B.DESin Jewelry Design & Manufacturing

SEMESTER I

L T P Contact

Hrs Credit Type

BMC128A Business Communication & Personality Development

3 - - 3 3

BMC051A Environmental Science 4 - - 4 4

BDJ101A Design Foundation - - 12 12 6

BDJ102A Basic Art And Design - - 3 3 3

BDJ103A Jewelry Sketching and Rendering - - 6 6 3

BDJ104A Fundamentals of Computer 3 - - 3 3

TOTAL 10 - 21 31 21

SEMESTER II L T P Contact Hrs Credit Type

BDJ201A Metallurgy 2 - - 2 2

BDJ202A Gemology 2 - - 2 2

BDJ203A Material Exploration & Techniques -I

- 6 6 3

BDJ204A 2D & 3D Drawing 4 4 2

21

BDJ205A Jewelry Manufacturing-I - - 6 6 3

BDJ206A Computer Aided Design- I (Corel Draw)

6 6 3

BDJ207A Design Project – I ( Gold Jewelry)

- - 6 6 3

TOTAL 4 - 28 32 18

SEMESTER III L T P Contact Hrs Credit Type

BDJ301A History of Jewelry Design and Context

3 - - 3 3

BDJ302A Budgeting & Costing 2 2 2

BDJ303A Material Exploration & Techniques -II

6 6 3

BDJ304A Jewelry Manufacturing-II - - 6 6 3

BDJ305A Computer Aided Design II (Corel Draw)

- - 6 6 3

BDJ306A Design Project- II (Diamond Jewelry)

- - 8 8 4

TOTAL 5 - 26 31 18

SEMESTER IV L T P Contact Hrs Credit Type

BDJ401A Jewelry Design Trends and Forecast

3 - - 3 3

BDJ402A Material Exploration & Techniques -III

- - 6 6 3

BDJ403A Jewelry Manufacturing-III - - 6 6 3

22

BDJ404A Computer Aided Design- III(Rhino)

6 6 3

BDJ405A Elective (Choose any 1 )

A. Photography B. Lifestyle Accessory Design

- - 4 4 2

BDJ406A Design Project-III (Kundan Meena)

- 8 8 4

TOTAL 3 30 33 19

SEMESTER V L T P Contact Hrs Credit Type

BDJ501A Marketing & Merchandising 3 - - 3 3

BDJ502A Professional Practice 3 - - 3 3

BDJ503A Jewelry Manufacturing-IV - - 6 6 3

BDJ504A Computer Aided Design IV (Rhino)

- - 6 6 3


A. Visual Merchandising

B. E-Commerce

- - 4 4 2

BDJ506A

Design Project-IV

(Couture Jewelry )

8 8 4

BDJ507A Educational Trip - - - 2

TOTAL 6 24 30 20

SEMESTER VI L T P Contact Hrs Credit Type

BDJ401B Industrial Project- Internship - - - - 18

23

BDJ402B Portfolio Submission - - - - 6

TOTAL - - - - 24

SEMESTER VII

L T P Contact Hrs Credit Type

BDJ701A Research Project & Dissertation 6 6 3

BDJ702A Brand Management 3 - - 3 3

BDJ703A Project Management

&Entrepreneurship

3 - - 3 3

BDJ704A Production Method and Quality

Control

3 - - 3 3

BDJ705A Jewelry Retail and Export 3 - - 3 3

BDJ706A Final Project -I 12 12 6

TOTAL 12 18 30 21

SEMESTER VIII

L T P Contact Hrs

Credit Type

24

BDJ801B Final Project II 18 18 9

BDJ802B Portfolio 12 12 6

TOTAL 30 30 15

B.DES IN JEWELRY DESIGN & MANUFACTURING PROGRAME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVE(PEO’S) A graduate of the Jewelry Design & ManufacturingProgram should: PEO-I Students will develop themselves as effective professionals by real projects through the use of Jewelry design knowledge and with attention to team work, effective communication, critical thinking and problem solving skills. PEO-II Students will develop professional skills that prepare them for immediate employment and entrepreneurship for life-long learning in advanced areas of Jewelry Design and related fields. PEO-III Students will demonstrate their ability to adapt to a rapidly changing environment by having learned and applied new skills and new technologies. PEO-IV Students will be provided with an educational foundation that prepares them for excellence, leadership roles along diverse career paths with encouragement to professional ethics and active participation needed for a successful career.

PROGRAME OUTCOME (PO’S) A graduate of the Jewelry Design Program will demonstrate: PO1: The ability to give comprehensive knowledge of design methodology, production and its management in the field of design. PO2: The ability to design and perform manufacturing, as well as to analyze the forecast and trends of design industry (Problem analysis) PO3: The ability to design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic projectsrelated to economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health and safety, manufacturability, and sustainability.( Design/development of solutions ) PO4: The ability to function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams on multidisciplinary environments (Individual and team work)

25

PO5: The ability to identify, formulate, and solve engineering problems (Problem Solving) PO6: The understanding of professional and ethical responsibility (Ethics) PO7: The ability to communicate effectively (Communication Skills)

PROGRAME SPECIFIC OUTCOME PSO1: The ability to understand, analyze and develop new designs in the areas related to jewelry design, manufacturing, cad designand networking for efficient design of jewelry of varying complexity. (Professional Skills) PSO2: The ability to apply standard practices and strategies in jewelry design projectdevelopment by using quality product for business success. (Problem-Solving Skills) PSO3: The ability to employ modern platforms in creating innovative career paths to be an entrepreneur, and a zest for higher studies.( Successful Career and Entrepreneurship)

26

SEMESTER I

27

SEMESTER I

L T P Contact

Hrs Cred

it Type

BMC128A Business Communication & Personality Development

3 - - 3 3


BDJ101A Design Foundation - - 12 12 6

BDJ102A Basic Art And Design - - 3 3 3

BDJ103A Jewelry Sketching and Rendering - - 6 6 3

BDJ104A Fundamentals of Computer 3 - - 3 3

TOTAL 10 - 21 31 22

BMC128A BUSINESS COMMUNICATION & PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT

3-0-0 [3]

OBJECTIVE

To enhance Professional competence in reading, writing, listening and speaking.

Switch the approach from providing information about the language to use the language.

Minimize the Grammar Translation Method of ELT while trying to replace it with Direct Method.

Introduce Communicative Method of ELT and focusing the teaching pedagogy on the student-centered learning rather than on the teacher-centered learning.

Ability to master three major forms of communications which are vital in academic and professional settings namely professional presentations, interviews and group communications respectively.

Providing a deep insight into the techniques for delivering effective presentations, winning job interviews, and actively participating in various forms of group communication.

UNIT 1 Basic Writing Skills: Tenses, Voice, Narration

UNIT 2 Vocabulary Building: Word Formation, Affixes, Synonyms, Antonyms, One Word Substitution

UNIT 3 Composition: Composing a CV/Resume, Letter Writing, Email Writing, Précis Writing

UNIT 4 Communication Skills: What is Communication, Process, features of communication, Types, Flows of Communication and Barriers to communication.

UNIT 5 Prose and Poetry: The Gift of Magi (O’ Henry), How Much Land Does a Man Need (Leo Tolstoy), Where the Mind is Without Fear (Rabindra Nath Tagore), If (Rudyard Kipling)

28

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will have: CO1: Ability to design a language component or process to meet desired need within realistic, Constraints such as economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, scenario CO2: Ability to analyze the usage of English words in different contexts CO3: An understanding of technical and academic articles’ comprehension. CO4: The ability to present oneself at multinational levels knowing the type of different standards of English. CO5: The ability to use the target language in real context of their aspired workplace with accuracy.

MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES AND PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES Course Outcome

Program Outcome Program Specific Outcome

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 H L L

CO2 L M H

CO3 M M

CO4 H H

CO5 M H H H M

H = Highly Related; M = Medium L = Low

Text Books Communication Skills for Engineers and Scientists, Sangeeta Sharma and Binod Mishra,

PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. (New Delhi)

English Grammar and Composition, Gurudas Mukherjee, Ane Books Pvt. Ltd.(New Delhi)

Current English Grammar and Usage with Composition, R.P. Sinha, Oxford University Press (New Delhi)

Effective Technical Communication, M Ashraf Rizvi, Tata McGraw Hill (New Delhi)

Business Communication, Meenakshi Raman & Prakash Singh, Oxford University Press (New Delhi)

29

BMC051A ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES 4-0-0 [4]

OBJECTIVE

Understanding and Application of Basic Ecology and Ecological Systems with reference to built environment.

To Understand the Multidisciplinary nature of environmental studies.

To Understand the Ecosystems, Concepts, Structure, Functions and their Types.

To Understand theSocial issues, Environment, Laws and Sustainability.

UNIT 1 Introduction and Natural Resources: Multidisciplinary nature and public awareness, Renewable and nonrenewal resources and associated problems, Forest resources, Water resources, Mineral resources, Food resources, Energy resources, Land resources, Conservation of natural resources and human role.

UNIT 2 Ecosystems: Concept, Structure and function, Producers composers and decomposers, Energy flow, Ecological succession, Food chains webs and ecological pyramids, Characteristics structures and functions of ecosystems such as Forest, Grassland, Desert, Aquatic ecosystems.

UNIT 3 Biodiversity and Conservation: Definition, Genetic, Species, and Ecosystem diversity, Bio-geographical classification of India, Value of biodiversity at global, national, local levels, India as a mega diversity nation, Hot sports of biodiversity, Threats to biodiversity, Endangered and endemic species of India, In-situ and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity.

UNIT 4 Environmental Pollution- Definition, Causes, effects and control of air pollution, water pollution, soil pollution, marine pollution, noise pollution, thermal pollution, nuclear hazards, human role in prevention of pollution, Solid waste management, Disaster management, floods, earthquake, cyclone and landslides.

UNIT 5 Social issues and Environment- Unsustainable to sustainable development, Urban problems related to energy, Water conservation and watershed management, Resettlement and re-habitation, Ethics, Climate change, Global warming, Acid rain, Ozone layer depletion, Nuclear accidents, holocaust, Waste land reclamation, Consumerism and waste products, Environment protection act, Wildlife protection act, Forest conservation act, Environmental issues in legislation, population explosion and family welfare program, Environment and human health, HIV, Women and child welfare, Role of information technology in environment and human health.

30

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will have:

CO1: An ability to understand the transnational character of environmental problems and ways of addressing them, including interactions across local to global scales.

CO2: An ability to understand key concepts from economic, political, and social analysis as they pertain to the design and evaluation of environmental policies and institutions.

CO3: An ability to apply systems concepts and methodologies to analyze and understand

interactions between social and environmental processes.

CO4: An ability to understand the Environmental awareness, Environmental education in present day context.




CO1 H L L

CO2 L M H

CO3 M M

CO4 L H M M H

TEXT BOOKS

1. Agarwal, K.C., Environmental Biology, Nidi Publication Ltd., Bikaner, 2001.

2. Bharucha Erach, Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmadabad, 2002.

3. Clark, R.S., Marine Pollution, Clanderson Press, Oxford, 2002.

4. Cunningham, W.P., et al., Environmental Encyclopaedia, Jaico Publishing House, Mumbai, 2003

31

BDJ101A DESIGN FOUNDATION 0-12-0[6]

AIM To make students see, make and appreciate the basic design concepts. The first level includes the vocabulary of design and principles of composition. This level includes 3D composition and study of Volumes. The aim of this course is to understand the method of visualizing and drawing from nature, cast and product drawing. Learners will be introduced to a brief history and introduction to 3D materials, tools and processes and made aware of the range of possibilities of different materials in their 2D and 3D application to design. This may be done through lectures / ppt presentations / swatches/ samples. The aim of this unit is to enable learners to develop knowledge and understanding of the issues that have informed debate on the purposes and processes of design. This unit aims to give learners opportunities to develop skills and knowledge in the development of new products or services in design pathways.

OBJECTIVE Know the phases of the design development cycle

Skill in color mixing and fine color-discernment.

Know in principle the physics of color (light), the chemistry of color (pigment), and the impact of color (psychology).

Practice and develop rendering and presentation techniques in design presentations.

Recognize the relationship between lighting, surface and perception.

Student will be able to understand design & principles of composition & 3D compositions

Student will be able to understand the methods & techniques of visualization & drawing.

The student would be exposed to appreciation of drawing different products.

Student will be able to understand basics of design concepts

UNIT 1 THEORY- Elements of Design- Point, Line, Characteristic of Line, Types of Line, Shapes, Categories of Shape, Space, Categories . PRACTICAL- Elements of design- Types of Lines, Line Compositions,Different types of Shapes- Geometric, Organic, Free-form, Natural, and Shape, composition, Positive & Negative. Textures- Physical & Visual, Texture Composition, Form Space-Positive & Negative.

UNIT 2 THEORY- Principle of Design- Balance, Types of Balance, Emphasis, Unity, Repetition, Rhythm, Pattern, Harmony, Proportion, Contrast, Functionality. Gestalt and his Concepts- Closures, Continuance, Similarity, Proximity, Alignment. PRACTICAL- Principle of design- Balance, types of balance emphasis, unity, repetition (rhythm, pattern), harmony, proportion (scale), variety (alteration), contrast, functionality.

UNIT 3 THEORY- Color- Introduction to Color, Color Theory, Color Harmonies, Color Schemes, Color Wheel, Tint, Tone, Shades. Different Mediums in Art. PRACTICAL- Color- Color Wheel and color chart, Color Exploration, Color Interaction.

32

Primary colors- Color Wheel, Color Composition, Secondary colors- Color Wheel, Color Composition, Tertiary colors- Color Wheel, Color Composition Color schemes- Monochromatic, Achromatic, Complimentary, Split Complimentary, Double-Split Complimentary Polychromatic. Tint, tone & shades- Application of Gray Scale and Black & White. Mediums in art- Pencil, Charcoal, Pastels, Water & Poster.

UNIT 4 THEORY- What is Design, Philosophies and Studies of Design, Approaches to Design, Philosophies for Methods of Designing, Philosophies for the Purpose of Design, Design as a Process, Defining a Design Process, Typical Steps or Stages of the Design Process, Design and Art, Design and Engineering, Design and Production, Process Design? PRACTICAL –Drawing, Nature-drawing Composition, Free-Hand Sketching. Object drawing-2D & 3D,Human drawing- Outline Sketches, Shades & Shadow Composition, Light- Dark Tone Composition, positive and negative spaces, Product drawings; method of representing

UNIT 5 THEORY- Composition, Principle of Organization, View Point Compositional Techniques, Rules of Thirds, Odds, Space, Simplification, Limiting Focus, Geometry and Symmetry PRACTICAL –View- Perspective, Isometric, Geometry- Lines & Angle bisecting, Constructing Regular & Semi Regular Tessellation, Constructing 3D Tessellation

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will have: CO1:An ability to color mixing and fine color-discernment. CO2: An ability to know in principle the physics of color (light), the chemistry of color (pigment), and the impact of color (psychology). CO3: An ability to rendering and presentation techniques in design presentations. CO4: An ability to recognize the relationship between lighting, surface and perception.



PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 H M H M L M L

CO2 H H H M M

CO3 H H H H L H L M

CO4 H M M H H H


TEXT BOOKS

1. Broomer, Gerald F., (1974), Elements of Design: Space, Davis Publications Inc. Worcester, Massachusetts.

2. Bruce D. Kurty, (1987), Visual imagination- An introduction of Art, Prentice Hall, New Jersy.

33

BDJ102A BASIC ART& DESIGN 0-0-3(3)

AIM Art and design stimulates creativity and imagination. It provides visual, tactile and sensory experiences and a special way of understanding and responding to the world. It enables students to communicate what they see, feel and think through the use of color, texture, form, pattern and different materials and processes. Students become involved in shaping their environments through art and design activities. They learn to make informed judgments and aesthetic and practical decisions. They explore ideas and meanings through the work of artists and designers. Through learning about the roles and functions of art, they can explore the impact it has had on contemporary life and that of different times and cultures. The appreciation and enjoyment of the visual arts enriches all our lives

OBJECTIVE

To understand of the social, psychological, cultural, historical and commercial factors.

Development of Graphic Skills, Ability and Comprehension. Establishing Significance of Art.

To understand the influences on art and design activities.

UNIT 1 Introduction to History of Art, Design and Architecture – Pre History To Ancient Civilization, Mesopotamia, Egypt, Indus Valley, China.

UNIT 2 Architecture, Interior And Furniture Of The Ancient World.

UNIT 3 Jewelry And Materials Used In Ancient World.

UNIT 4 Signs And Symbols In The Ancient World.

UNIT 5 Introduction to IndianfolkArt- Worli, Fadd, Madhubani, Modern Art, Blue Pottery, Fresco, Meenakari , glass mosaic, Miniature Art, Kalamkari, Inlay-Work.

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will have:

CO1: An ability to understand influences on art and design activities and outcomes through the interpretation and analysis of information. CO2: An ability to be able to assess, interpret and evaluate information.

34

CO3: An ability to be able to evaluate and present conclusions.

MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES AND PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES

Course Outcome



CO1 H L L

CO2 L M H

CO3 M M


TEXT BOOKS 1. Broomer F. Gerald, (1974), Elements of Design, Space, Davis Publications Inc., Worcester,

Masschusetts. 2. Dodson B., (1990), Keys to Drawing, North Light Publications, Cincinnati. 3. Mark W., Mary W. (1999), Drawing for Absolute Beginner, F&W Publications, Cincinnati. 4. Davis M.L. (1996), Visual Design in Dress, Prentice Hall, Canada.

Graves M., (1951). The Art of Colour and Design, McGraw-Hill Book Company

35

BDJ103A JEWELRY SKETCHING & RENDERING 0-6-0 [3]

AIM This course will deal with sketching and rendering techniques. As a jewellery designer these skills will assist student a lot as you will be able to express your ideas in 2-dimensional and 3-dimensional forms. Student will able to represent ideas to clients with the help of rendered sketches of design helping the other person to visualize as how they will look like when crafted in any metal and as per specifications. The emphasis of this course is on learning basic practical skills and developing ideas. Students will learn to translate concepts into creative solutions. Principles and elements of applied design along with jewellery forming techniques, materials and forms will be introduced. This 3 credits theory course will carry equal weight age of both design and manufacturing components; students will be introduced to the conceptual and historical understanding of jewellery making, and thereby apply their own theoretical and creative understanding through theme based projects, as well as grasp the technical skills pertaining to basic jewellery manufacturing, as well as application of tools to particular techniques

OBJECTIVE

To acquire theoretical knowledge about the adornment of body through discussions, presentations and fieldwork.

To develop skills with processes, techniques & materials through demonstrations and progressive exercises.

To generate ideas particular to individual fields of study.

To learn through review, appreciation and presentation of individual work.

To practice and be aware of health and safety in the workplace.

UNIT 1 THEORY- Materials for drawing- Introduction, Basic Material for Drawing, Instruments For Drawing PRACTICAL – Gemstone –Drawing Of GemstoneDrawing And Faceting Method of A Round Brilliant Cut Stone. Oval, Pear, and Marquise Shaped Stone. Step Cut StoneBaguettes, Taper Baguettes, And Octagon Step Cut StoneDrawing And of A Single Cut, Kite Cut, Triangle Cut And Trilliant Step Cut StoneDrawing and of A Square, Cushion, And French Cut Stone. Gem Stone Shading And Rendering of Facetted, Cabochons Carved Stones, Pearl.

UNIT 2 THEORY- Free hand drawing- Pre Requisites For Good Drawing, Pencil Control,

36

Training The Eye. PRACTICAL –Metal Forms – Representation Of Metal Colors For Yellow Gold, White Gold, Platinum, Silver.Types Of Textures- Like High Polish, Florentine, Matt Finish, Sandblasting, Tree Bark, Satin .Types Of Decoration –Like Granulation, Open And Close Filigree, Etching, Engraving, Repousse And Chasing, Embossing, Inlay, Enameling.

UNIT 3 THEORY- Orthographic representation – what is technical drawing, orthographic representation, material and tools required, manual technical drawing, computer aided technical drawing PRACTICAL –Metal Forms – Representation Of Metal Colors For Yellow Gold, White Gold, Platinum, Silver.Types Of Textures- Like High Polish, Florentine, Matt Finish, Sandblasting, Tree Bark, Satin .Types Of Decoration –Like Granulation, Open And Close Filigree, Etching, Engraving, Repousse And Chasing, Embossing, Inlay, Enameling.

UNIT 4 THEORY- Shading- Objective, shadow and source of light, shading of surfaces, shading, object drawing PRACTICAL – Settings – Representation Of Different Types Of Setting Like Prong, Pave, Bezel, Channel, Fishtail, Invisible, Etc.

UNIT 5 THEORY- Shading of surfaces , textures, identification of textures , types of textures, color rendering, representation of metal colors, gemstone drawing of facetted stones, settings , representation of settings , chain, claps and its representation PRACTICAL – Chains, And Its Representation – Types Of Chain, Representation Of Chain,Clasps And Its Representation -Types Of Clasps, Representation Of Clasps

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will have: CO1: This unit has introduced you with the basic information about the tools and materials and their

use. After understanding their use their application will become very easy to design jeweler and master the skills.

CO2: After going through this unit you have learnt about the different metal surfaces and their representation in addition you have learnt to observe various textures around you and their used in Jewelry.

CO3: You learnt about the Gems stones their drawing, shading and rendering. This will be helpful for you to identity different cuts, shapes and varieties in the gem stones. This unit has given you the complete idea of representation of different settings in a Jewelry piece. This unit gives you an exposure to the types of chains and the different types of closing mechanisms used in Jewelry.

CO4: You have learnt metal rendering techniques and identifying the different metal colors.Be able to develop designs and communicate ideas


37

Course Outcome



CO1 M H M H M L

CO2 H H L M M

CO3 L H H H M L M

CO4 M M H H H


TEXT BOOKS/ WEBSITES www.cutting-mats.net/2634.html Hoke, C. M. (1940) Refining precious metal wastes: gold – silver – platinum metals, a handbook for

the jeweler, dentist and small refiner. Metallurgical Publishing Co., New York. McCreight, Tim. (1997) Jewelry: fundamentals of metalsmithing. Hand Books Press, Madison, WI.

http://www.cutting-mats.net/2634.html

38

BDJ104A FUNDAMENTAL OF COMPUTERS 3-0-0 [3]

OBJECTIVE Student will be able to analyze a problem and identify and define the computing requirements to

solution.

Ability to design, implement and evaluate a computer-based system, process, component or program to meet desired needs.

Ability to know the uses of computer.

Ability to Students will exhibit proficiency with software applications and demonstrate knowledge of computer technology and components to aide in their understanding of data and information.

This course examines the interaction between information and methods of communication technology.

UNIT 1 Explain to students why information systems are so important today for business and management; Evaluate the role of the major types of information systems in a business environment and their relationship to each other; Assess the impact of the Internet and Internet technology on business-electronic commerce and electronic business; Identify the major management challenges to building and using information systems and learn how to find appropriate solutions to those challenges

UNIT 2 Introduction: Generation of Computer, Functional components of ComputerNumber Systems: Number systems, fixed and floating point representation, addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of fixed point numbers.

UNIT 3 Computer Architecture: Logic Gates, Boolean algebra, Circuits, Decoders, Multiplexers, Registers, Bus System, Instruction cycle, Instruction Format, Addressing Modes

UNIT 4 Devices: Input and Output Devices. Memory: Primary Memory, Secondary Memory and Cache Memory.

UNIT 5 MS- Office Tools: Introduction to Word Processor, Electronic Spreadsheet, and Presentation tool

COURSE OUTCOME (CO): At the end of this course studentswill have: CO1: Explain and identify different computing machines during the evolution of computer system, gain knowledge about five generations of computer system, explain the functions of a computer, CO2 : Identify and discuss the functional units of a computer system, identify the various inputs and output units and explain their purposes and concept and need of primary and secondary memory. CO3: Define and distinguish Hardware and Software components of computer system, discuss the advantages, limitations and applications of computers,

39




CO1 H M M

CO2 M H H

CO3 H M

CO4 H M H


TEXT BOOKS

M. M. Mano, Computer System Architecture, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2008.

V Rajaraman, Fundamentals of Computers, Fifth Edition, PHI, 2010.

W. Stallings, Computer Organization and Architecture-Designing for Performance, 8th Edition, Pearson Education/PHI, Inc., 2010.

J. P. Hayes, Computer Architecture and Organization, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2012.

P.K. Sinha, PritiSihna , Computers Fundamental, 6th Edition BPB Publication,2011.

40

SEMESTER II

41

SEMESTER II L T P Contact

Hrs Credit Type

BDJ201A Metallurgy 2 - - 2 2

BDJ202A Gemology 2 - - 2 2

BDJ203A Material Exploration & Techniques -I

- 6 6 3

BDJ204A 2D & 3D Drawing 4 4 2

BDJ205A Jewelry Manufacturing-I - - 6 6 3

BDJ206A Computer Aided Design- I 6 6 3

BDJ207A Design Project – I ( Gold Jewelry)

- - 6 6 3

TOTAL 4 - 28 32 18

BDJ203A METALLURGY 2-0-0 [2]

AIM This unit aims to develop learners’ skills and understanding common to the broad area of 3D design and the potential design implications of selected materials. In this unit learner will know about Characteristics and properties of metals Classification of Metal group -Ferrous, Non-Ferrous, Alloys, Ores, origin, mining and methods, introduction to physical properties. In this unit learner will know about the techniques practiced in getting a final 3d product. Cutting and shaping of different types of metals with maintaining the quality and standards.

OBJECTIVE

To impart the knowledge of metals & the use of various laboratory equipment and other instruments used in Jewelry manufacturing lab.

To acquire a thorough knowledge of all precious and semi precious metals and the ways in which they are used in Jewelry.

To understand the different metals and their implementation.

To learn various Standard Weights and Measures. .

UNIT 1 Characteristics and properties of metals applicable in jewelry industry –ductility, malleability surface tension and absorption.

42

UNIT 2 Classification of Metal group -Ferrous, Non-Ferrous, Alloys, Ores. Mining and Techniques-Surface Mining, Subsurface Mining and types

UNIT 3 Basic Techniques of Jewelry Making- Measurement, Layout, Sawing, Drilling, Filing etc.Solders And Soldering–Meaning, Solders,FluxBasic Soldering Techniques Methods, Electronic Component, Pipe/Mechanical Soldering, Stained Glass Soldering.

UNIT 4 Precious Metals and their Mining, Methods of Refinement & Recovery, Application in Jewellery, Quality Control –Lowering or Raising Metal Quality, Hallmarking, Standard Weights and Measures.

UNIT 5 Manufacturing Process- Different Types Of Manufacturing Process, Handmade Jewelry, Advantages And Disadvantages. Stamping - Advantages And Disadvantages Modeling- Advantages And Disadvantages Casting Electroforming Process, Electroplating.

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: Be able to understand how to cut and shape metals CO2: Understand and apply the characteristics of metal used in jewellery design. CO3: Be able to demonstrate the use of metal in specific contexts. Be able to understand about quality certification of metal CO4: Understand how to use metal to meet intentions




CO1 M H M H M L

CO2 H H L M M

CO3 L H H H M L M

CO4 M M H H H


TEXT BOOKS Materials Science and Engineering : An Introduction by W.D. Callister

Physical Metallurgy Principles by R. Abbaschian and R.E. Reed Hill

Introduction to Materials Science for Engineers by James F. Shackelford

Powder Metallurgy : Science, Tech & Materials PB (English), ANISH UPADHYAYA ; GOPAL SHANKAR,2010, ORIENT BLACKSWAN PVT LTD.-NEW DELHI

Metallurgical Thermodynamics Kinetics and Numericals PB (English) 1st Edition, Dutta S K, 2011, S. CHAND & COMPANY LTD-NEW DELH

http://www.flipkart.com/powder-metallurgy-science-tech-materials-pb-english/p/itmdyu82syzje9rz?pid=9788173717178&ref=L%3A-5216494466147463606&srno=b_3

http://www.flipkart.com/metallurgical-thermodynamics-kinetics-numericals-pb-english-1st/p/itmd345q5ugm62kg?pid=9788121939645&ref=L%3A-5216494466147463606&srno=b_6

43

BDJ202A GEMOLOGY 2-0-0 [2]

AIM This unit aims to develop learners’ skills and understanding common to the broad area of 3D design and the potential design implications of selected materials. In this unit learner will know about definition, value of gemstone, classification and types, Geological occurrences, formation, origin, mining and methods, history and folklore, introduction to physical properties. In this unit learner will know about the techniques practiced in getting a final 3d product. Cutting and shaping of different types of gemstones, with maintaining the quality and standards.

OBJECTIVE To impart the knowledge of gemology & the use of various laboratory equipment such as the

gemological microscope, dichroscope, polar scope and other instruments used in Gem identification.

To acquire a thorough knowledge of all precious and semi precious stones and the ways in which they are used in jewelry.

UNIT 1 Definition , Value Of Gemstone , Introduction To Gemology, Instruments Used In Gemology , Moh’s Scale Of Hardness, Geological Occurrences, Formation Of Gemstone, Origin Of Gemstone, And Mining Of Gemstone.

UNIT 2 Classification Of Gemstones, Visual Observation, Crystallography, Physical Properties, Optical Properties,Refractive Index , Sources , Hardness ,Chemical Composition Of Gemstone, Crystals Structures And Crystallography Determining RI Magnification , Use Of Characteristics Inclusions As A Means Of Gem Identification.

UNIT 3 Organic Gemstones, Synthesis, Synthetics, Imitation & Composite, Enhancement. Manufacture Of Synthetics Gemstone, Types Of Stimulants. Identification Of Stimulants With Help Of Instruments

UNIT 4 Gem Spices 1.4 To 1.6, Gem Species 1.6 To 1.8, Gem Species Over 1.80,

UNIT 5 Gem Stone Processing Cabs: (Shapes) (Sawing, Shaping, Doping, Polishing), Gem Stone Processing Cut Stones (Shapes) (Sawing, Shaping, Doping, Cutting & Polishing),.

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: Be able to understand how to cut and shape cabochon and cut gemstones.

44

CO2: Understand and apply the characteristics of 3D used in jewelry materials. CO3: Be able to demonstrate the use of 3D materials in specific contexts. Be able to understand about quality certification. CO4: Understand how to use 3D materials to meet intentions.




CO1 H M H M H M L

CO2 H H H L M M

CO3 L H H H M L M

CO4 H M M H H H


TEXT BOOKS Hall, Cally (2000) Gemstones. Dorling Kindersley, London; New York.

Anderson, Basil W., and James Payne. (1998) The Spectroscope and Gemmology.

Gem Stone Press, Woodstock, VT.

Campbell Pedersen, Maggie. (2010) Gem and Ornamental Materials of Organic Origin. NAG Press, London.

Gem Reference Guide (1993). Gemological Institute of America, Santa Monica, CA.

Davies, Gordon. (1984) Diamond. A. Hilger, Bristol.

Field, J.E., ed. (1992) Properties of natural and synthetic diamond. Academic Press, London, New York.

Gems: Their Sources, Description and Identification. (2006) 6th Ed. by Michael O’Donoghue. Butterworth-Heinemann, Boston.

Hall, Cally (2000) Gemstones. Dorling Kindersley, London; New York.

O’Donoghue, Michael and Louise Joyner. (2003) Identification of gemstones.Butterworth Heinemann, Oxford.

45

BDJ203A METARIAL EXPLORATION AND TECHNIQUES-I 6-0-0 [3]

AIM This unit aims to develop learners’ skills and understanding the properties of materials - physical,

visual and creative qualities - for better criteria in the selection of these, considering the technical,

environmental and economic importance of the projects

OBJECTIVE Jewelry has long existed as a form of adornment and as a perceived enhancement of beauty and, as such, has roots in all cultures. Contemporary jewelry designers have reconsidered the role of ornament and its relationship to the human body to create a design aesthetic that results from innovative manipulation of shape and form and continuous exploration of the potential of materials. The ability to skillfully manipulate and explore these materials and techniques to exploit their full potential within both expected and unexpected contexts is the backbone of any designer’s work. An important aspect of this exploration is the continuous analysis and evaluation

of results and use of the knowledge and understanding gained to inform further work. UNIT 1 Exploring

● Copper & Brass

● Leather

● Paper

UNIT 2 Nature of Materials and Processes

● Properties and usage of various materials

● Process of selection and applications of various materials for consumer

products.

● Design limitations and specific advantages of particular product and their

processes

UNIT 3 Conceive and Create:

● Significance of form in structural strength of products

● Influence of materials and processes on product aesthetics

● Costing of various product material and their structure

UNIT 4 Metallic Material Technologies -I

● Measuring, checking and tracing apparatus

● Working benches

● Welding Equipment

● Protective equipment (gloves, masks, glasses, etc.)

UNIT 5 Metallic Material Technologies- II

● Miscellaneous tools

● Drilling machine

● Sawing machines

46

COURSE OUTCOME (CO): At the end of this course students will: COI: Understand and apply the characteristics of copper and brass, leather and paper on the jewelry

context.

CO2: To know the methods of work and manipulation of the materials.

CO3: To know the technical characteristics of the types of tools used to manipulate each material.

CO4: To plan and develop projects and products that involves different types of materials.




CO1 M M H M H M M

CO2 H H H H L H

CO3 M M H H H M L M

CO4 M M M H H H


TEXT BOOKS ● Jones, J.C: Design methods: Seeds of human futures, Wiley inter science, London, 1992.

● Gail Greet Hannah, Elements of Design, Princeton Architectural Press, 2002

Itten, Johannes; The Art of Color: The Subjective Experience and Objective Rationale of Color, Wiley Publications,1997

47

BDJ204A 2D & 3D DRAWING 0-4-0 [2]

AIM This unit will introduce the investigation of Isometric Drawing and differentiate between Isometric and Oblique Drawings. Students will be ableto create Isometric Drawings using the step-by-step processto create own Isometric Drawing of a given 2D and 3D object

OBJECTIVE Learn to provide people with a realistic view of what the object looks like.

Learn to differentiate between an isometric drawing and an orthographic projection drawing.

Learn to draw basic isometric objects. Learn to convert drawings from isometric to orthographic projection.

UNIT 1 Projections of Planes& Solids:

a) Plane parallel, perpendicular and inclined to one reference plane.

b) Plane inclined to both the reference planes.

c) Projections of regular solids, cube, prisms, pyramids, tetrahedron, cylinder

and cone, Axis inclined to both planes.

UNIT 2 Sections and Sectional Views Right Regular Solids – Prism, Cylinder, Pyramid, Cone – use of Auxiliary views.

UNIT 3 Development of Surfaces:

a) Development of Surfaces of Right, Regular Solids – Prisms, Cylinder,

Pyramids, Cone and their parts and Frustum of solids.

UNIT 4 Isometric Projections:

a) Principles of Isometric Projection – Isometric Scale, Isometric Views,

Conventions – Band,Rings, Pendants and Earrings

b) Simple and Compound Solids – Isometric Projection of objects having non-

isometric lines.

c) Isometric Projection of parts with Spherical surface.

UNIT 5 Transformation of Projections:

a) Conversion of Isometric Views to Orthographic Views and Conversion of

orthographic views to isometric views – Design projects

48

COURSE OUTCOME (CO): At the end of this course students will: COI: Make accurate isometric and orthographic views of various types of jewelry. CO2: Draw various views of rings, pendants, earrings etc. for an accurate understanding of its shape and other details CO3: Translate the manual orthographic and isometric views into CAD.




CO1 M M H M H M M M

CO2 H M H M M M

CO3 H M H HM H H L M


TEXT BOOKS ● Engineering Drawing – Basant, Agrawal, TMH ● Engineering Drawing, N.D. Bhatt ● Engineering Graphics. P I Varghese Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd ● Drawing for jewellers (master classes in professional design)hardcover– 28 may 2012

by maria josep forcadel(author) ● Jewellery IllustrationSpiral-bound– 10 Feb 2010

https://www.amazon.co.uk/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&field-author=MARIA+JOSEP+FORCADEL&text=MARIA+JOSEP+FORCADEL&sort=relevancerank&search-alias=books-uk

49

BDJ205A JEWELRY MANUFACTURING -I 0-6-0 [3]

AIM Understand the characteristics of light metals- their Visual, Tactile and Functional characteristics. Employ professional practice when working with light metals. Develop designs and communicate ideas. Use construction and finishing techniques to produce 3D outcomes.

OBJECTIVE This unit has introduced you with the basic information about the tools and materials and their


After going through this unit you have learnt about the different metal surfaces and their representation in addition you have learnt to observe various textures around you and their used in Jewelry.

UNIT 1 Jewelry Making - A Brief History, Work Space &Tools, Materials Used In Jewelry Industry (Pre Civilization Era, Growth Of Civilization, Metals, Gem Stones, Natural Material, Man Made Material, Other Material Used In Jewellery Making)

UNIT 2 Basic Tool Kit For Jewelry,Essential Tools For Jewelry Manufacturing Recommended Tools For Jewelry Manufacturing

UNIT 3 Basic Techniques Of Jewelry Manufacturing,Rolling Techniques Sawing, Piercing, Filling, Milling, Process On Sheet Metal – Repo usage, Chasing, Stamping, Stretching, Embossing, Blanking, Processes With Wire – Chains, Draw Plates, Cross Section, Wire Drawing, Bending, Cutting, Spirals, Forging, Jump-Rings, Chains, Twisting And Filigree. Shaping Doming Blocks , Dies Repousse And Chasing , Scoring And Bending

UNIT 4 Clips And Connections, Catches, Hinges, And Findings Different Types Closing Mechanisms Like Fold Over, Toggle, Lobster Claw, Springing, Box Tab Insert, Fish Hook, Hook And Eye, S-Hook, Barrel. Clips For Earring, Different Types Of Clasps And Locks – Box Clasps, Bead Lock, Tube Lock, Hinge Lock, Slide Lock, Connections With Half Ring For Settings, And With A Hinged Stud

Course Outcome (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: Understand the characteristics of light metals. CO2: Be able to develop designs and communicate ideas. CO3: Be able to use construction and finishing techniques to produce 3D outcomes CO4: Be able to employ professional practice when working with light metals.

50




CO1 H M H M H M L

CO2 M H H H M M M M

CO3 H M H H H M H L M

CO4 M M M H H H


TEXT BOOKS

Untracht, Oppi. (1982) Jewelry concepts and technology. Doubleday & Co., Garden City, N.Y.

Hoke, C. M. (1940) Refining precious metal wastes: gold – silver – platinum metals, a handbook for the jeweler, dentist and small refiner. Metallurgical Publishing Co., New York.

Loosli, Fritz, Herbert Merz and Alexander Schaffner. (1982) Practical jewelry making. Berne, UBOS/SCRIPTAR, Switzerland.

McCreight, Tim. (1997) Jewelry: fundamentals of metalsmithing. Hand Books Press, Madison, WI.

Revere, Alan. (2011) Professsional jewelry making: a contemporary guide to traditional jewelry techniques. Brynmorgen Press, Brunswick, ME.

Jewellery manufacture and repair by Charles Jarvis

Jewellery Making manual by Sylvia Wicks

Jewellery making techniques book by Elizabeth oliver

51

BDJ206A COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN I- (CORAL DRAW) 0-6-0 [3]

AIM In this module you will learn how to convert Manual Design in Digital Form through Corel with Exact measurement. In this module you will learn creating variation and Orthography concept. And Also Learn applying 3d rendering Effect by Photoshop project.

OBJECTIVE Students will learn the basics of Jewellery Design Software “Coral Draw”

Each content will cover the meticulous research about the 2D& 3D design by using Coral Draw.

Students will learn the process of manufacturing through CAM by visiting PCSIR and PGJDC

Investigating different perceptions about jewellery including traditional and contemporary.

Learning how to develop 2D drawings in multiple 3D perspectives.

Research and documentation of each project with the final 3D processing.

Submissions: PowerPoint presentation with digital prints.

UNIT 1 Introduction To Corel Draw,Basic Tools In Coral Draw,Various Shapes.

UNIT 2 Drawing &Shaping Objects, Transforming Objects, Corel Draw Effects, Working With Layer, DesignDevelopment, Color Fills And Outlines Tools, Gold Color Creation.

UNIT 3 Motif Development To Make Jewelry,Interactive Blend Tool,Diamond With Measurement , Stone Setting,Creating Shapes &Painting

UNIT 4 Theme Based Designing-Earrings , Bracelets , Pendants , Rings,Brooch,Necklace

UNIT 5 Special Effects To Images-Backgrounds,Text Option,Detail Of Jewelry Piece

Course Outcome (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: The student will be able to make more than one Appropriate Variation compared to original CO2: The student will be able to learn Exact Orthography CO3: The student will be able to apply 3D Rendering object CO4: The student will be able to learn how to save Sampling Cost.

52

MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES AND PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES: Course Outcome



CO1 H H M

CO2 H H M

CO3 H H M

CO4 H H H H H H M


TEXT BOOKS/WEBSITE http://product.corel.com/help/CorelDRAW/540229932/Main/EN/User-Guide/CorelDRAW-

X7.pdf

http://howto.corel.com/

http://www.insidegraphics.com/corel_basics/corel_draw_guidelines.asp

An Introduction to computer aided design for jewelry casting by Lucian Taylor

Corel Draw 11: the official guide dream tech publishers

http://product.corel.com/help/CorelDRAW/540229932/Main/EN/User-Guide/CorelDRAW-X7.pdf

http://product.corel.com/help/CorelDRAW/540229932/Main/EN/User-Guide/CorelDRAW-X7.pdf

http://howto.corel.com/

53

BDJ207A DESIGN PROJECT-I (GOLD JEWELRY) 0-6-0 [3]

AIM After Understanding the About Gold, Different Jewelry Markets Of India and World, Characteristics of Light Metals Their Visual, Tactile and Functional Characteristics. Student Will Be Able To Develop Designs And Communicate Ideas Using Drawing, Rendering Finishing Techniques Application Of Inspiration Into A Jewelry Product. Make Product Range of All the Design like Pendant, Earring, Flexible Bracelet, Fixed Bracelet, Bangle, Ring and Necklace. Make Product Detail For All Designs. Choose Any 1 Design And Make Prototype Of Gold Jewelry In Your Jewelry Manufacturing Module. To Develop Learners’ Skills Of Understanding Of Diamond And Different Markets Of Diamond Jewelry, And Their Use So That Student Can Use His Knowledge For Industry Demand. Basic Knowledge Of Materials Used In Jewelry With Understanding Of How To Apply Them On Paper And Then Developing 3D Outcomes As Prototype Of The Design Project Gold Jewelry

OBJECTIVE To look at designed objects, networks and environments more critically in our everyday life

To develop observational skills through which to investigate and understand Design.

To develop drawing as a means of expression and communication of the creative process

To develop creative problem solving through a variety of skills, techniques and processes

To become familiar with researching, investigating and evaluating a wide range of materials and their properties.

To have an informed opinion about Design and the design process and to be able to express those opinions.

UNIT 1 Inspiration Based Jewelry Design, What Is Inspiration, Why Do We Need Inspiration, Most Common Source Of Inspiration Like3 Natural Sources, Man-Made Sources, Historical Sources, Symbolic Sources, Other Sources Of Inspiration, Application Of Inspiration Into A Jewelry Product: Applying Design Elements And Principles To These Elements And Making As Many Variation And Options To Each Of The Chosen Elements. Line Placement /Repetition, Reduction And Enlargement, Grid Placement, Rotation, Skewing Or Twisting Or Folding.

UNIT 2 Selecting The Jewelry Forms / Styles Conceptualization: Concept Development, Generate Product Concepts; Select A Jewelry Concept, Rationale Behind Selecting A Form. Investigating The Inspiration To List The Motifs/ Elements Which Will Act As Forms For Developing Jewelry , Motifs And Its Types, Making Style Variations.

UNIT 3 Jewelry Design And Detailing: Design Detailing, Why Design Detailing Is Important, Steps Of Jewelry Design Detailing Process.

54

UNIT 4 Presentation Materials, Presentation Formats And Methods, Documentation And Compilation. Different Type Of Presentation Requirements And Allied Materials For It, Like Only For Designing, Manufacturing Specification, Marketing, / Branding / Promotion Why Documentation And Compilation Is Needed, Process Documentation , Documentation And Compilation For Marketing / Branding/ Promotion

UNIT 5 History Of Gold Jewelry In India, Analyzing Contemporary Gold Jewelry Trends In India, Traditional Indian Gold Smithing Techniques, Gold Appraisal, Market Identification, Culture Board, Jewelry Board, Client Board, Mood Board, Inspiration Board, Conceptualization And Form Generation, Final Design Development, Prototype Development, Portfolio.Inspiration Based Jewelry Design, InspirationBoard, Mood Board ,Client Board, MarketBoard, Brand BoardApplication Of Inspiration Into A Jewelry Product,Make Product Range Of All The Design Like Pendant, Earring , Flexible Bracelet , Fixed Bracelet, Bangle , Ring And Necklace, Make Product Detail For All Designs, Choose Any 1 Design And Make Prototype Of Gold Jewelry

Course Outcome (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: Understand the visual, tactile and decorative characteristics of jewelry materials. CO2: Be able to create a portfolio of development work. CO3: Be able to respond to design requirements. CO4: Understand professional practice in jewelry making.

On the completion of this task student will be able to prepare Jewelry Board, Client Board, Inspiration Board, Mood Board, and Inspiration board, Conceptualization and Form Generation, Final Design Development, Prototype Development & Portfolio.




CO1 H M H M H M M

CO2 H H H H M M M

CO3 H M H H H M L M

CO4 H H M M M H H H


TEXT BOOKS www.worldgoldcouncil.com

www.vogueindia.com

www.reliancejewels.com

www.damas.com

www.vendorafa.com

http://www.worldgoldcouncil.com/

http://www.vogueindia.com/

http://www.reliancejewels.com/

http://www.damas.com/

http://www.vendorafa.com/

55

SEMESTER III

56

SEMESTER III L T P Contact Hrs Credit Type

BDJ301A History of Jewelry Design and Context

3 - - 3 3

BDJ302A Budgeting & Costing 2 2 2

BDJ303A Material Exploration & Techniques -II

6 6 3

BDJ304A Jewelry Manufacturing-II - - 6 6 3

BDJ305A Computer Aided Design II (Corel Draw)

- - 6 6 3

BDJ306A Design Project- II (Diamond Jewelry)

- - 8 8 4

TOTAL 5 - 26 31 18

BDJ301A HISTORY OF JEWELRY DESIGN AND CONTEXT 3-0-0 [3]

AIM The aim of this course is to encourage an understanding of the social, psychological, cultural, historical and commercial factors which underpin all visual arts theory and practice across the spectrum of subject specialism. This course will develop the base for further study of design. The students will the evolution of jewelry design, evolution of various materials used in jewelry making and the different techniques and technologies used in the jewelry industry.

OBJECTIVE The aim of this unit is to extend knowledge and understanding of the research, analysis and

application of historical and contextual skills to a selected field of study. Establish clear link between art, craft and design movements and how they have impacted

Jewelry. Know various periods, time zones and prevailing socio-cultural conditions impacted the transition

and development of Jewelry. Understand that the happenings in a society at a given period of time and the major events lead to

the development of art, craft and design.

UNIT 1 Meaning Of Art, Craft And Design Movement. Different eras in art history like Pre- Historic Era, Ancient Civilization, Classical Civilization, middle Ages. What Do You Understand By Craft? What Do You Understand By Design?Different Design Movements. Significance of Art, Craft and Design Movement on Jewelry-Georgian,

57

Victorian, Art And Crafts Movement, Art Nouveau, Edwardian Period, Art Deco Renaissance, Romanticism, Gothic Art, Gothic Revival Movement.

UNIT 2 Impact Of Art, Craft And Design Movement On Jewelry, Impact of different periods on Jewelry like Georgian, Victorian, Romantic, Mid-Victorian, Late Victorian. Impact of arts and crafts movement on jewelry.Impact of different periods on jewelry like art nouveau, Edwardian period, Art Deco Renaissance, Romanticism, Gothic. Other important developments in sub cultures which existed around these important art and craft and design movements like Tribal Ancient and Ethnic Jewelry inferences. Impact of modern world’s culture on jewellery like Jewish jewelry influences, American influences, pacific influences post World War 1&2, influence of Hollywood.

UNIT 3 Evolution Of JewelryThe First Era , Pre Civilization, The Second Era, Growth Of Civilization, The Third Era , The Middle Ages ,The Fourth Era , The Industrial Period.

UNIT 4 Jewellery Trends And Future DirectionsTrends and Influences of History, Culture, Everyday Life. Learning From Past Traditions For Future Applications Like Cultural Practices, Marriage And Jewelry, Festivals And Jewelry, Other OccasionsIconic Motifs Used In Jewelry.

UNIT 5 Evolution Of Materials In Jewelry Industry Different Category Of Materials Used By Jewelry Industry In Different Eras Like Pre Civilization Era Material Used With The Growth Of Civilization Evolution Of Techniques And Technology In Jewelry Industry. Basic Techniques Of Jewelry Making Process Like Rolling, Preparing For Jewelry Products Making. Surface Decoration/ Ornamentation Techniques Like Engraving Scoring , Chip Carving , Metal Inlay , Etching, Reticulation, Granulation , Mokume Gane , Niello , Enameling , Texturing Metals Jewelry Making / Manufacturing Techniques Like Soldering , FindingStone Setting Jewelry Manufacturing Techniques With Respect To Different Metals and Materials Production Process – Casting, Cad Cam Technologies.

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: Understand the historical evolution and visual characteristics of the work of artists and designers. CO2: Understand and apply appropriate methods of research and analysis. CO3: Be able to apply the influences of historical, contemporary and contextual factors to own practice. CO4: This unit would have helped you gain /develop a perspective on key attributes and features of art movements in design.

58




CO1 M M H M H M M

CO2 H H H M M M

CO3 M M H H H M L M

CO4 H M M H H H


REFERENCES WEBSITE

http://www.erasofelegance.com/history/georgian.html

http://www.modernsilver.com/artnouveaudeco.html

http://www.victorianweb.org/art/design/craftintro.html

TEXT BOOKS Indian jewelry (book)- M. L . Nigam

Joan Evas – A history of jewelry , 1100-1870

Elizabeth Goring & Amande Game- Jewelry Moves: ornament for 21st century.

http://www.erasofelegance.com/history/georgian.html

http://www.modernsilver.com/artnouveaudeco.html

http://www.victorianweb.org/art/design/craftintro.html

59

BDJ302A BUDGETING & COSTING 2-0-0 [2]

AIM The brief of the course is to prepare the students to the use of budgets and cost in Jewelry industry. It aims to help students to set up and operate a budgetary control system through understanding of costing methods.

OBJECTIVE Be able to understand the process and documentation required for export Be able to enhance marketing skills Be able to train industry professionals to enhance export growth Be able to understand the trends and emergence of Jewelry brands and brand building Develop an understanding of fiscal, budgetary and planning issues of a business Apply the acquired knowledge to problem-solving and practical and personal situations

UNIT 1 Introduction to process and documentation in export market. ● Principal Documents. Auxiliary Documents. ● Documents for claiming Export Assistance

UNIT 2 Study quality issues: ● Study Quality standard & compliances ● Study Quality certification & hallmarking

UNIT 3 Costing: ● Jewelry pricing formula ● Cost Allocations ● Profit analysis

UNIT 4 Budgeting: ● Developing the budget ● Creating an invoice ● Customs Duty

UNIT 5 GST ● Jewelers Details

● Customer Details

● Sales Details ● Exchange Details ● Taxation and Billing Summary

60

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: Calculate the cost price, whole sale price and markup for jewelry CO2: Understand hallmarking in jewelry. CO3: Understand documentation for jewelry export.




CO1 H M H M H M M

CO2 H H H M M H

CO3 M M H H H M M H L H


TEXT BOOKS ● Advanced Cost Accounting. Jain, S/ Narang, K.

● Project Management Accounting: Budgeting, Tracking, and Reporting Costs and Profitability

(9780470044698): Kevin R. Callahan, Gary S. Stetz, Lynn M. Brooks

61

BDJ303A METARIAL EXPLORATION AND TECHNIQUES-II 6-0-0 [3]





of results and use of the knowledge and understanding gained to inform further work.

UNIT 1 Exploring:

● Silver ● Fabric ● Lacquer ● Enamel

UNIT 2 Nature of Materials and Processes:

● Properties and usage of various materials ● Process of selection and applications of various materials for consumer

products. ● Design limitations and specific advantages of particular product and their

processes


● Significance of form in structural strength of products ● Influence of materials and processes on product aesthetics ● Costing of various product material and their structure

UNIT 4 Material Technologies I


● Working benches

● Soldering Equipment

● Filling Machines

UNIT 5 Material Technologies II




62

● Sawing machines

COURSE OUTCOME (CO): At the end of this course students will: CO1: Understand and apply the characteristics of Silver, Fabric , Lakh, and Enamel on the jewelry

context;

CO2: To know the methods of work and manipulation of the materials;

CO3: To know the technical characteristics of the types of tools used to manipulate each material;

CO4: To plan and develop projects and products that involve different types of materials



PO1 PO2 PO1 PO2 PO1 PO2 PO1 PO2

CO1 M CO1 M CO1 M CO1 M

CO2 H CO2 H CO2 H CO2 H

CO3 M M CO3 M M CO3 M M CO3 M M



TEXT BOOKS Jones, J.C: Design methods: Seeds of human futures, Wiley inter science, London, 1992.

Gail Greet Hannah, Elements of Design, Princeton Architectural Press, 2002

Itten, Johannes; The Art of Color: The Subjective Experience and Objective Rationale of Color,

Wiley Publications,1997

● https://www.jewelleryschoolonline.com/the-silver-jewellery-workshop/ ● http://www.londonjewelleryschool.co.uk/certification-classes/silver-jewellery-5-day-intensive/

https://www.jewelleryschoolonline.com/the-silver-jewellery-workshop/


http://www.londonjewelleryschool.co.uk/certification-classes/silver-jewellery-5-day-intensive/


63

BDJ304A JEWELLERY MANUFACTURING -II 0-6-0 [3]

AIM Learn to choose when to use a specific tool or manufacturing process. Convert and represent different types of surfaces and finishes, shading three dimensional surfaces and translate a two-dimensional surface into three dimensional forms. This unit aims to develop learners’ practical skills and understanding when working with light metals and in translating designs into 3D outcomes.




Understand the characteristics of light metals.

UNIT 1 Develop a Personal Design from a Diamond design project

UNIT 2 Use Previously Learned Techniques to Showcase Personal Style and Artistic Discovery

UNIT 3 Application of Advanced Techniques in Soldering, Cold-Connections, Piercing, and Use of Alternative Media

UNIT 4 Conceptualization & Form Generation, Final Design Development,

UNIT 5 Creating Visual Harmony in Design Elements

COURSE OUTCOME (CO): At the end of this course students will: CO1: Be able to develop designs and communicate ideas CO2: Be able to use construction and finishing techniques to produce 3D outcomes CO3: Be able to employ professional practice when working with light metals. CO4: Understand how to use metal to meet intentions

64

MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES AND PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES:

Course Outcome



CO1 M H M H M L

CO2 H H L M M

CO3 L H H H M L M

CO4 M M H H H


Suggested reading

www.gemstonejewellerydesigns.co.uk www.angara.com www.jewellerygemstone.com www.cutting-mats.net/2634.html Untracht, Oppi. (1982) Jewelry concepts and technology. Doubleday & Co., Garden City, N.Y. Hoke, C. M. (1940) Refining precious metal wastes: gold – silver – platinum metals, a handbook

for the jeweler, dentist and small refiner. Metallurgical Publishing Co., New York. Loosli, Fritz, Herbert Merz and Alexander Schaffner. (1982) Practical jewelry making. Berne,

UBOS/SCRIPTAR, Switzerland. McCreight, Tim. (1997) Jewelry: fundamentals of metalsmithing. Hand Books Press, Madison,

WI. Revere, Alan. (2011) Professsional jewelry making: a contemporary guide to traditional jewelry

techniques. Brynmorgen Press, Brunswick, ME.

BDJ305A COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN – II(CORAL DRAW) 0-6-0 [3]

http://www.gemstonejewellerydesigns.co.uk/

http://www.angara.com/

http://www.jewellerygemstone.com/


65

AIM

In this module you will learn how to convert Manual Design in Digital Form through Corel with Exact measurement. In this module student will learn creating variation and Orthography concept. And Also Learn applying 3d rendering Effect by Photoshop project.

OBJECTIVE Students will learn the basics of Jewelry Design Software “Coral Draw”

Each content will cover the meticulous research about the 2D& 3D design by using Coral Draw.


Investigating different perceptions about jewelry including traditional and contemporary.

Learning how to develop 2D drawings in multiple 3D perspectives.

Research and documentation of each project with the final 3D processing.

Submissions: PowerPoint presentation with digital prints.

UNIT 1 Corel Draw, Photoshop, Creating & Editing 3-D Images.

UNIT 2 Introduction to Corel Draw, Drawing & Shaping Objects, Transforming Objects, Corel Draw Effects.

UNIT 3 Working with Layer, Creating Shapes & Painting, Concept of Orthography by Corel.

UNIT 4 Gold Color Creation, Stone Setting.

UNIT 5 Color & Element Variation, 3D Rendering.

COURSE OUTCOME (CO): At the end of this course students will: CO1: The student will be able to make more than one Appropriate Variation compared to original CO2: The student will be able to learn Exact Orthography. CO3: The student will be able to apply 3D Rendering object. CO4: The student will be able to learn how to save Sampling Cost. MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES AND PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES:

Course Outcome



CO1 H H M

CO2 H H M

CO3 H H M

CO4 H H H H H H M


66

BDJ306A DESIGN PROJECT- II (DIAMOND JEWELRY) 0-8-0 [4]

AIM After understanding the about diamonds, different jewelry markets of India and world, characteristics of light metals their Visual, tactile and functional characteristics. Student will be able to develop designs and communicate ideas using drawing, rendering finishing techniques application of inspiration into a jewelry product. Make product range of all the design like pendant, earring, flexible bracelet, fixed bracelet, bangle, ring and necklace. Make product detail for all designs. Choose any 1 design and make prototype of gold jewelry in your jewelry manufacturing module.

OBJECTIVE

To develop learners’ skills of independent enquiry by undertaking a sustained investigation of direct relevance to their vocational, academic and professional development.

Understanding of diamond and different markets of diamond jewelry and their use so that student can use his knowledge for industry demand.

Basic knowledge of materials used in Jewelry with understanding of how to apply them on paper.

UNIT 1 Diamond Introduction

5-C’s Of The Diamond

Sources Of Diamonds, Diamond Properties –Physical, Chemical, And Optical

Optical Properties

UNIT 2 Analyzing Global Diamond Jewelry Brands, Analyzing Indian Diamond Jewelry Brands,

UNIT 3 Diamond Jewelry Manufacturing process, Diamond Jewelry Trend & Forecast,

UNIT 4 Market identification, Culture board, Jewelry board, Client board, Mood board, Inspiration board


UNIT 6 Cost assessment techniques, Prototype Development, Packaging, and Portfolio.

COURSE OUTCOME (CO)

At the end of this course students will: CO1: Be able to formulate a project CO2: Be able to evaluate the project outcomes. CO3: Be able to present the project outcomes CO4: On the completion of this task student will be able to prepare Jewelry Board, Client Board, Inspiration Board, Mood Board, and Inspiration board, Conceptualization and Form Generation, Final Design Development, Prototype Development & Portfolio

67




CO1 H M H M H M H

CO2 H M H H H H M M

CO3 H M H H H M L M

CO4 H M M M H H H


TEXT BOOK www.gitanjalilifestyle.com www.google.com www.youtube.com www.ddmas.com www.debeers.com www.tanishq.com www.chopard.com www.chanel.com Facets J Q Magazine Couture International Jeweler Jewel regent beyond luxury

http://www.gitanjalilifestyle.com/

http://www.google.com/

http://www.youtube.com/

http://www.ddmas.com/

http://www.debeers.com/

http://www.tanishq.com/

http://www.chopard.com/

http://www.chanel.com/

68

SEMESTER IV

69

SEMESTER IV L T P Contact Hrs Credit Type

BDJ401A Jewelry Design Trends and Forecast

3 - - 3 3

BDJ402A Material Exploration & Techniques -III

- - 6 6 3

BDJ403A Jewelry Manufacturing-III - - 6 6 3

BDJ404A Computer Aided Design- III (Rhino)

6 6 3


A. Photography B. Lifestyle Accessory Design

- - 4 4 2

BDJ406A Design Project-III (Kundan Meena)

- 8 8 4

TOTAL 3 30 33 19

BDJ401A JEWELLERY DESIGN TRENDS AND FORECAST 3-0-0 [3]

AIM In this course you will develop and apply your skills and knowledge of theoretical methods and practical applications of trend forecasting to research and analyze trends that influence fashion and textiles products for the industry and end consumers. You will investigate the specialized study and knowledge based application of micro environments, global, social and cultural issues and their impact on consumer behavior. You will incorporate strategic decision making in recognizing the patterns, cycles and dissemination of information. Your investigation will determine a framework to specifically apply creative and analytical skills in the trend forecasting process. OBJECTIVE

In this course you will develop the following program learning outcomes: Critically analyze, synthesize and reflect on complex theories and recent developments, both local and international, at a micro and macro level, to extend and challenge knowledge and practice in Jewellery entrepreneurship.

Professionally communicate propositions, processes and outcomes to address specialist and non-specialist audiences while working with cultural differences in an appropriate manner.

Implement research methodologies and methods to design and execute substantial applied and research projects, evaluate the outcomes and contribute to the fashion and textiles profession and the field of knowledge in fashion entrepreneurship.

70

UNIT 1 Trend Materials & jewelry Development: ● materials for research; ● Color Practice ● Interactions between colors and materials ● Briefing and mood board creation ● Materials Art buying ● Product development ● Jewelry design management

UNIT 2 Trend Design research, Transmission and interpretation

Fashion and jewelry trend terminology ● Trends in luxury jewelry x fast fashion jewelry ● The trend industry ● Nature of trends ● Trends in urban environment. ● Information Management ● Visualization techniques ● Argumentation strategies

UNIT 3 Fashion Jewelry market and marketing environment research ● market research ● Trend research techniques ● research design & data sources ● Sampling methods ● evaluating the collections ● Forecasting Fashion ● Market Segmentation marketing mix ● Jewelry consumer

UNIT 4 Trend Analysis ● Evolution of jewelry trend ● Jewelry trend implications for design / retail decisions ● Consumer influence on market

UNIT 5 Jewelry Forecasting ● Jewelry Forecasting Process ● Diffusion of Innovation ● Fashion Cycles ● Cultural Indicators ● Color Forecasting ● Metal alloy and Gemstones Forecasting ● Styling Forecasting ● Sales Forecasting Competitive Analysis

71

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: Able to assess and review the requirements and operational methods of the role of a trend

forecaster relevant to jewelry entrepreneurship. CO2: Substantiate and apply appropriate research methodologies to identify and analyze alternative

research sources for identifying global trend directions. CO3: Research and critically analyze the challenges and opportunities of translating trend scenarios

into the development of jewelry products.




CO1 H M H M H H M

CO2 H H H M M M

CO3 H H H H H M H M


TEXT BOOKS Evelyn L. Brannon, (2010) Fashion Forecasting Research, Analysis, And Presentation, Fairchild

Publications. Evelyn L. Brannon, (2005) Fashion Forecasting, Fairchild Publications. Trendvision.com

72

BDJ402A METARIAL EXPLORATION AND TECHNIQUES-III 6-0-0 [3]





of results and use of the knowledge and understanding gained to inform further work.

UNIT 1 Exploring:

● Wood ● Resin ● Bead ● Blue Pottery

UNIT 2 Nature of Materials and Processes:

● Properties and usage of various materials ● Process of selection and applications of various materials for

Consumer products. ● Design limitations and specific advantages of particular

product and their processes


● Significance of form in structural strength of products ● Influence of materials and processes on product aesthetics ● Costing of various product material and their structure

UNIT 4 Material Technologies I


● Working benches

● Soldering Equipment

● Filling Machines

UNIT 5 Material Technologies II




73

● Sawing machines

COURSE OUTCOME (CO): At the end of this course students will: CO1: Understand and apply the characteristics of Wood, Resin , Blue pottery, and Enamel on the

jewelry context;

CO2: To know the methods of work and manipulation of the materials;

CO3: To know the technical characteristics of the types of tools used to manipulate each material;

CO4:To plan and develop projects and products that involve different types of materials



PO1 PO2 PO1 PO2 PO1 PO2 PO1 PO2


CO2 H CO2 H CO2 H CO2 H

CO3 M M CO3 M M CO3 M M CO3 M M



TEXT BOOKS Jones, J.C: Design methods: Seeds of human futures, Wiley inter science, London, 1992.

Gail Greet Hannah, Elements of Design, Princeton Architectural Press, 2002

Itten, Johannes; The Art of Color: The Subjective Experience and Objective Rationale of Color,


● https://www.jewelleryschoolonline.com/the-silver-jewellery-workshop/ ● http://www.londonjewelleryschool.co.uk/certification-classes/silver-jewellery-5-day-intensive/





74

BDJ403A JEWELLERY MANUFACTURING -III 0-6-0 [3]

AIM Learn to choose when to use a specific tool or manufacturing process. Convert and represent different types of surfaces and finishes, shading three dimensional surfaces and translate a two-dimensional surface into three dimensional forms. This unit aims to develop learners’ practical skills and understanding when working with light metals and in translating designs into 3D outcomes.

OBJECTIVE

This unit has introduced you with the basic information about the tools and materials and their use. After understanding their use their application will become very easy to design jeweler and master the skills.



UNIT 1 Develop a Personal Design from a Kundan Meena design project





COURSE OUTCOME (CO)

At the end of this course students will: CO1: Be able to develop designs and communicate ideas CO2: Be able to use construction and finishing techniques to produce 3D outcomes CO3: Be able to employ professional practice when working with light metals. CO4: Understand how to use metal to meet intentions

75


Course Outcome



CO1 M H M H M L

CO2 H H L M M

CO3 L H H H M L M

CO4 M M H H H


TEXT BOOKS/WEBSITE Www.Gemstonejewellerydesigns.Co.Uk Nizam Jewels Www.Jewellerygemstone.Com Www.Cutting-Mats.Net/2634.Html




76

BDJ404A COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN-III (RHINO) 0-6-0 [3]

AIM RHINO module III leads to the practice of advance tools and terminologies of Matrix software. It includes processing of the design for the wax modelling, export and import in different file formats, estimation of the design, product making and cost reduction. Learning of how to advertise the product through catalogues and branding. Power point presentations /handouts about deign development and basic terminologies use in CAD/CAM course will be presented as per required

OBJECTIVE Students will learn the advance level of tools by learning Jewelry Design Software “RHINO”

Each content will cover the meticulous research about the 3D design by using Rhino


Investigating different perceptions about jewellery including traditional and contemporary

Learning how to develop 2D drawings in multiple 3D perspectives and execution of CAD

Research and documentation of each project with the final 3D processing

The Final outcome in result of CAM

Submissions: PowerPoint presentation with digital prints and CAM processed prototypes to make mass production out of one piece.

UNIT 1 Introduction To Rhino, Surfacing ,Stone Setting ,Texture

UNIT 2 Text Surfacing , Scooping , Creating Gallery & J-Bag,

UNIT 3 Gold Weight Controlling,

UNIT 4 Creating Human Figure In Rhino

UNIT 5 Converting In To Dye Format, Casting Through CAD-CAM Process.

COURSE OUTCOME (CO)

At the end of this course students will: CO1: Understand use of specialist 3D technology and processes in chosen pathway CO2: Be able to apply understanding of specialist processes to produce design work CO3: Be able to produce outcomes using specialist 3D technology and processes CO4: Be able to evaluate own work

77


Course Outcome



CO1 H H M M H M M

CO2 H H M H M M

CO3 H H M H M M

CO4 H H H H H M M


TEXT BOOKS/WEBSITE Rhino for JewelryPaperback– 2 Jul 2010byDana Buscaglia(Author)

https://www.amazon.in/Dana-Buscaglia/e/B00J30X6S6/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1

78

BJD405A A. PHOTOGRAPHY (ELECTIVE) 0-4-0 [2]

AIM This unit aims to develop learners’ skills and understanding in Product Photography.Students will get Knowledge of the history of the photographic medium and how it relates to the history of the other fine arts

OBJECTIVE Various aspects of photography including lighting for indoor & outdoor, handling of studio equipment and set planning & composition.

UNIT 1 Various aspects of photography including lighting for Indoor & Outdoor

UNIT 2 Handling of studio equipment

UNIT 3 Set planning

UNIT 4 Composition.

UNIT 5 Final Product Photography

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will:

CO1 Be able to use space and equipment. CO2 Be able to use sets, lights and backgrounds. CO3: Apply the principles of lighting and color theory to a variety of photographic scenarios by measuring, evaluating, and adjusting light and color to create quality images.



PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 H H M M H M

CO2 H H M H M

CO3 H H M H M


TEXT BOOKS

Understanding Exposure: How to Shoot Great Photographs with a Film or Digital Cameraby Bryan Peterson

The Photographer's Eye: Composition and Design for Better Digital Photos by Michael Freeman

https://www.goodreads.com/author/show/82078.Bryan_Peterson

https://www.goodreads.com/author/show/118349.Michael_Freeman

79

BDJ405A B. LIFESTYLEACCESSORY DESIGN(ELECTIVE) 0-4-0 [2]

AIM The Lifestyle Accessory Design (LAD) postgraduate program educates and trains professional designers to visualize and create lifestyle accessories and systems using different materials, processes and technologies.

OBJECTIVE

• generate and evaluate design ideas for given briefs relevant to fashion accessories • create a more integrated fashion look with an understanding of the role of accessories • experiment with a variety of materials and techniques relevant to fashion accessories • apply relevant millinery and costume jewelry skills • present fashion accessories work in a professional manne

UNIT 1 Lacquer Craft Accessories

UNIT 2 Textile Craft Accessories

UNIT 3 Wood Craft Accessories

UNIT 4 Metal Craft Accessories

UNIT 5 Leather Craft &Packaging

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: Student will be able to understand about fashion accessories. CO2: Student will be able to understand the techniques & process of fashion accessories. CO3: Student will be able to understand the product development, quality & marketing aspects.




CO1 H H M M H M M

CO2 H H M H M M

CO3 H H M H M M


TEXT BOOKS ANLEZARK, M., Hats on Heads. Kangaroo Press, Kenthurst NSW, 1991

COULDRIDGE, A., The Hat Book. Ventura Publishing Ltd, London, 1980

80

BDJ406A DESIGN PROJECT III – KUNDAN MEENA 0-8-0 [4]

AIM After Understanding the About Enamels And Enameling, Different Jewelry Markets Of India And World, Characteristics Of Light Metals Their Visual, Tactile And Functional Characteristics. Student Will Be Able To Develop Designs And Communicate Ideas Using Drawing, Rendering Finishing Techniques Application Of Inspiration Into A Jewelry Product. Make Product Range of All The Design Like Pendant, Earring, Flexible Bracelet, Fixed Bracelet, Bangle, Ring And Necklace. Make Product Detail For All Designs. Choose Any 1 Design And Make Prototype Of Gold Jewelry In Your Jewelry Manufacturing Module.

OBJECTIVE

This unit will enable learners to understand the factors relevant to product design, and to develop skills in planning and producing prototypes.

To make understand the contrasting difference between casted jewelry and traditional Kundan-Meena jeweler.

Understanding of traditional and contemporary Kundan Meena. Understanding the technique through practical demonstration.

Understanding the process of traditional jewelry class in India. A comparative analysis of the past Kundan Jadau work as compared to the present.

Range development using Kundan Meena technique according to jewelry trends and forecast UNIT 1 History Of Kundan Meena Jewelry In India, Analyzing Contemporary Kundan

Meena Jewelry Trends In India, Traditional Kundan Meena Jewelry Manufacturing Process, Market Identification, Culture Board, Jewelry Board, Client Board, Mood Board, Inspiration Board, Conceptualization And Form Generation, Final Design Development, Cost Assessment Techniques

UNIT 2 Analyzing Global Jewelry Brands, Analyzing Indian Jewelry Brands,

UNIT 3 Kundan Meena Jewelry Manufacturing Process, Jewelry Trend & Forecast,

UNIT 4 Market Identification, Culture Board, Jewelry Board, Client Board, Mood Board, Inspiration Board

UNIT 5 Conceptualization & Form Generation.

UNIT 6 Final Design Development, , Prototype Development, Packaging, Portfolio.

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: Understand The Principles Of Kundan Meena Design CO2: Be Able To Plan And Design A Product To Meet Requirements CO3: Be Able To Use Technology To Produce Models, Prototypes And Presentation Materials

81

CO4: Understand The Connections Between Design Management And Manufacturing.




CO1 M H M H M H M M

CO2 M H H H M H M M

CO3 M H H H H M M

CO4 M H H M M H H H H


TEXT BOOKS/WEBSITES

Www.Renelalique.Com Www.Birdhichandghanshyamdasjewelry.Com Www.Sunitashekhawat.Com When Jewelry Speaks KhannaJewellers.com KalajeeJewellers.com HazoorlilalJewellers.com When jewelry speaks by

http://www.renelalique.com/

http://www.birdhichandghanshyamdasjewelry.com/

http://www.sunitashekhawat.com/

82

SEMESTER V

83

SEMESTER V L T P Contact Hrs Credit Type

BDJ501A Marketing & Merchandising 3 - - 3 3

BDJ502A Professional Practice 3 - - 3 3

BDJ503A Jewelry Manufacturing-IV - - 6 6 3

BDJ504A Computer Aided Design -IV - - 6 6 3



B. E-Commerce

- - 4 4 2

BDJ506A

Design Project-IV

(Couture Jewelry )

8 8 4

BDJ507A Educational Trip - - - 2

TOTAL

84

BDJ501A MARKETING & MERCHANDISING 3-0-0 [3]

AIM The brief of this unit to enable the student with an understanding of the essential elements of Jewelry merchandising and promotion & its role within the Jewellery industry.

OBJECTIVE Learn the skills necessary to work as store buyers, market analysts or jewelry event planners. Learn about human relations Learn about product development and presentation Learn about local/global market

UNIT 1 Significance of Jewelry industry ● Overview of the Jewelry industry. ● Current scenario. ● Role of Jewelry industry in Indian economy.

UNIT 2 Jewelry merchandising ● Introduction to Jewelry merchandising. ● Role of merchandiser. ● Qualities of a merchandiser. ● Responsibility of the Jewelry merchandiser.

UNIT 3 Visual merchandising and its elements ● Visual merchandising and its advantages for the buyer and seller today. ● Jewelry calendar. ● The planning cycle. ● Merchandise planner.

UNIT 4 Trend analysis and forecasting ● Trend prediction. ● Sales forecasting. ● Product selection and mix, Distribution mix. ● Distribution channels, from producer to ultimate consumer. ● Jewelry supply chains. ● Buying calendar & Buying strategy.

UNIT 5 Jewelry Retail ● Role and responsibility of the retail Jewelry buyer. ● Customer identification, Supplier, Sourcing.

85

● Global sourcing, Range planning and range building.

UNIT 6 E-Commerce

Market Research

Variants on product pages (Which size, color, band, stone)

Customization (Personal engraving, gift boxes)

Recurring Billing

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: Be able to demonstrate the application of oral, written, and visual communication skills to present specifications/information and support decision making. CO2: Understand the unique aspects of fashion marketing and create strategic promotional plans in print, visual displays and online marketing. CO3: Analyze the jewelry consumer and market trends. CO4: Use research skills and analysis methods in order to produce a range of jewelry designs and

products

86




CO1 M H H H M H M M

CO2 M H H H H M M

CO3 H H H H H M M M

CO4 M H H M M H M H


WEBSITES

Case Studies in Marketing – Indian context - R.Srinivas

Marketing Management Text And Cases in Indian Context-Dr.K.Karunakaran

Marketing Management Text and Cases-Biplab Bose

https://www.visenze.com/blog/jewelry-e-commerce-learning-points-from-indias-leaders-

caratlane-and-bluestone

https://www.voylla.com/

https://www.tribebyamrapali.com/

https://www.visenze.com/blog/jewelry-e-commerce-learning-points-from-indias-leaders-caratlane-and-bluestone

https://www.visenze.com/blog/jewelry-e-commerce-learning-points-from-indias-leaders-caratlane-and-bluestone

https://www.voylla.com/

87

BDJ502A PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE 3-0-0 [3]

AIM The Objective Of This Course Is To Critically Look Into The Project And Office Management Practice Emphasizing On Professional Services And Professional Ethics As Well As Project Responsibilities. In This Module, Students Are Required To Demonstrate An Analytical And Methodical Approach To The Process Of Developing, Programming And Implementing Design Solutions. Students Must Reach And Comply With All Legal & Ethical Restrictions Relevant To Them, And Students Are Expected To Demonstrate A High Professional Standard Of Organizational And Time Management Skills, And The Ability To Price Their Services Competitively.It Includes Design Ethics, Principles, Practices, Typical Contract Document Formats, And Resumes Concepts Related To Professional Practice. Awareness Of Current Legal Problems And Professional Ethics Relative To Handling Projects From Feasibility Studies Through Development Drawings, Contract Documents, Bidding, And Supervision. Investigation Of Processes, Practices, And Ethics Involved In Interior Design Profession. Course Emphasizes Integration Of Specifications, Cost Estimating, Office And Project Management, And Contract Writing Into The Design Process.

OBJECTIVE Understand the scope of services and areas of responsibility that are encountered in the

Jewelry profession Learn about Pre-Design, Project and Office Administration Learn about Design methodology, cost analysis, budget formulation and pro forma procedures Learn about office management emphasizing professional service and ethics Learn about project management focusing on the Jewelry professional’s responsibilities during

a project

UNIT 1 Quality and its Attributes ● Quality standards and compliances ● Quality certification and hallmarking

UNIT 2 IPR ● Introduction to Intellectual property rights (IPR) issues. ● Overview & Importance; IPR in India and IPR abroad. ● Patents; their definition; granting; infringement; searching & filing. ● Copyrights; their definition; granting; infringement, searching& filing,

distinction between related and copy rights.

UNIT 3 Goal setting, Career direction, Responsibilities.

Family business approach / advantages and concerns.

UNIT 4 Skills and development ● Presentation skills, Personal development

88

UNIT 5 Promotional opportunities.

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: To be able to place themselves and their work in the context of their selected discipline. CO2: To understand their specialist area and the career opportunities available. CO3: To understand how to promote themselves and their work professionally.




CO1 M H M H M H M M

CO2 M H H H M H M M

CO3 M H H H H M M


TEXT BOOKS

● P.N. Cheremisinoff, R.P. Ouellette and R.M.Bartholomew,Biotechnology Applications and Research, Technomic Publishing Co., Inc. USA, 1985

● D.Balasubramaniam, C.F.A.Bryce,K. Dharmalingam, J. Green and K. Jayaraman, Concepts in Biotechnology, University Press (Orient Longman Ltd.), 2002

● Bourgagaize, Jewell and Buiser,Biotechnology: Demystifying the Concepts, Wesley Longman, USA, 2000.

● Ajit Parulekar and Sarita D’ Souza, Indian Patents Law – Legal & Business Implications; Macmillan India ltd , 2006

● B.L.Wadehra; Law Relating to Patents, Trade Marks, Copyright, Designs & Geographical Indications; Universal law Publishing Pvt. Ltd., India 2000

● P. Narayanan; Law of Copyright and Industrial Designs; Eastern law House, Delhi , 2010

89

BJD503A JEWELLERY MANUFACTURING -IV 0-6-0 [3]

AIM Learn to choose when to use a specific tool or manufacturing process. Convert and represent different types of surfaces and finishes, shading three dimensional surfaces and translate a two-dimensional surface into three dimensional forms. This unit aims to develop learners’ practical skills and understanding when working with light metals and in translating designs into 3D outcomes





UNIT 1 Develop a Personal Design from a Luxury Brand design project





COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: Be able to develop designs and communicate ideas CO2: Be able to use construction and finishing techniques to produce 3D outcomes CO3: Be able to employ professional practice when working with light metals. CO4: Understand how to use metal to meet intentions




CO1 M H M H M L

CO2 H H L M M

CO3 L H H H M L M

CO4 M M H H H


90

Suggested Reading

Www.Gemstonejewellerydesigns.Co.Uk Www.Angara.Com Www.Jewellerygemstone.Com Www.Cutting-Mats.Net/2634.Html Untracht, Oppi. (1982) Jewelry Concepts And Technology. Doubleday & Co., Garden City, N.Y. Hoke, C. M. (1940) Refining Precious Metal Wastes: Gold – Silver – Platinum Metals, A

Handbook For The Jeweler, Dentist And Small Refiner. Metallurgical Publishing Co., New York. Loosli, Fritz, Herbert Merz And Alexander Schaffner. (1982) Practical Jewelry Making. Berne,

UBOS/SCRIPTAR, Switzerland. Mccreight, Tim. (1997) Jewelry: Fundamentals Of Metalsmithing. Hand Books Press, Madison,

WI. Revere, Alan. (2011) Professsional Jewelry Making: A Contemporary Guide To Traditional

Jewelry Techniques. Brynmorgen Press, Brunswick, ME.


http://www.angara.com/



91

BJD504A COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN-IV (RHINO) 0-6-0 [3]

AIM In this module you will learn how to Create Jewelry Design through Advanced 3Design software and how to use 3Design in making master model & Mass Production with Exact measurement, Fine finishing, Real 3d Rendering & Creating Video of design And Learn how can we control gold weight also.

OBJECTIVE Each content will cover the meticulous research about the 3D design by using “RHINO” Students will learn the process of manufacturing through CAM by visiting PCSIR and PGJDC Investigating different perceptions about jewellery including traditional and contemporary Learning how to develop 2D drawings in multiple 3D perspectives and execution of CAD Research and documentation of each project with the final 3D processing The Final outcome in result of CAM Submissions: PowerPoint presentation with digital prints and CAM processed prototypes to make

mass production out of one piece

UNIT 1 Concept Of 3D & 3Design, Concept Of Surfacing,

UNIT 2 Stone Setting, Texture Concept, Text Surfacing

UNIT 3 Stone Setting, Texture Concept, Text Surfacing, Concept Of Scooping, Concept Of Beezal Creating

UNIT 4 Concept Of Gold Weight Controlling, Concept Of Human Design Creating By Shaper

UNIT 5 Real 3D Rendering, Video Creating, Concept Of Converting In Dye Formatting, Concept Of Casting Through CAD-CAM Process.


CO1: Able to develop 3D Design with Rendering. CO2: Able to develop exact setting in Design. CO3: Able to Gold Controlling. CO4: Able to Create Master Model & Rubber Dye to Create Different Joints for flexibility.

92




CO1 H H H M L H M L M

CO2 H M M M M L H H H H

CO3 H M H M H H H H M

CO4 H M H M H L H H H H H


TEXT BOOKS

Cadd3designhelp/Guide/Tutorial.

93

BJD505A A. VISUAL MERCHANDISING (ELECTIVE) 0-4-0 [2]

AIM This course would require the students to develop merchandising plan for the women’s apparel. The basics of visual merchandising, display windows, planning etc., would be covered in this course.

OBJECTIVE

Be able to promote jewelry merchandise.

Be able to understand the attraction of the customers. Be able to understand the retail store promotion.

Student will get knowledge of creativity, technical and operational aspects of the business and merchandise.

UNIT 1 Merchandising concepts and theories tools

UNIT 2 Techniques for merchandise

UNIT 3 Display, windows

UNIT 4 Creative thinking for merchandise display

UNIT 5 Store layout, display, Jewelry retailing

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: Present and coordinate merchandise so that related goods are shown in a unique, desirable, and salable manner. CO2: Apply basic design principles and colour theories to the construction of promotional displays and advertising. CO3: Understand the basic functions of retail store operations including store location and layout, shopping center analysis, retail market segmentation and strategies, and the merchandising mix. CO4: Prepare and execute displays for exhibitions and promotional events using the visual dynamics of light as a design element.




CO1 H H M M H M M

CO2 M H H M H M M

CO3 H H M H M

CO4 H H H H H M M


TEXT BOOKS Visual Merchandising 2nd editionPaperback– 19 Oct 2011 by Tony Morgan

Jewellery Design: From Fashion to Fine Jewellery by Elizabeth Galton

https://www.google.co.in/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Elizabeth+Galton+(Jewellery+designer)%22

94

BDJ505A B. E- COMMERCE (ELECTIVE) 0-4-0 [2]

AIM The aim of this unit is to develop understanding of the dynamics of online business and online buying behavior to create a consumer-oriented online business strategy along with holistic knowledge on product development for E-Commerce platform.

OBJECTIVE Acquaint students with a fundamental understanding of the environment and strategies in the

New Economy. Provide analytical tools to understand opportunities in unserved or underserved New Economy

markets. Provide a fundamental understanding of the different types and key components on business models in the New Economy.

Provide guiding principles behind the design and strategy of the customer web interface. Understand the traditional and new communication/marketing approaches that create

competitiveadvantage in the New Economy. Provide insights on how to implement strategy in the New Economy. Understand the metrics that New Economy firms to use to measure progress, customer

satisfaction, and financial performance. Understand the fundamentals of financially valuing New Economy companies. Provide an overview of the hardware, software, servers, and the parts that make up the

enabling “railroad” for the New Economy.

UNIT 1 Online Industry Appreciation and Business World, Fundamentals of Management, Creative Managerial Leadership,

UNIT 2 Market Dynamics, Fashion &Lifestyle Products, and Fundamentals of E-commerce.

UNIT 3 Digital Marketing, Merchandising, Sourcing and Vendor management,

UNIT 4 Project Management, Long Industry Attachment, Specialiation1a Customer Relations Management

UNIT 5 Advanced Data Analytics, Specialiation2a Visual Communication, Specialiation2b User Experience Design &Business Plan.

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1:Student will be able to understand global online business sensibilities. CO2: The student will be able to understand Global Online Business Industry. CO3: The student will be able to understand with the knowledge and skills required to manage the online venture for a long period of sustainable profits, but will also challenge them to achieve career goals by fueling their passion. Student will be able to understand global online business sensibilities.

95

CO4: The student will be able to understand with the knowledge and skills required to manage the online venture for a long period of sustainable profits, but will also challenge them to achieve career goals by fueling their passion.




CO1 H H M M H M M

CO2 H H M H M M

CO3 M H H M H M

CO4 H H H H H M M


TEXT BOOKS E-Commerce 10/ePaperback– 2016

E - Commerce: An Indian PerspectivePaperback– 2012

BDJ506A PRODUCT DESIGN & DEVELOPMENT 0-8-0 [4]

96

AIM In economics, a luxury good is a good for which demand increases more than proportionally as income rises, and is a contrast to a "necessity good", for which demand increases proportionally less than income. Luxury goods are said to have high income elasticity of demand: as people become wealthier, they will buy more and more of the luxury good. This also means, however, that should there be a decline in income its demand will drop. Income elasticity of demand is not constant with respect to income, and may change sign at different levels of income. That is to say, a luxury good may become a normal good or even an inferior good at different income levels, e.g. a wealthy person stops buying increasing numbers of luxury cars for his automobile collection to start collecting airplanes (at such an income level, the luxury car would become an inferior good

OBJECTIVE ● Describe a design and development process

● Understand ergonomics of a product

● Understand uses of computer in product design and development

● Describe creativity in design and creative process

UNIT 1 Product design & development

Introduction: Classification/ Specifications of Products. ● Product life cycle. Product mix. ● Introduction to product design. ● Modern product development process. ● Morphology of design. ● Economic analysis: Qualitative & Quantitative. ● Product costing.

UNIT 2 Ergonomics / Aesthetics ● Gross human autonomy. ● Anthropometry. ● Man-Machine interaction. ● Concepts of size and texture, colour. Comfort criteria. ● Psychological & Physiological considerations. ● Creativity Techniques: Creative thinking, conceptualization, brain storming,

primary design, drawing, simulation, detail design.

UNIT 3

Computer aided product development

Introduction to computer Graphics ● Scan Conversion: ● Graphics Programming ● Curves

● CAD & Geometric Modeling

97

Virtual Reality

UNIT 4 CREATIVITY in Design : ● Methods and tools for Directed Creativity – ● Basic Principles ● Tools of Directed Creativity ● Tools that prepare the mind for creative thought ● stimulation of new ideas ● Development and Actions: Processes in creativity ICEDIP – Inspiration,

Clarification, Distillation, Perspiration, Evaluation and Incubation ● Creativity and Motivation: the Bridge between man creativity and the

rewards of innovativeness ● Applying Directed Creativity to the challenge of quality management ● Process Design, ● Emotional Design ● Three levels of Design – Viceral, Behavioral and Reflective

UNIT 5 Product packaging ● Introduction ● Packaging Media ● Quality Assessment & Performance Evaluation: ● Package Printing: ● Package Graphics: ● Package Storage and Handling: ● Packaging & Environment:

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: Able to know various factors affecting a product design CO2: Able to use various computer applications in product design CO3: Able to know importance of numerous packaging media CO4: Able to understand several factors contributing in design




CO1 M M H M H M L

CO2 L H H L L M M

CO3 M L H H H M M L M

CO4 M M H H H


98

TEXT BOOKS ● Karl T Ulrich, Steven D Eppinger , “ Product Design & Development.” Tata McGrawhill New

Delhi 2003 ● Hollins B & Pugh S “Successful Product Design.” Butter worths London ● Interactive Computer Graphics by E.Angel & Dave Shreiner ● Walter Soroka, “Fundamentals of packaging technology”, 3rd Edition, Institute of Packaging

professionals, Naperville, Illinois, USA, 2002 . ● Steven DuPuis, John Silva,”Package Design Workbook: The Art and Science of Successful

Packaging”, Rockport Publishers, 2008. ● Rousing Creativity: Think New NowFloyd Hurr, ISBN 1560525479, Crisp Publications Inc. 1999 ● Semyon D. Savransky,” Engineering of Creativity – TRIZ”, CRC Press New York USA,” 2000

99

SEMESTER VI

100

SEMESTER VI L T P Contact Hrs Credit Type

BDJ401A Industrial Project- Internship - - - - 18

BDJ402A Portfolio Submission - - - - 6

TOTAL - - - - 24

BDJ601A INDUSTRIAL PROJECT - (INTERNSHIP) 0-0-0(18)

AIM The Aim Of This Unit Is To Extend Learners’ Knowledge Of Professional Practices Within Their Specialist Area And To Relate These To Personal Goals And Career Opportunities.

OBJECTIVE To encourage students to work in with relevant industries.

An avenue to enhance academics learning through hands on work experience.

Get advice on career from knowledgeable and experienced professionals.

Gain exposure to a professional work atmosphere.

Be able to place themselves and their work in the context of their selected discipline

Understand their specialist area and the career opportunities available

Understand how to promote themselves and their work professionally.

INTERNSHIP TRAINING In the VI semester , student will undergo a 12 weeks training in a jewelry designing industry

/manufacturing unit/ jewellery export unit so that they can understand the existing working

practices , conditions and acquire an in depth technical knowhow.

The student shall prepare a report on the training given by the organization he/she will submit

the report. The student has to submit the certificate regarding successful training with the

organization.

A copy of report has to be submitted with the department along with the performance

certificate issued by the firm manager/ owner and one with the firm (where internship is

pursued).

After the internship, student has to appear in front of jury members for a presentation

seminar, who will judge the performance based on their presentation, report & v iva-voce

and award marks to student.

101

PROJECT REPORT To Be Submitted

o Background Of Industry

o Number Of Employees

o Project Detail On Which Assisted

o Manufacturing Process

o Hand & Computer Sketches

o Experience

o Any Other Details

UNIT 1 Weekly Teaching Plan:

Week 1-2 How to assess your internship Week 3 writing an introduction Week 4 doing your research Week 5-6 locating the required area of research and analyzing it Week 7-8 writing down about the context of your report Week 9 linking the research to the context of your report Week 10 writing up the conclusion of the report and editing it Week 11 making a short, ‘to the point’ presentation Week 12-14 working on the presentation

Teaching & Learning Methods:

Assessment and Evaluation:

A Proposal

UNIT 2 A Paper (minimum 2000 words)

Reason for particular Placement.

Brief description of the context.

Description of your duties.

Findings.

Diary of activities.

Professional’s report

UNIT 3

A Presentation (approx. 30 minutes)

Over view of your paper.

Visual support materials.

COURSE OUTCOME (CO)

At the end of this course students will: CO1: To identify business strategies for buying and selecting product. CO2: To identify process and procedures for company purchases. CO3: To explore the buying process, Increase skills in buying and merchandising. CO4: To identify business strategies for buying and selecting products. C05: To understand that how they write a report of their industry experience &develop written communication skills.

102




CO1 M H M H M L

CO2 H H L M M

CO3 L H H H M L M

CO4 M M H H H

CO5 M H L


103

BDJ602A PORTFOLIO SUBMISSION 0-0-0 [6]

AIM Design portfolio is the expression of student to translate themes into design. Here one gets inspired by different themes which could be art movements, sport, historic eras, music, dance culture, nature, traditions etc. And picks out tangible and intangible elements which are to be used as design elements in the collection. The ability of a designer to exhibit and use design elements is highlighted which is further on translated into projects. A portfolio is an exhibit of the overall knowledge of the student work which he/she has gained through the course of three years. The purpose lies in promoting the skills of students in a single format This course will help students enter the “real world”. It’s structured around equipping students on skills of “self selling and presenting their portfolios”. The course is aimed at equipping them select “perfect fit” careers, find better jobs and become professional and street smart. It will give students a realistic picture of their future professional lives and provides tools on coping with it.

OBJECTIVE Have the necessary professional communication skills. These include a wide array of tools like

making CV’s and presentations, preparing for job tests and interviews and the necessary computer skills to produce these.

Knowledge about the local and international markets and their operations.

Career planning, channels for job search, basics of entrepreneurship.

The course will also assist students to be able to present their portfolios in various modern formats like USB’s, digital photography, websites, CD’s etc.

Work ethics will also be touched upon to enable them to have long term and fruitful relations with employers.

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: Be able to place themselves and their work in the context of their selected discipline. CO2: Understand their specialist area and the career opportunities available CO3: Be able to develop and present a professional portfolio in an appropriate format Understand how to promote themselves and their work professionally. CO4: A copy of portfolio has to be submitted with the department at the time of final Assessment

104

MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM OUTCOMES AND PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOME Course Outcome



CO1 M H M H M L

CO2 H H L M M

CO3 L H H H M L M

CO4 M M H H H


105

SEMESTER VII

SEMESTER VII

106

L T P Contact Hrs Credit Type

BJD701A Research Project & Dissertation 6 6 3

BJD702A Brand Management 3 - - 3 3

BJD 703A Project Management

&Entrepreneurship

3 - - 3 3

BJD704A Production Method and Quality

Control

3 - - 3 3

BJD705A Jewelry Retail and Export 3 - - 3 3

BJD706A Final Project -I 12 12 6

TOTAL 12 18 30 21

BDJ701A RESEARCH PROJECT & DISSERTATION 0-6-0 [3]

AIM Sustainability is regarded as the future of Jewelry design sector. A student should have practice to implement sustainable strategies to their designing a collection for Jewelry Design. Now sustainability is a very complex concept when it comes to input it into fashion industries on the whole. When it comes to Jewelry Design, the student shall concentrate on designing the PRODUCT

OBJECTIVE To enable the student to incorporate in the structuring and development of the project the

concepts of project management, planning tools and controls. Economic feasibility of projects. Develop the project as a broad business process, covering the entire project life cycle. Conceptual phases, planning and organization, implementation and closure.

UNIT 1 This unit is describes the extent of the project. It contains product development to the

final process of marketing it to the consumer.

UNIT 2 Product Development

UNIT 3

Marketing the product

UNIT 4 Where to retail

UNIT 5 Reflection on the Dissertation Writing Experience:

Dissertation Topic

Dissertation Process

107

Resources will be used in Dissertation with Discussion and Evaluation

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: The student will explore the fields of Research design, Research proposal development and the conduct of Research projects as applied to their dissertation topic. CO2: Being able to critically evaluate the Jewelry Design work of others and provide constructive criticism for ongoing work. CO3: Being able to deconstruct and reconstruct alternative collection developments from existing work.


Program Outcome Program Specific

Outcome


CO1 M H M H M L

CO2 H H L M

CO3 L H H H M L


TEXT BOOKS/ WEBSITES Barrett J. (2012). Designing Your Fashion Portfolio (From Concept to Presentation),

Bloomsberry publishing, India. Kiper A. (2014). Fashion Portfolio. Batsford Ltd. Kothari C.R. Research Methodology: Methods and techniques. New Age International

publishers http://www.vogue.com/voguepedia/ http://www.style.com http://www.purfe.com.au

BDJ702A BRAND MANAGEMENT 0-3-0 [3]

http://www.vogue.com/voguepedia/

http://www.style.com/

http://www.purfe.com.au/

108

AIM A brand is a philosophy of a designer transformed in to value added products. Generally, consumers recognize brands by names which could be logos or unique colors. A brand successfully makes recognition through coming up with distinct design features such as style, color or use of certain features unique to the brand. Here a student thinks about a very important variable of design called design philosophy which is unique and is thinking how to transform ones design philosophy into fashion and lifestyle products. Therefore this part of the project holds maximum importance in this assignment.

OBJECTIVE The objective of this course is to learn fundamentals of Product and Brand Management. The aim of Product Management Part is to make participants understand competition at

product level as well as brand level. Two broadly important aspects namely Product Management from competition point of view and Product Management from New Product Development and Innovation point of view are to be covered.

The objective of Brand Management is to make students understand principles of Branding, role of brands, elements and components of brands, brand equity etc.

The main aim for Brand Management is to make sure that students understand implications of planning, implementing and evaluating Branding Strategies.

UNIT 1 UNDERSTANDING BRAND

This module gives a basic overview of branding. It covers what a brand is, why brands matter, characteristics of strong brands, and other fundamental concepts of branding. This module aims to familiarize the students with the key conceptual foundations of developing and managing a strong brand.

UNIT 2 DEVELOPING BRAND

This module introduces the process of crafting a brand. It covers ways of developing brand elements, creating brand associations, and introducing a new brand, and designing marketing/marketing communications programs that effectively communicate the desirable brand identity to target markets.

UNIT 3 EVALUATING BRAND

This module reviews the methods of measuring and interpreting brand performance. It covers typical approaches of assessing brand equity, especially from a consumer perspective. It also offers both qualitative and quantitative tools for measuring brand image and strength.

UNIT 4 MANAGING BRAND

The final module focuses on the stewardship and management of brands over time, geographic areas, and market segments. It covers the strategies for more established brands as they attempt to grow and stay relevant over time by examining the concepts/tools in brand extensions, consumer-brand relationships, strategic alliances,

109

brand portfolios, global branding, and brand repositioning/revitalization.

UNIT 5 CRAFTING BRAND

This module provides a view into what is involved in the formulation of the brand asset. The most important task in designing the brand is specifying the unique and relevant meaning the brand is to capture. This meaning must then be translated to reflect in the range of brand elements: brand name, logo, slogan, jingle, package design, retail space online space and overarching experience.

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO: Towards the completion of this unit a student would think about the brand philosophy and development with above parameters CO2: The student will be able to develop own brand.



Outcome


CO1 M M H M H M L

CO2 M H H L M


TEXT BOOKS/ WEBSITES Strategic Brand Management (3rd edition), Kevin Lane Keller, Prentice Hall, 2008. Best Practice Cases in Branding (3rd edition), Kevin Lane Keller, Prentice Hall, 2008. www.AdvertisingAge.com www.adweek.com www.Americandemographics.com www.brandchannel.com www.marketingpower.com

BDJ703A PROJECT MANAGEMENT & ENTERPRENEURSHIP 0-3-0 [3]

http://www.advertisingage.com/

http://www.adweek.com/

http://www.brandchannel.com/

110

AIM The course will offer a broad perspective of Design thinking, LMC, idealization, data analytic, creating MVP, various digital tools for marketing, financial and pitch deck for the business.

OBJECTIVE To enable the student to incorporate in the structuring and development of the project the

concepts of project management, planning tools and controls. Economic feasibility of projects. Develop the project as a broad business process, covering the entire project life cycle. Conceptual phases, planning and organization, implementation and closure.

UNIT 1 Introduction to Project management

Conceptualization and characteristics of projects:

Project Life Cycle

Phases of the project: conceptual, planning and organization,

implementation, closure

Project administration

UNIT 2 Conceptual phases, planning and organization

Scope planning. Analytical structure of activities

Structuring people in projects

Costs and budget

UNIT 3

Implementation

Project execution, monitoring and control

Reviews and ratings



Project Life Cycle




UNIT 5 Product packaging ● Introduction ● Packaging Media ● Quality Assessment & Performance Evaluation: ● Package Printing: ● Package Graphics: ● Package Storage and Handling: ● Packaging & Environment:

UNIT 6 Introduction to Entrepreneurship and Business Essentials

111

Who is an Entrepreneurs and Types of Businesses

The Lean Approach

Designing Thinking

Lean Model Canvas / Business Model Canvas

UNIT 7 Forecasting Demands and Acquiring Customers

Identifying the Target Audience / Customer

Conducting Surveys

Building an MVP based on the Survey

Analyzing Competition

UNIT 8 Brand Building and Establishing Brand Presence

Digital Marketing and Social Media Marketing

Basics of PR and Importance of Digital Presence

Building a Website – Tools and Techniques

UNIT 9 Understanding Finance and Planning for Investment

Creating a Revenue Model

Developing Sales Projects, Unit Economics, Investment Deck

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: Approach the ideas through design thinking and create its LMC

CO2: Identify the demand and its customers

CO3: Analyze the data and obtain info like target market, market size, competition

C04: Management of the product development process;

CO5: Strategic product planning and Project planning and Detailed project

CO6: Preparation of the production of the product and Product distribution and Evaluation of the

product and process




CO1 M H M H M L

CO2 H H L M M

CO3 L H H H M L M

CO4 M M H H H

C05 M H H M

CO6 H H M L M

112

H = Highly Related; M = Medium L = Low TEXT BOOKS

The Lean startup by Eric Ries, Entrepreneurial Managementby Robert J. Calvin

A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge: PMBOK® Guide (Sixth Edition)

The Automatic Startup by David S. Rose Publication Date: 2016

A Dozen Lessons for Entrepreneurs by Tren Griffin Publication Date: 2017

http://ezproxy.emich.edu/login?url=https://emich.summon.serialssolutions.com/#!/search?bookMark=ePnHCXMw42LgTQStzc4rAe_hAm1sNgQdImYGbBkAi0o4B1SrcBmBzjczNAaWkBzwcRFgFWhuYcjJIAoMJwVgC6mopLRAAeiB5OycTFA5yZIH7JtxM-i5uYY4e-gW5yeCD8k1MEzNLY2HDnnEg1sRBibmwM466MAVU9Ahn-pQDdmZOTnFwCIuHtSKLTYyqTCPT8pOgpzhCCybgSo1ISoTi7OB5QywDCopji_LAc9dFseDj

https://emich.summon.serialssolutions.com/#!/search?bookMark=ePnHCXMw42LgTQStzc4rAe_hSmEAn-ZjbmxopA8ahgB2KEArMcEH3wCbFqD629KYGY3PxsBlCDoHBphTzQw5oKkDND9kYWZuzMkg7-If5eqn4AN0ob9fsAKwt6Tg6hcS5Ap0s59raFAwDwNLHrD_xs2g5-Ya4uyhW5yfCD5I18AwNbc0HjosEg9qaZgCm0egRZTAYtwUdBCoOkQDrFCOB09YQldJxrs6OZsaAcsOI9Alu

113

BDJ704A PRODUCTION METHOD AND QUALITY CONTROL 0-3-0 [3]

AIM To develop knowledge of various production methods and evaluate various Jewelry manufacturing systems and equipment in the industry.

OBJECTIVE To gain an understanding and appreciation of the principles and applications relevant to the

planning, design, and operations of manufacturing/service firms. To develop skills necessary to effectively analyze and synthesize the many inter-relationships

inherent in complex socio-economic productive systems. To reinforce analytical skills already learned, and build on these skills to further increase your

"portfolio" of useful analytical tools for operations tasks. To gain some ability to recognize situations in a production system environment that suggests

the use of certain quantitative methods to assist in decision making on operations management and strategy.

To understand how Enterprise Resource Planning and MRPII systems are used in managing operations.

To increase the knowledge, and broaden the perspective of the world in which you will contribute your talents and leadership in business operations.

To understand the managerial responsibility for Operations, even when production is outsourced, or performed in regions far from corporate headquarters.

UNIT 1 Introduction to Jewelry manufacturing industry.

UNIT 2 Study of Production Process and Planning in cutting, sewing &finishing.

UNIT 3

Management information systems &documentation procedures.

UNIT 4 Time &Motion study and its relevance: - an overview.

UNIT 5 Quality Department functions of a jewelry industry. Inspection systems from raw material to dispatch.

114

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: Evaluate the principles of quality management and production method to explain how these principles can be applied within quality management systems. CO2: Identify the key aspects of the quality and production improvement cycle and to select and use appropriate tools and techniques for controlling, improving and measuring quality. CO3: Critically appraise the organizational, communication and teamwork requirements for effective quality and production management. CO4: Critically analyze the strategic issues in quality and production management, including current issues and developments, and to devise and evaluate quality implementation plans.



Outcome


CO1 M H M H M L

CO2 H H L M

CO3 L H H H M L

CO4 M M H H


TEXT BOOKS/ WEBSITES

115

BDJ705A JEWELLERY RETAIL AND EXPORT 0-3-0 [3]

AIM After studying this subject the students will understand marketing in domestic and international markets and their quota systems. It focuses attention on apparel industry giving thorough knowledge of merchandising.

OBJECTIVE To enhance the marketing and selling skills.

To provide in-depth working knowledge of retail and export in Gem & jewelry industry.

Techniques to maintain better customer relations.

New development areas of retail stores and exports companies. Be able to respond to professional design requirements and to develop skills in planning and

producing prototypes.

To train professionally with a view to enhance retail and export growth.

UNIT 1 Basic Concept of retailing – definition need and functions

UNIT 2 Introduction to various terms Cost price, selling price, mark-ups, markdowns, distribution channel, wholesale, agent, broker, vendor, distributor

UNIT 3

Introduction to retail organizations Departmental store Discount stores Specialty stores Direct Retailing E- Retailing

UNIT 4 Concept of buying houses – definition, importance and types Retail Mix Concept of visual merchandising – definition, types of window display with examples

UNIT 5 Jewelry merchandising and export– definition, role of merchandiser, buyer – merchandiser interface, time and action sheet

Consumer Buying Behavior – definition, consumer black box, decision making process.

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: Understand the role of merchandiser in export environment. CO2: Understand the factors & principles relevant to Jewelry product eg concept, ergonomics, form, function, aesthetics, trends, end user, lifespan, materials, manufacturing methods, costing, level of finish, testing, sustainability.

116

CO3: Be able to respond to professional design requirements and to develop skills in planning and producing prototypes. CO4: Understand the connections between Export and Retail market.



Outcome


CO1 M H M H M L

CO2 H H L M

CO3 L H H H M L

CO4 M M H H



Export Import ManagementPaperback– 28 Oct 2013 by Justin Paul(Author), Rajiv Aserkar(Author)

50th annual report 2015-2016 the gem & jewelry export promotion council

49th annual report 2014-2015 the gem & jewelry export promotion council

https://www.amazon.in/Justin-Paul/e/B003X0GM7O/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1

https://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_2?ie=UTF8&field-author=Rajiv+Aserkar&search-alias=stripbooks


117

BDJ706A FINAL PROJECT-I 0-12-0 [6]

AIM This subject purely concentrates on developing a collection based on all the previous areas covered in fashion. This subject also aims at a thorough research on selected theme supported by a Design process to develop the whole range of clothing collection. Students are required to research on the selected topic for the required aspects like demographics, psycho graphics etc. Students will develop the whole design process including mood board, story board, fabric development, design development, range development etc.

OBJECTIVE The objective of this unit is to further extend learner’s knowledge creating the final collection putting all the knowledge and efforts students have gained so far and launch themselves as designers creating their own brand identity, and brand image.

UNIT 1 Contextual research to identify potential areas of design research &development During this subject student are expected to gather information and visual materials in a field which has sufficient scope for design research and development.

UNIT 2 Formulation of design brief, design concept, research methods and project schedule The student will have to develop and negotiate a design brief by developing a concept based on a particular theme. At this stage student are expected to present their design concept based on a colloquium paper in front of a jury of faculty mentors. After the approval of their concept, student will be expected to meet their design mentor at scheduled times. Formative Feedback will be provided at each meeting and student will have to maintain a log book which shows their progress and gives evidence of following the design process. When student are in the process of design exploration, they are expected to research and conduct surveys in the areas of market structure, client group, fabrics and trims sources.

UNIT 3

Pricing &Costing of Final products The student will achieve optimum costs of production through an understanding of fabric development and finishing processes. They are also expected to do the pricing and costing of their final product.

UNIT 4 Final submission and presentation The Final Submission which will be supported by an oral presentation and submission of a design portfolio in front of a Jury, where the student will be expected to justify the validity/originality of their design process and findings. The student will be encouraged to do a self-evaluation, assessing their effectiveness of achieving set aims.

UNIT 5 Reflective Journal &Prototype and portfolio development

Additionally the student will be required to submit a Reflective Journal which represents their involvement and overall journey of learning and what specifically they reflected on. This will give evidence of whether they have fulfilled the initial aims that

118

they had set.

To develop prototypes, student have to explore new and appropriate methods of pattern making, draping and garment construction in relation to the relevant fabrics and the functional aspect of the J.

There will be a “Toile Presentation” where student will be expected to present their process and findings along with the prototypes to a Jury of design and technical mentors and peers.

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: To understand strengths and weakness and create your brand, brand identity, image and logo. CO2: To identify the major types of idea sources in clothing design and provide information about each source. Recognize that these sources of inspiration help designers to create design elements and principles of individual designs. In order to foster originality, sources of inspiration play a powerful role throughout the creative stage of design process, and also in the early stages of jewelry research and strategic collection planning CO3: To present research analysis to client groups. CO4: To extend and apply skills in developing creative visual language. CO5: To synthesize and critically evaluate experimentation in personal creative practice.



Outcome


CO1 M H M H M L

CO2 H H L M

CO3 L H H H M L

CO4 M M H H H

C05 M L M H M

H = Highly Related; M = Medium L = Low TEXT BOOKS/ WEBSITES

● http://worldofwearableart.com/ ● www.style.com ● www.wgsn.com ● www.promostyl.com ● www.trendz.com ● www.wwd.com

● Trendvision.com

http://worldofwearableart.com/


http://www.wgsn.com/

http://www.promostyl.com/

http://www.trendz.com/

http://www.wwd.com/

119

SEMESTER VIII

120

SEMESTER VIII L T P Contact

Hrs

Credit Type

BJD801B Final Project II 18 18 9

BJD802B Portfolio 12 12 6

TOTAL 30 30 15

BDJ801A FINAL PROJECT-II 0-18-0 [9]

AIM This subject purely concentrates on developing a collection based on all the previous areas covered in fashion. This subject also aims at a thorough research on selected theme supported by a Design process to develop the whole range of clothing collection. Students are required to research on the selected topic for the required aspects like demographics, psycho graphics etc. Students will develop the whole design process including mood board, story board, fabric development, design development, range development etc.

OBJECTIVE The objective of this unit is to further extend learner’s knowledge creating the final collection putting all the knowledge and efforts students have gained so far and launch themselves as designers creating their own brand identity, and brand image.

UNIT 1 Contextual research to identify potential areas of design research &development During this subject student are expected to gather information and visual materials in a field which has sufficient scope for design research and development.

UNIT 2 Formulation of design brief, design concept, research methods and project schedule The student will have to develop and negotiate a design brief by developing a concept based on a particular theme. At this stage student are expected to present their design concept based on a colloquium paper in front of a jury of faculty mentors. After the approval of their concept, student will be expected to meet their design mentor at scheduled times. Formative Feedback will be provided at each meeting and student will have to maintain a log book which shows their progress and gives evidence of following the design process. When student are in the process of design exploration, they are expected to research and conduct surveys in the areas of market structure, client group, fabrics and trims sources.

UNIT 3 Pricing &Costing of Final products

121

The student will achieve optimum costs of production through an understanding of fabric development and finishing processes. They are also expected to do the pricing and costing of their final product.

UNIT 4 Final submission and presentation The Final Submission which will be supported by an oral presentation and submission of a design portfolio in front of a Jury, where the student will be expected to justify the validity/originality of their design process and findings. The student will be encouraged to do a self-evaluation, assessing their effectiveness of achieving set aims.

UNIT 5 Reflective Journal &Prototype and portfolio development

Additionally the student will be required to submit a Reflective Journal which represents their involvement and overall journey of learning and what specifically they reflected on. This will give evidence of whether they have fulfilled the initial aims that they had set.

To develop prototypes, student have to explore new and appropriate methods of pattern making, draping and garment construction in relation to the relevant fabrics and the functional aspect of the J.

There will be a “Toile Presentation” where student will be expected to present their process and findings along with the prototypes to a Jury of design and technical mentors and peers.

COURSE OUTCOME (CO) At the end of this course students will: CO1: To understand strengths and weakness and create your brand, brand identity, image and logo. CO2: To identify the major types of idea sources in clothing design and provide information about each source. Recognize that these sources of inspiration help designers to create design elements and principles of individual designs. In order to foster originality, sources of inspiration play a powerful role throughout the creative stage of design process, and also in the early stages of jewelry research and strategic collection planning CO3: To present research analysis to client groups. CO4: To extend and apply skills in developing creative visual language. CO5: To synthesize and critically evaluate experimentation in personal creative practice.

122



Outcome


CO1 M H M H M L

CO2 H H L M

CO3 L H H H M L

CO4 M M H H H

C05 M L H H M


TEXT BOOKS/ WEBSITES ● http://worldofwearableart.com/ ● www.style.com ● www.wgsn.com ● www.promostyl.com ● www.trendz.com ● www.wwd.com ● Trendvision.com






http://www.wwd.com/

123

BDJ802A PORTFOLIO 0-12-0 [6]

AIM Design portfolio is the expression of student to translate themes into design. Here one gets inspired by different themes which could be art movements, sport, historic eras, music, dance , culture , nature, traditions etc. and picks out tangible and intangible elements which are to be used as design elements in the collection. The ability of a designer to exhibit and use design elements is highlighted which is further on translated into projects. A portfolio is an exhibit of the overall knowledge of the student work which he/she has gained through the course of four years. The purpose lies in promoting the skills of students in a single format.

OBJECTIVE Students will present a portfolio of all the files/ folders/ projects created during the course of study in I to III year. The portfolio should include projects, industrial visit reports, any other projects made during the academic session. The external examiner will evaluate the portfolio and take a viva of the student.

-------------------------------------------------------------------

124

FACULTY OF DESIGN

SYLLABUS AND COURSE STRUCTURE

B.DES in FASHION DESIGN

BATCH (2020 – 24)

125

Title of Degree Program

Bachelor of Design- Fashion Design

Definition of credit hour:

One credit is 1 hour of theory lecture and one credit is 2 hours of practical work.

Degree plan

Following is the list of courses from

Bachelor of Design- Fashion Design

SEMESTER- I

Sr.

No.

Course

Code

Course Title L T P Contact

Hrs.

Credits

1 BMC128A Business Communication &

Personality Development

3 - - 3 3

2 BMC051A Environmental Science 4 - - 4 4

3 BFD101A Design Foundation 12 12 6

4 BFD102A Basic Art & Design 4 4 2

5 BFD103A Introduction of Fashion Industry 6 6 3

6 BFD104A Fundamentals of Computer 3 - 3 3

Total 10 22 32 21

SEMESTER – II

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits

1 BFD201A Fashion Studies 3 3 3

2 BFD202A Textile Studies-I 3 3 3

3 BFD203A Material Exploration &

Sourcing

6 6 3

4 BFD204A Fashion Illustration-I 6 6 3

5 BFD205A Pattern Making & Garment

Construction-I(Women’s wear

+ Basic Draping)

6 6 3

6 BFD206A Computer Application –

I(Basic - Computer, Coral

Draw, Photoshop)

6 6 3

7 BFD207A Design Project –I (Women Wear

white cotton base)

6 6 3

Total 6 30 36 21

126

SEMESTER – III

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits

1 BFD301A History of Fashion Design &

Contextual

3 3 3

2 BFD302A Textile Studies-II 3 3 3

3 BFD303A Apparel Manufacturing

Technology

3 3 3

4 BFD304A Fashion Illustration-II 6 6 3


Construction-II (Indian wear +Ad

Draping)

6 6 3

6 BFD306A Computer Application – II

(Draping)

6 6 3

7 BFD307A Design Project –II (Women’s

wear draping project )

6 6 3

Total 9 24 33 21

SEMESTER – IV

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits

1 BFD401A Budgeting & Costing 3 3 3

2 BFD402A Trend Forecast and Analysis 3 3 3

3 BFD403A Surface Design 6 6 3

4 BFD404A Elective (Choose any 1 )

A. Photography

B. Fashion Accessories

4 4 2


Construction-III (Men’s & Kids

wear)

6 6 3

6 BFD406A Computer Application – III

(Advance Photoshop and

illustrator)

6 6 3

7 BFD407A Design Project –III (Indian Wear

craft based project)

6 6 3

Total 6 28 34 20

-

127

SEMESTER – V

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits

1 BFD501A Marketing & Merchandising 3 3 3

2 BFD502A Supply Chain Management 3 3 3

3 BFD503A Professional Practice &

Management

3 3 3



B. E-Commerce

4 4 2

5 BFD506A Computer Application – IV

(Portfolio and Digital PMC)

6 6 3

6 BFD507A Design Project (Men’s Wear) 6 6 3

7 BFD508A Educational Trip 2 1

Total 9 18 27 18

SEMESTER – VI

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits

1 BFD601A Office Training (Internship) 18

2 BFD602A Portfolio Submission 6

Total 24

128

SEMESTER – VII

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits

1 BFD701A Research Project & Dissertation 6 6 3

2 BFD702A Brand Design Management 3 3 3

3 BFD703A Project Management &

Entrepreneurship

3 3 3

4 BFD704A Production Method and Quality

Control

3 3 3

5 BFD705A Fashion Retail and Export 3 3 3

6 BFD506A Fashion Styling 2 2 1

7 BFD707A Final Project I 12 12 6

Total 12 20 32 22

SEMESTER – VIII

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits

1 BFD801A Final Project II 18 18 9

2 BFD802A Portfolio 12 12 6

Total 30 30 15

129

SUMMARY REPORT

1. Total Credit for Batch 2019-2024= 163

2. Total Relaxation= nil



credit

Required

21 21 21 20 18 24 22 15 162 NIL

Choice Based Credit Summery Report of B.Des Fashion Design



2 Core Courses (42,0,91) 133



5 Total (52,0,110) 162

130

Introduction

Bachelor in Fashion Design is a four-year design undergraduate program, offered by the Faculty of

Design at JECRC University. The program encourages students to explore their potential in designing

multipurpose and multivariate fabrics. It also prepares graduates for the expertise required in self and

industrial-related employment. The program, with its emphasis on broad based conceptual and technical

aspects of design, is expected to facilitate future postgraduate studies in specialized Fashions related

areas - i.e. Art history, Fashion marketing and merchandising, Fashion technology, industrial design,

fashion design, new media design and Fashion conservation. The curriculum encourages research into

the rich Fashion tradition and its relevance to contemporary society.

The programme consists of various levels of practical studio courses supported by a range of theory

electives in art and design history. Other strong feature of the programme includes an intensive course

in marketing which makes them self-sufficient as entrepreneurs and introduces them to marketing

strategies and opportunities for internships in the Fashion design industry. The Contemporary Seminar

provides an avenue for conceptual development and opening of new vistas, broadening the knowledge

base. After completing a six-month foundation course, students wishing to specialize in Fashion design

pursue their major for another three and half years. During this time students are exposed and

enlightened with different aspects of design which includes intensive studies in colour theory,

handcrafted and industrial printing, dyeing and weaving techniques. The fourth and final year consists

of an independent study program and culminates in a degree-project show. Graduating students are

expected to demonstrate proficiency in the technical, creative and professional skills they have attained

during their time of study.

VISSION STATEMENT

The Faculty of Design at JECRC University is a platform for integrating contemporary design

sensibilities with traditional aesthetic values. We provide a space for highly skilled crafts women/men,

designers and new entrants who aspire to become professional advertising field and designers.

To become a renowned centre of higher learning, work towards academic, professional, cultural and

social enrichment of the individuals and communities.

MISSION STATEMENT

The mission of the Faculty of Design is to build a successful career of its students. The school provides

a prolific and dynamic program designed to meet individual needs of students with diverse aspirations,

learning capacities, Scopic regimes, artistic sensibilities and innovations.

131

Program Mission Statement (B. Des in Fashion Design)

The Fashion design program is aimed at preparing designer-artists. It has a two-fold approach: it

actively assists students to explore their potential as design professionals in designing multipurpose and

multivariate fabrics for industrial products and solutions; andprepare them as artists who can realize

their creative ideas through fabric art. By expanding the parameters of its traditional identity beyond

cloth, craft and fashion,

The program aims to fill the interstices between Fashions, fine art-sculpture, architecture and jewellery

by connecting all these disciplines through fiber.

Program Objectives: (PO’s)

1. To enable the students to work systematically through a design brief to impart skills in research,

conceptual development, design and fabrication for creative outcomes.

2. To give students a contextual reference in terms of design and how technological, environmental,

economic, social and political issues influence the industry and the art and design world.

3. To develop linkages between academia, industry and the indigenous craft sector.

4. To train students to contribute to the community through design interventions within socio-cultural

limitations.

5. Introduce students to the design process and in particular to the role research has to play in

encouraging original and innovative thinking.

6. To encourage independent thinking through professional practice students are guided in the process

of self-evaluation and criticism, placing their work in the broader contexts of society and with

knowledge of current practitioners.

7. To gain an understanding of the basic financial aspects of entrepreneurial ventures plus marketing

and sales.

Strategic Plan



designers and new entrants who aspire to become professional Fashion designers.

132

Program Objective’s Assessment

The following table shows how each of the above program objectives is measured and the actions

taken as a result of these measurements.

The three tools for assessments of program objectives are:

1. Employer Survey

2. Alumni Survey

3. Graduating Students Survey

4. Community interaction Survey

Objectives How Measured When Measured Improvement

Identified

Improvement Made

1 Graduating Students

survey

Alumni Survey

Employer Survey

Conclusion of four

year program

And every year

after graduation

Pragmatic

design solutions

required

Shorter exercises for

more exposure and

better time management

2 a. Alumni Survey

b. Graduating Students

Survey

Within one year of

graduation

Better

communication

skills required

More frequent

interaction between

academia and the

industry ensured

3 Employer Survey

Community interaction

Survey

Within one year of

graduation

After completion

of community

projects

Better technical

and

communication

skills required

Close supervision of

interaction and

documents exchanged

4 Graduating Students

Survey

Employer Survey

Community interaction

Survey

Conclusion of four

year program

Better analytical

and research

skills

Monitoring of final year

projects with reference

to the curriculum and

global changes

5 a. Alumni Survey

b. Graduating Students

Survey

Within one year of

graduation

More adherence

to professional

values

Case based curriculum

of professional elective

course

133

Course Outcomes are:

1. Problem Solving: Solve communication problems and carry projects from creation through to the

production process; including the skills of problem identification, research and information gathering,

analysis, generation of alternative solutions, prototyping, user testing, integration of feedback and the

evaluation of outcomes.

2. Communication. Describe and respond to the audiences and contexts, which communication

solutions must address, including recognition of the physical, cognitive, cultural, and social human

factors that shape design decisions.

3. Demonstration. Create and develop visual concepts in response to communication problems,

including an understanding of the principles of visual organization, information hierarchy, symbolic

representation, aesthetics, and the construction of original meaningful forms.

4. Technique. Understand tools and technology, including their roles in the creation, reproduction, and

distribution of visual messages. Relevant tools and technologies include drawing, designing,

manufacturing, photography, and time-based project submission.

5. Application. Be able both to determine the mode(s) of production required to achieve a specific

product and to demonstrate level-appropriate mastery of skills, manual and/or digital, necessary to

achieve those products. Apply the principles of color, composition, design and manufacturing as they

relate in the various media that exist in design.

6. Aesthetic Fluency. Recognize and apply aesthetic principles of design history, theory, and criticism

from a variety of perspectives, including those of art history, linguistics, communication and

information theory, technology, and the social and cultural use of design objects.

7. Professionalism. Understand the basic business practices and trade ethics related to graphic arts,

including the ability to organize design projects and to work productively in client-designer and team

relationships in the implementation and evaluation of projects.

8. Portfolio. Organize and present a portfolio of work that gives evidence of the skills, knowledge, and

abilities to begin a Fashion design career or transfer to a four-year college for additional study.

134

B.DESIN FASHION DESIGN PROGRAME EDUCATIONALOBJECTIVE(PEO’S)

A graduate of the Fashion Design should:

PEO-I

Students will develop themselves as effective professionals by real projects through the use of Fashion

design knowledge and with attention to team work, effective communication, critical thinking and

problem-solving skills.

PEO-II

Students will develop professional skills that prepare them for immediate employment and

entrepreneurship for life-long learning in advanced areas of Fashion Design and related fields.

PEO-III

Students will demonstrate their ability to adapt to a rapidly changing environment by having learned

and applied new skills and new technologies.

PEO-IV Students will be provided with an educational foundation that prepares them for excellence, leadership

roles along diverse career paths with encouragement to professional ethics and active participation

needed for a successful career.

PROGRAME OUTCOME (PO’S) A graduate of the Fashion Design Program will demonstrate:

PO1: The ability to give comprehensive knowledge of design methodology, production and its

management in the field of design.

PO2: The ability to design and perform manufacturing, as well as to analyze the forecast and trends of

design industry (Problem analysis)

PO3: The ability to design a system, component, or process to meet desired needs within realistic

projects related to economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health and safety,

manufacturability, and sustainability. (Design/development of solutions)

PO4: The ability to function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams on

multidisciplinary environments (Individual and team work)

PO5: The ability to identify, formulate, and solve engineering problems (Problem Solving)

PO6: The understanding of professional and ethical responsibility (Ethics)

PO7: The ability to communicate effectively (Communication Skills)

PROGRAME SPECIFIC OUTCOME PSO1: The ability to understand, analyze and develop new designs in the areas related to Fashion

design, manufacturing, cad designand networking for efficient design of Fashion of varying

complexity. (Professional Skills)

PSO2: The ability to apply standard practices and strategies in Fashion design projectdevelopment by

using quality product for business success. (Problem-Solving Skills)

PSO3: The ability to employ modern platforms in creating innovative career paths to be an

entrepreneur, and a zest for higher studies. (Successful Career and Entrepreneurship)

135

SEMESTER I

L T P Contact

Hrs

Credit Type

BMC128A Business Communication &


3 - - 3 3


BFD101A Design Foundation - - 12 12 6

BFD102A Basic Art And Design - - 4 4 2

BFD103A Introduction of Fashion Industry - - 6 6 3

BFD104A Fundamentals of Computer 3 - - 3 3

TOTAL 10 - 22 32 21

136

BMC128A BUSINESS COMMUNICATION &PERSONALITY

DEVELOPMENT

3-0-0 [3]

OBJECTIVE



Minimize the Grammar Translation Method of ELT while trying to replace it with Direct

Method.

Introduce Communicative Method of ELT and focusing the teaching pedagogy on the student-

centered learning rather than on the teacher-centered learning.

Ability to master three major forms of communications which are vital in academic and

professional settings namely professional presentations, interviews and group communications

respectively.

Providing a deep insight into the techniques for delivering effective presentations, winning job

interviews, and actively participating in various forms of group communication.

UNIT 1 Basic Writing Skills: Tenses, Voice, Narration

UNIT 2 Vocabulary Building: Word Formation, Affixes, Synonyms, Antonyms, One

Word Substitution

UNIT 3 Composition: Composing a CV/Resume, Letter Writing, Email Writing, Précis

Writing

UNIT 4 Communication Skills: What is Communication, Process, features of

communication, Types, Flows of Communication and Barriers to

communication.

UNIT 5 Prose and Poetry: The Gift of Magi (O’ Henry), How Much Land Does a Man

Need (Leo Tolstoy), Where the Mind is Without Fear (Rabindra Nath Tagore),

If (Rudyard Kipling)

COURSE OUTCOME (CO)

At the end of this course students will have:

CO1: Ability to design a language component or process to meet desired need within realistic,

Constraints such as economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, scenario

CO2: Ability to analyze the usage of English words in different contexts

CO3: An understanding of technical and academic articles’ comprehension.

CO4: The ability to present oneself at multinational levels knowing the type of different standards of

English.

CO5: The ability to use the target language in real context of their aspired workplace with accuracy.

137

MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF PROGRAM

OUTCOMES AND PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES

Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H M M

CO2 M M H

CO3 M M

CO4 H H

CO5 M H H H M


Text Books

Communication Skills for Engineers and Scientists, Sangeeta Sharma and Binod Mishra,

PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. (New Delhi)

English Grammar and Composition, Gurudas Mukherjee, Ane Books Pvt. Ltd.(New

Delhi)

Current English Grammar and Usage with Composition, R.P. Sinha, Oxford University

Press (New Delhi)

Effective Technical Communication, M Ashraf Rizvi, Tata McGraw Hill (New Delhi)

Business Communication, Meenakshi Raman & Prakash Singh, Oxford University Press

(New Delhi)

BMC051A ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES 4-0-0 [4]

138

OBJECTIVE

Understanding and Application of Basic Ecology and Ecological Systems with reference to built

environment.



To Understand theSocial issues, Environment, Laws and Sustainability.

UNIT 1 Introduction and Natural Resources: Multidisciplinary nature and public

awareness, Renewable and nonrenewal resources and associated problems,

Forest resources, Water resources, Mineral resources, Food resources,

Energy resources, Land resources, Conservation of natural resources and

human role.

UNIT 2 Ecosystems: Concept, Structure and function, Producers composers and

decomposers, Energy flow, Ecological succession, Food chains webs and

ecological pyramids, Characteristics structures and functions of ecosystems

such as Forest, Grassland, Desert, Aquatic ecosystems.

UNIT 3 Biodiversity and Conservation: Definition, Genetic, Species, and Ecosystem

diversity, Bio-geographical classification of India, Value of biodiversity at

global, national, local levels, India as a mega diversity nation, Hot sports of

biodiversity, Threats to biodiversity, Endangered and endemic species of

India, In-situ and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity.

UNIT 4 Environmental Pollution- Definition, Causes, effects and control of air

pollution, water pollution, soil pollution, marine pollution, noise pollution,

thermal pollution, nuclear hazards, human role in prevention of pollution,

Solid waste management, Disaster management, floods, earthquake, cyclone

and landslides.

UNIT 5 Social issues and Environment- Unsustainable to sustainable development,

Urban problems related to energy, Water conservation and watershed

management, Resettlement and re-habitation, Ethics, Climate change, Global

warming, Acid rain, Ozone layer depletion, Nuclear accidents, holocaust,

Waste land reclamation, Consumerism and waste products, Environment

protection act, Wildlife protection act, Forest conservation act,

Environmental issues in legislation, population explosion and family welfare

program, Environment and human health, HIV, Women and child welfare,

Role of information technology in environment and human health.

139

COURSE OUTCOME (CO)


CO1: An ability to understand the transnational character of environmental problems and ways of

addressing them, including interactions across local to global scales.

CO2: An ability to understand key concepts from economic, political, and social analysis as they

pertain to the design and evaluation of environmental policies and institutions.



CO4: An ability to understand the Environmental awareness, Environmental education in present

day context.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H M H

CO2 M M H

CO3 M M

CO4 H H M M H

TEXT BOOKS


6. BharuchaErach, Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmadabad, 2002.


8. Cunningham, W.P., et al., Environmental Encyclopaedia, Jaico Publishing House, Mumbai, 2003

140

BFD101A DESIGN FOUNDATION 0-0-12[6]

AIM

To make students see, make and appreciate the basic design concepts. The first level includes the

vocabulary of design and principles of composition. This level includes 3D composition and study of

Volumes. The aim of this course is to understand the method of visualizing and drawing from nature,

cast and product drawing. Learners will be introduced to a brief history and introduction to 3D

materials, tools and processes and made aware of the range of possibilities of different materials in their

2D and 3D application to design. This may be done through lectures / ppt presentations / swatches/

samples. The aim of this unit is to enable learners to develop knowledge and understanding of the

issues that have informed debate on the purposes and processes of design. This unit aims to give

learners opportunities to develop skills and knowledge in the development of new products or services

in design pathways.

OBJECTIVE

Know the phases of the design development cycle


Know in principle the physics of color (light), the chemistry of color (pigment), and the impact

of color (psychology).







UNIT 1 THEORY- Elements of Design- Point, Line, Characteristic of Line, Types of Line,

Shapes, Categories of Shape, Space, Categories .

PRACTICAL- Elements of design- Types of Lines, Line Compositions,Different types

of Shapes- Geometric, Organic, Free-form, Natural, and Shape, composition, Positive &

Negative. Textures- Physical & Visual, Texture Composition, Form Space-Positive &

Negative.

UNIT 2 THEORY- Principle of Design- Balance, Types of Balance, Emphasis, Unity,

Repetition, Rhythm, Pattern, Harmony, Proportion, Contrast, Functionality. Gestalt and

his Concepts- Closures, Continuance, Similarity, Proximity, Alignment.

PRACTICAL- Principle of design- Balance, types of balance emphasis, unity,

repetition (rhythm, pattern), harmony, proportion (scale), variety (alteration), contrast,

functionality.

UNIT 3 THEORY- Color- Introduction to Color, Color Theory, Color Harmonies, Color

Schemes, Color Wheel, Tint, Tone, Shades. Different Mediums in Art.

PRACTICAL- Color- Color Wheel and color chart, Color Exploration, Color

Interaction. Primary colors- Color Wheel, Color Composition, Secondary colors- Color

Wheel, Color Composition, Tertiary colors- Color Wheel, Color Composition Color

schemes- Monochromatic, Achromatic, Complimentary, Split Complimentary, Double-

141

Split Complimentary Polychromatic. Tint, tone &shades- Application of Gray Scale and

Black & White. Mediums in art- Pencil, Charcoal, Pastels, Water & Poster.

UNIT 4 THEORY- What is Design, Philosophies and Studies of Design, Approaches to Design,

Philosophies for Methods of Designing, Philosophies for the Purpose of Design, Design

as a Process, Defining a Design Process, Typical Steps or Stages of the Design Process,

Design and Art, Design and Engineering, Design and Production, Process Design?

PRACTICAL –Drawing, Nature-drawing Composition, Free-Hand Sketching. Object

drawing-2D & 3D,Human drawing- Outline Sketches, Shades & Shadow Composition,

Light- Dark Tone Composition, positive and negative spaces, Product drawings; method

of representing

UNIT 5 THEORY- Composition, Principle of Organization, View Point Compositional

Techniques, Rules of Thirds, Odds, Space, Simplification, Limiting Focus, Geometry

and Symmetry

PRACTICAL –View- Perspective, Isometric, Geometry- Lines & Angle bisecting,

Constructing Regular & Semi Regular Tessellation, Constructing 3D Tessellation

COURSE OUTCOME (CO)


CO1: An ability to color mixing and fine color-discernment.

CO2: An ability to know in principle the physics of color (light), the chemistry of color (pigment), and

the impact of color (psychology).

CO3: An ability to rendering and presentation techniques in design presentations.

CO4: An ability to recognize the relationship between lighting, surface and perception.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H M H M M M H

CO2 H H H M M

CO3 H H H H M H H M

CO4 H M M H H H


TEXT BOOKS

3. Broomer, Gerald F., (1974), Elements of Design: Space, Davis Publications Inc. Worcester,

Massachusetts.

4. Bruce D. Kurty, (1987), Visual imagination- An introduction of Art, Prentice Hall, New

Jers.

142

BFD102A BASIC ART & DESIGN 0-0-4(2)

AIM

Art and design stimulates creativity and imagination. It provides visual, tactile and sensory

experiences and a special way of understanding and responding to the world. It enables

students to communicate what they see, feel and think through the use of color, texture,

form, pattern and different materials and processes. Students become involved in shaping

their environments through art and design activities. They learn to make informed

judgments and aesthetic and practical decisions. They explore ideas and meanings through

the work of artists and designers. Through learning about the roles and functions of art,

they can explore the impact it has had on contemporary life and that of different times and

cultures. The appreciation and enjoyment of the visual arts enriches all our lives

OBJECTIVE

To understand of the social, psychological, cultural, historical and commercial factors.

Development of Graphic Skills, Ability and Comprehension. Establishing Significance of Art.

To understand the influences on art and design activities.

UNIT 1 Introduction to History of Art, Design and Architecture – Pre History To Ancient

Civilization, Mesopotamia, Egypt, Indus Valley, China.

UNIT 2 Architecture, Interior And Furniture Of The Ancient World.

UNIT 3 Fashion And Materials Used In Ancient World.

UNIT 4 Signs And Symbols In The Ancient World.

UNIT 5 Introduction to IndianfolkArt- Worli, Fadd, Madhubani, Modern Art, Blue Pottery,

Fresco, Meenakari , glass mosaic, Miniature Art, Kalamkari, Inlay-Work.

COURSE OUTCOME (CO)


CO1: An ability to understand influences on art and design activities and outcomes through the

interpretation and analysis of information.

CO2: An ability to be able to assess, interpret and evaluate information.




Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H H M

CO2 M M H

CO3 M M

143


TEXT BOOKS

5. Broomer F. Gerald, (1974), Elements of Design, Space, Davis Publications Inc., Worcester,

Masschusetts.

6. Dodson B., (1990), Keys to Drawing, North Light Publications, Cincinnati.

7. Mark W., Mary W. (1999), Drawing for Absolute Beginner, F&W Publications, Cincinnati.

8. Davis M.L. (1996), Visual Design in Dress, Prentice Hall, Canada.

Graves M., (1951). The Art of Colour and Design, McGraw-Hill Book Company

144

BFD103A INTRODUCTION OF FASHION INDUSTRY 0-0-6 [3]

AIM In this unit student would learn introduction of Fashion industry through understanding of fashion and

Career Opportunities and working process in Fashion Industry with the role of Fashion Designer and

merchandiser. Students will also get the exposure of different Fashion Categories with their

Components of a Garment.

OBJECTIVE

To understand the basic of fashion, Market and Fashion Industry.

To understand the Career Opportunities and job profile and working methodology in Fashion

Industry to create awareness about overall understanding of fashion industry.

To acquire the knowledge regarding Fashion Categories with their Components, brands and

designers of a Garmentfor design the garment for fashion industry.

UNIT 1 Introduction of Fashion

Definition of Fashion

Evolution of Fashion

Theory of Clothing Origin

UNIT 2 Basic overview of different fashion markets

Market

Material, Trims and Fasteners, Vendor

Tool and Equipment in the industry.

Fashion Styles silhouette.

UNIT 3 Career Opportunities in Fashion Industry

How to choose a career in fashion industry?

Area of interest.

Research on different job roles.

Qualification needed for particular job role.

Job Profile: -

Role of the merchandiser, role of the designer, role of the garment

producers.

Product development process

Scope of Fashion Designing.

UNIT 4 Basic overview of working methodology of fashion industry

Design Brief

Ideation

Research

Manufacturing

Quality Check

Packaging

Logistics

Promotion

145

Pricing and Costing

UNIT 5 Popular Fashion Exhibitions/Show

National fashion Exhibitions/Shows

International fashion Exhibition/Shows

UNIT 6 Fashion Categories

Men’s wear

Women’s Wear

Kid’s wear

UNIT 7 Components of a Garment (Basic design and design ideas)

Flat drawings of cut components of a garment.

COURSE OUTCOME (CO)


CO1: This unit has introduced to students with the basic information about the Fashion and the industry

CO2: To understand about the different fashion markets

CO3: To understand about the Career Opportunities and job profile in Fashion Industry.

CO4: To understand the basic overview of working methodology of fashion industry.

CO5: To understand about different Popular Fashion Exhibitions/Show

CO6: After going through this unit, student will have learned about Fashion Categories.

CO7: To understand about the components of a Garmentfor design the garment for fashion industry.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M H M M

CO2 H H M M M

CO3 M H H H M M M

CO4

CO5

CO6

CO7



● Aldrich Winifred; Fabric, Form and Flat Pattern Cutting, Om Book Service, New Delhi

● Elaine Stone-The Dynamic of Fashion, Fairchild Publications,New York

146

BFD104A FUNDAMENTAL OF COMPUTERS 3-0-0 [3]

OBJECTIVE

Student will be able to analyze a problem and identify and define the computing requirements to

solution.

Ability to design, implement and evaluate a computer-based system, process, component or

program to meet desired needs.

Ability to know the uses of computer.

Ability to Students will exhibit proficiency with software applications and demonstrate knowledge

of computer technology and components to aide in their understanding of data and information.

This course examines the interaction between information and methods of communication

technology.

UNIT 1 Explain to students why information systems are so important today for business

and management; Evaluate the role of the major types of information systems in a

business environment and their relationship to each other; Assess the impact of the

Internet and Internet technology on business-electronic commerce and electronic

business; Identify the major management challenges to building and using

information systems and learn how to find appropriate solutions to those challenges

UNIT 2 Introduction: Generation of Computer, Functional components of

ComputerNumber Systems: Number systems, fixed and floating point

representation, addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of fixed point

numbers.

UNIT 3 Computer Architecture: Logic Gates, Boolean algebra, Circuits, Decoders,

Multiplexers, Registers, Bus System, Instruction cycle, Instruction Format,

Addressing Modes

UNIT 4 Devices: Input and Output Devices. Memory: Primary Memory, Secondary

Memory and Cache Memory.

UNIT 5 MS- Office Tools: Introduction to Word Processor, Electronic Spreadsheet, and

Presentation tool

COURSE OUTCOME (CO):


CO1: Explain and identify different computing machines during the evolution of computer system, gain

knowledge about five generations of computer system, explain the functions of a computer,

CO2: Identify and discuss the functional units of a computer system, identify the various inputs and

output units and explain their purposes and concept and need of primary and secondary memory.

CO3: Define and distinguish Hardware and Software components of computer system, discuss the

advantages, limitations and applications of computers,

CO4: Understand the Software's, its types with operating system basics. Understand the basic logic

gates, its use and explain how to make different -2 circuits with them, with general computer

147

architecture. Use systems development, word-processing, spreadsheet, and presentation software to

solve basic information systems problems.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H M M

CO2 M H H

CO3 H M

CO4 H M H


TEXT BOOKS

M. M. Mano, Computer System Architecture, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2008.

V Rajaraman, Fundamentals of Computers, Fifth Edition, PHI, 2010.

W. Stallings, Computer Organization and Architecture-Designing for Performance, 8th Edition,

Pearson Education/PHI, Inc., 2010.

J. P. Hayes, Computer Architecture and Organization, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2012.

P.K. Sinha, PritiSihna , Computers Fundamental, 6th Edition BPB Publication,2011.

148

SEMESTER – II

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits Type

1 BFD201A Fashion Studies 3 3 3

2 BFD202A Textile Studies-I 3 3 3

3 BFD203A Material Exploration &

Sourcing

6 6 3

4 BFD204A Fashion Illustration-I 6 6 3


Construction-I

6 6 3

6 BFD206A Computer Application – I 6 6 3

7 BFD207A Design Project –I (Women Wear) 6 6 3

Total 6 30 36 21

149

BFD201A Fashion Studies 3-0-0 [3]

Learning Objective:

The aim of this unit is to develop learners’ understanding and skills in fashion and design,

throughfashionterminology, principle and the theoriesand develop the understanding of Wardrobe

Planning and Exploring resources.

Learners will be expected to develop an awareness of the work of designers and brandsthrough the

personal investigation and recording of media and methods.

UNIT 1

Introduction to Fashion Studies

● Fashion terminology.

● Principle of fashion.

● Fashion components - silhouette, details, color, fabric, texture,

● Fashion cycle.

● Fashion adoption theories – Trickle down, Trickle across, Trickle

up.

● Sources of fashion information.

UNIT 2

General overview about renowned fashion Brands and Designers

Domestic – Anokhi, Fabindia, Anita Dongre, Flying Machine,

Allen Solly, Global Desi.

International-Chanel, Burberry, Hermes, Prada, Gucci, Dior-

Chanel, Burberry, Alexander McQueen, Prada, Gucci, Dior, Dolce

and Gabbana, Versace.

*Students can also study renowned fashion brands and designers other

than mentioned above

UNIT 3 Clothing

Why do we were clothes

Selection of garment for infant, toddler, school going

student, teenagers, adolescents and people with special

needs

UNIT 4 Wardrobe Planning and Exploring resources

150

Course Outcome (CO):


● CO1: Be able to understand thefashionterminology, principle and the theories.

● CO2: Be able to understand about renowned fashion Brands and Designers working process and

their styles.

● CO3: Be able to understand the clothing style of all the age group.

● CO4: Be able to understand about wardrobe planning.


OUTCOMES AND PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES:

Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M M M

CO2 M M H H M H

CO3 H H M M H M M H

CO4 H M H

Reference:

● Gini Stephens Frings, Fashion from Concept to Consumers, Prentice Hall, New Jersey

● Elaine Stone-The Dynamic of Fashion, Fairchild Publications,New York

● Bhargav R. 2005. Design Ideas & Accessories. Jain Publ.

● Carr Harold & John Pomeroy 1996. Fashion Design & Product Development. Blackwell

Science.

● Baugh, G. (2018). The fashion designers textile directory: The creative use of fabrics in design.

London: Thames & Hudson.

● Elaine Stone,” Fashion Merchandising”, Blackwell Science Ltd., 2000.

● Eundeok Kim, Ann Marie Fiore, Hyejeong Kim, “Fashion Trends Analysis and Forecasting”,

Berg Publishers, 2011.

● Dickerson, Kitty “Inside the Fashion Business” Pearson Education,2003

● Koda, H., Bolton, A., &Garelick, R. K. (2005). Chanel. New York: Metropolitan Museum of

Art.

● Glock, R. E., & Kunz, G. I. (2005). Apparel manufacturing: Sewn product analysis. Upper

Saddle River, NJ: Pearson/Prentice Hall.

● Frings, G. S. (2014). Fashion: From concept to consumer. Harlow, United Kingdom: Pearson.

● Fischel, A. (2012). Fashion: The ultimate book of costume and style. London: DK.

● Seeling, C. (2014). Fashion: 150 Years: Couturiers, Designers, Labels. Germany: H.f.ullmann

Publishing.

151

BFD202A Textile Studies-I 3-0-0 [3]

Learning Objective:

In this unit students will be introduced to Textile Science and will learn about the different kind of

Yarns, fabrics (Natural, Synthetic) and their properties.

Students will have all the research study and collected samples in a file compiled together for their

reference and will make the flow charts as per their properties

UNIT 1 Fiber Morphology

● Flow chart from fiber to finished fabric.

● Fiber / spinning/dyeing / weaving / printing / value addition

finishes / embroidery.

● Fiber classification – natural / man-made.

UNIT 2 Properties and Fiber Identification

● Properties of natural fibers (vegetable and animal) - water

absorption / elasticity / conductivity / melting point / boiling point /

abrasion resistance, etc.

● Different methods of fiber identification - physical examination /

burning test / chemical test.

● Properties of Synthetic fibers - water absorption / elasticity /

conductivity / melting point / boiling point/ abrasion resistance,

etc.

UNIT 3 Fabric Studies ● Different kinds of basic fabrics – voile, cambric, poplin, chiffon,

georgette, tissue, crepe, organza, canvas, corduroy, velvet, satin,

etc.

● Their basic properties, weaves and construction details.

UNIT 4 Yarn and Yarn Formation Process ● Different types of yarns- worsted / carded / blended / novelty

yarns.

● Yarn formation process (cotton yarn, woolen / worsted yarn,

synthetic or blended yarn) - opening, cleaning, carding, doubling,

combing, drawing, roving, spinning.

UNIT 5 Properties of Yarns ● Yarn twist- S and Z - properties and uses.

● Count and denier systems – yarn count / significance / formulae,

conversion / uses / numerical.

UNIT 6 Surface Manipulation

● Tucks, Pleats, Gathering.

● Ruffles, Smocking, etc.

● Industry visits.

152



● CO1: To identify the difference between different kind of fibers, yarns and fabrics as per their

properties.

● CO2: To understand about the different kinds of basic fabrics.

● CO3: To understand about the yarn formation process.

● CO4:To develop a range of flow charts as per different kind of fibers/yarns or fabrics.

● CO5:To analyze the yarns as per their yarn count, twist type and fiber content.

● CO6:To understand how to develop the surface manipulation through the fabric.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M H H

CO2 H H H H H

CO3 M M M M H M

CO4 M M H M H M M H

CO5 M M H M H M

CO6 H M

Reference :

● Fabric studies by KVP Singh Kalyani Publishers

● Textiles-Fiber to Fabric by Bernard P. Corbman McGraw Hill

153

BFD203A Material Exploration & Sourcing 0-0-6 [3]

Learning Objective:

The main objective is to develop understanding of skills in the application of materials for different end

uses. Student will develop a visual and tactile understanding of textile raw materials and fabrics

enabling to evaluate performance characteristics in fibers and fabrics in relation to commodity and

processing costs. Student will be required to do data collection & sourcing of samples like knitwear,

performance sportswear, natural fibers or technologically led fabrics from a variety of fiber

manufacturers, wholesalers and retailers in and around Jaipur.

UNIT 1 Introduction to Material Sourcing & Data Collection

● Introduction to basic material required for fashion and textile

design.

● Identifying customers’ requirements.

● Pricing, lead time and trade rules.

● Risk assessment of raw materials.

UNIT 2 Understanding Markets for basic fabrics & weaves

● Market survey to find out basic fabric shops in and around Jaipur.

● Market survey to find out weaving centers in & around Jaipur.

● Create a swatch book of above mention fabrics with their market

price.

UNIT 3 Understanding Markets for Decorative, Complex fabrics, & weaves

● Market survey to find out complex and decorative fabric Shops in

and around Jaipur.

● Market survey to find out weaving artisans and handicraft stores in

and around Jaipur.

● List out all the fabric shops and handicraft centers in detail.

● Create a swatch book of above mention fabrics with their market

price.

UNIT 4 Understanding markets for Laces, Buttons, and others Fasteners

● Market visit to find out various shops of laces, buttons and others

detailing in and around Jaipur.

● List out all the names of the shops along with their address and

complete details.

● Small collection book of above mention detailing items with price.

UNIT 5 Understanding markets for Fashion and textile Accessories

● Market survey to find out small to large fashion accessory shops in

and around Jaipur.

● Prepare the list with name of the shop along with address.

● Small swatch book of accessories along with their price.

154



● CO1: To understand the raw materials for various textile uses

● CO2: To differentiate various materials

● CO3:To surf the market according to the material

● CO4: To apply various materials according to the product

● CO5: To know famous markets and shops for material sourcing & data collection in and around

Jaipur.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M M M H M

CO2 M M H M M

CO3 M H H M H M H

CO4 H H M H H

CO5 H H M H

Reference :

● FABRIC STUDIES by KVP Singh Kalyani Publishers,


● Advanced Textile Design by William Watsons published by crafts and hobbies (2010)

● The students handbook of practical fabric structure by H.Nevillepublished by Crafts and

hobbies (2010)

● Designing with thread: from fiber to fabric by Irene Waller Published by crafts and hobbies

(1973)

● Fiber & Fabric: A Record of American Textile Industries in the Cotton and Woolen Trade,

Volume 49Published1909

● http://books.google.co.in

● http://www.wgsn-edu.com

http://books.google.co.in/

http://www.wgsn-edu.com/

155

BFD204A Fashion Illustration-I 0-0-6 [3]

Learning Objective:

A thorough foundation in fashion illustration is established in this course which covers the fashion

figure and garment interpretation. Students study and develop the basic structure unique to the fashion

figure. Students will learn to interpret draping and surface texture of the fabric together with technical

drawings.

UNIT 1 Basic Human Anatomy

Basics of human anatomy, drawing of legs, feet, hands, arm etc.

Practice of hands and feet, hair style and face analysis

UNIT 2 Eight Head Theory and Stick Figure

Eight-head human figure, elongated eight-head human figures – 8

½, 10 ½, and 11 ½ head.

Stick figure and fleshing of the stick figure.

Stylization of stick figure.

UNIT 3 Medium Exploration and Fabric Rendering

Medium explorations –Color pencil shading, Charcoal,

Watercolour, India Ink, Pastels, Marker.

Fabric rendering – Cotton, Leather, Silk, Satin, Denim, Corduroy,

wool, net, chiffon, organza and velvet.

Embellishment and Prints.

UNIT 4 Fashion Poses and Flat Drawing

Fashion poses, fashion figure in relation to fashion pose, drawing

profile and ¾ figures.

Background for the figures.

Drawing flat sketches

Developing range of women’s wear for a concept

Course Outcome (CO)


● CO1: Understand human figures proportion, movements and postures.

● CO2: To understand about the eight Head Theory and Stick Figure.

● CO3: To understand how to illustrate the idea of design with the skill of fashion illustration

technique with different materials: charcoal, colour pencil, water colour, ink and pastels.

● CO4: Present a fashion Illustration Portfolio, identifying areas for further development and best

practice.

156



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M M

CO2 M H M M M M M M

CO3 M M H H H

CO4 H M H H H H

Reference :

Abling, Bina, (2007), Fashion Sketchbook, Fairchild Publications, New York.

Allen, Anne & Seaman Julian,(2003),Fashion Drawing: The Basic Principles, Batsford Fashion

Books, Londan.

Barnes, Colin, (1994), Fashion Illustration: The Techniques of Fashion

Drawing,MacdonaldOrbis, UK.

M.W. Bryant,(2011), Fashion Drawing –Illustration Techniques for Fashion Designers,

Laurence King Publisher

Ireland, P.J. (1993). Fashion Design Illustration: Womenswear, Oxford, Batsford.

Ireland, P.J. (1993). Figure Templates for Fashion Illustration, Oxford, Batsford.

Mc Kelvey, K. and Munslow, J. (2007). Illustrating Fashion,New Delhi, John Wiley & Sons.

Drudi, E. and Paci, T. (2010). Figure Drawing for Fashion Design, Amsterdam, Pepin Press.

Borrelli, L. (2000). Fashion Illustration Now, London, Thames & Hudson.

Abling, B. (2003). Model Drawing,New York, Fairchild Books.

Drudi, E. (2011). Figure Drawing for Fashion Design, Amsterdam, Pepin Press.

157

BFD205A Pattern Making & Garment Construction-

I

0-0-6 [3]

Learning Objective:

The main objective of this module is to develop: (I) understanding of pattern making, based on body

measurements, using industry standard signs and symbols. (II) To develop the understanding in the

skills of garment construction techniques, creating toiles, demonstrating the safe use of equipment and

relevant health and safety regulations.

UNIT 1 Pattern Drafting

● Introduction of Pattern Making

● Method of measuring body and dress form

● Tools of pattern making

● Common terms used in pattern development

● Method for drafting the basic pattern set (women/Kids)

● Torso Pattern

● Test fitting of patterns

● Dart manipulation - elementary and advanced dart manipulation.

● Variations of Sleeve, collar and skirt

UNIT 2 Draping

Introduction to Basics of draping

Grain line , preparation of muslin for draping

Dress form , Key to abbreviations used in draping

Basic Bodice Block – Front & Back

Basic Skirt Block – Front & Back

Skirt Variation

Collar variation

Yokes

UNIT 3 Garments Construction Techniques

● Sewing machine and parts

● Stitch practice.

● Types of stitches.

● Types of seams & seam finishes.

● Plackets, Pocket, Collar.

● Fitting a sleeve, Bodice Blocks.

● Darts & neckline finishes.



● CO1: To create and use a set of basic blocks and apply skills in dart and seam manipulation.

● CO2: To produce a full-scale pattern from creative designs and working drawings through

Pattern making and draping technique.

158

● CO3: To make them familiar with sewing machine and to work proficiently on the sewing

machine with the rectify simple problems of the machine and to understand the special skills

and techniques used in the garment making with the understanding of various parts of the

garment and constructionof complete garment.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M M H M M

CO2 H M M M H H

CO3 H M H M H M

Reference :

● H. G. Armstrong (2009) Pattern Making for Fashion Design, Prentice Hall, New York.

● D. McCunn, r. Lew, (1977) How to make sewing patterns, Blue feathers.

● K.R. Zarapkar, (2005) Zarapkar, System of Cutting Navneet Publications, India.

● N.R. Hollen, C.J. Kundel, (1999) Pattern Making by Flat Pattern Method, Prentice Hall

Publication.

● W. Aldrich, (2008), Metric Pattern Cutting for women’s wear, Willey Blackwell Publication.

● W. Aldrich, (20080 Metric Pattern Cutting for Menswear Willey Blackwell Publication.

● D. McCunn, R. Lew, (1977) How to make sewing patterns, blue feathers.

● Connie Amaden- Crawford (2010) A guide to Fashion Sewing, Fairchild Publication

● Lynda Maynard, (2010) The Dressmaker’s Handbook of couture Sewing Techniques: Essential

step-by-step Techniques for professional Results, Interweave press.

● Claire Shaeffer, (2008) Claire Shaeffer’s Fabric Sewing Guide, Krause Publications.

● Claire Shaeffer, (2001) High Fashion Sewing Secrets from the World’s Best Designers. A Step-

by-Step Guide to Sewing Stylish Seams Buttonholes, Pockets, collars, Hems and more, Rodale

Books Publishers.

● Injoo Kim. Mykyung Uh. (2008) Apparel Making in Fashion Design, Breg Publications.

● P. Counch, (2011) Illustrated Guide to Sewing: Garment Construction: A Complete Course on

Making Clothing for Fit and Fashion, Fox Chapel Publishing.

● (2011) Threads Sewing Guide A complete Reference from America’s Best-Loved Sewign

Magazine. Taunton Pr

159

BFD206A Computer Application - I 0-0-6 [3]

Learning Objective:

The main objective of this unit is to learn how to Use Computer with User friendly. Student will learn

documentation, spreadsheet, presentation and web surfing with security.

They will learn the technique of Creating Mood Board, Color Board, Picture placement and Picture

blending by Photoshop and Corel Draw.

They will also understand how to create Flat drawing and specification sheet.

UNIT 1 Basic Computer

Features of windows.

Word processing.

Spreadsheet.

Presentation Graphics.

Securing Computer Data.

UNIT 2 Basic Corel

Introduction to Corel Draw

Concept vector based drawing.

Used corel Draw in garments.

Flat Drawing through Corel.

Specification Sheet Formation.

Measurement of garments & stitch line.

Draw single stitch / Overlock stitch / Flat lock stitch.

UNIT 3 Basic Photoshop

Introduction to photoshop/ pixed based vs vector.

Tool Box

Drop downs functions.

Image sizing/ Resolution/ Page Size



CO1: Student will be able to work with windows utility, documentation with creating

spreadsheet and make presentation and web surfing.

CO2:Students will be able to convert Manual Design in Digital Form through Corel with Exact

measurement with creating design variations.

CO3: Students will be able to understand photoshop/ pixed based vs vector and functions.

160



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M M H M H M

CO2 M M H M M H H M

CO3 M H H M M H M H

Reference :

Gary David Bouton,Corel DRAW X7: The Official Guide.

Corel Corporation, CorelDraw X7 User Guide

http://product.corel.com/help/CorelDRAW/540229932/Main/EN/User-Guide/CorelDRAW-

X7.pdf

Video Tutorials on CorelDraw, www.lynda.com

Adode (2018), Adobe Photoshop CC Help

https://helpx.adobe.com/pdf/photoshop_reference.pdf

Perkins, C. (2009) How to do everything: Adobe Photoshop CS4. McGraw-Hill Companies

Adobe Photoshop CS6 Tutorials.

http://www.marquette.edu/ctl/e-learning/documents/PhotoshopPDF.pdf

Dayle, B. &Dayley, D. (2012) Adobe Photoshop CS6 Bible. Wiley.

Andrew Faulkner, Conrad Chavez (2015) Adobe Photoshop CC Classroom in a Book, the

official creator of video training for CorelDraw X4, X5, and X6.

http://www.amazon.in/Andrew-Faulkner/e/B00MJJZBRW/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1

http://www.amazon.in/Conrad-Chavez/e/B001HMYXMG/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_2

161

BFD207A Design Project –I (Women Wear –

White cotton based)

0-0-6 [3]

Learning Objective:

The main objective of this module is to develop a design intellect and basic design system. Hands-on

experiences in the interpretation of image of fashion product/customer specifications, apparel design

concept development, illustrations and technical drawings, design for prototyping, and manufacturing

will be utilized in the instruction of the design process. Students will accurately document their fashion

product design experience through design process in a notebook.

The course would require the students to carry out research on the major women wear designers and

their brands along with the recognition of different women wear segments and their growth rate.

UNIT 1 Design Development Process

● Research

● Inspiration board

● Creating Mood boards- its application in designing apparels.

● Theme boards- its direct relation to creating designs of apparels.

● Client boards - the study of peculiar characteristics of a client to

design special apparels for him/ her.

UNIT 2 Design Development Process ● Illustration board - Fashion Illustrations according to themes.

● Accessory board

● Trim &Swatch (Fabric) boards- Use of Trims and swatches in

surface texture of the designed apparels.

● Technical drawing - Flat sketch board / tech pack

UNIT 3 Process of Fittings ● Muslin fits (toile)

● Actualising the garment

● Costing

● Presentation



● CO1:To develop the design process through experimental ideas and applications and present

research analysis to client groups.

● CO2: To extend and apply skills in developing creative visual language.

● CO3: To synthesize and critically evaluate experimentation in personal creative practice.

162



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M M M M H

CO2 M H H M M

CO3 H H M H M

Reference :

● Encyclopedia of Fashion accessories by Phyllis Tortora Fairchild

● Fashion Sketchbook by Abling Fairchild

● How Fashion Works by Gavin Waddell Blackwell

● Jones, J.C: Design methods: Seeds of human futures, Wiley inter science, London, 1992.


● Itten, Johannes; The Art of Color: The Subjective Experience and Objective Rationale of Color,


163

SEMESTER – III

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits

1 BFD301A History of Fashion Design &

Contextual

3 3 3

2 BFD302A Textile Studies-II 3 3 3

3 BFD303A Apparel Manufacturing

Technology

3 3 3

4 BFD304A Fashion Illustration-II 6 6 3


Construction-II (Indian wear

+Ad. Draping)

6 6 3

6 BFD306A Computer Application – II

(Draping)

6 6 3

7 BFD307A Design Project –II (Women’s

wear draping project )

6 6 3

Total 9 24 33 21

164

BFD301A History of Fashion Design & Contextual 3-0-0 [3]

Learning Objective:

This course provides an overview of costume history in Western culture from ancient civilizations to

the present. Students examine cultural, social, and historical events and analyze their effect on the

history of costume and apparel, including the influence of historical costume on fashion today. Students

develop a broad fashion Vocabulary and become familiar with period costume terminology.

UNIT 1 Influences of Art and Design Movements ● Cubism

● Dadaism

● Surrealism

● Minimalism

● Pop Art

● Bauhaus

UNIT 2 Ancient civilizations

● Egypt

● Greece

● Rome

● Assyrian

● Babylonian

● Byzantine

UNIT 3 Indian Periods

● Mauryan

● Kushan

● Gupta

● Mughal

UNIT 4 Design Developments

● Arts and Crafts

● Gothic

● Historical Art and Design Developments.



● CO1: To understand influences on art and design activities and outcomes through the

interpretation and analysis of information

● CO2: To assess, interpret and evaluate information.

● CO3: To evaluate and present conclusions.

● CO4: To understand design developments of Historical Art and Design.

165



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M M

CO2 M H M M M M M M

CO3 M M H H H

CO4 H M H H H H

Reference :

● R. Nath, (1976) History of Decorative Art in Mughal Architecture, Motilal Banarasidas, Delhi.

● Urevbee, O.Andrew, (1997) Culture and Technology, UNESCO, Paris

● Bayer, Patricia, (1990) Art Deco Interiors, Thames and Hudson, Delhi

● Hartt, Frederiak, (1989) Art: History of Painting, Sculpture, and Architecture, Prentice Hall, NJ

● Sivaramamurthy, (1997), Art of India, Marry N Abrams, NY

● Nath R, (1980), Art of Khajuraho, Abinav Publications, Delhi.

● Bhatnagar Parul, Traditional Indian Costumes &Textile, Abhishek Publication Chandigarh.

● Jamila Brij Bhushan, The Costume and Textiles of India, Taraporevala Sons& Co. Pvt. Ltd,

Mumbai

● Horn.M.JGurel L.M. The Second Skin, Houghton MiffinCo.Boston

● Suvasas The Beautiful Costumes, Abhishek Publication Chandigarh. J.Anderson Black, A

History of Fashion ,Orbis Publishing Ltd. London

166

BFD302A Textile Studies-II 3-0-0 [3]

Learning Objective:

In this unit students will be introduced to Textile Science and will learn about the different kind of

techniques of fabrics manufacturing and their properties. Students will learn to describe and state the

characteristics and properties of various fabric structures and finishes used in the fashion industry.

Students will have all the research study and collected samples in a file compiled together for their

reference and will make the flow charts as per their properties.

UNIT 1 Fabric Formation Techniques

● Different methods of fabric formation i.e. weaving, knitting, non-

woven.

● Comparative study of woven, knitted and non-woven fabrics.

UNIT 2 Weave Study

● Different types of weaves- plain, satin, sateen, twill, bird’s eye,

jacquard, basket, ribbed crepe, pile, dobby, triaxial, lappet.

● Properties and usage of different weaves.

● Construction of different weaves- their EPI & PPI

UNIT 3 Weaving Machinery ● Different types of weaving machinery i.e. dobby, jacquard, leno,

Swivel & Lappet.

● Common defects in weaving.

UNIT 4 Introduction to Non-Woven ● What is Non- woven.

● Classification of non-woven.

● Properties and end usage of non-woven.

UNIT 5 Production Methods ● Different methods of production- web formation, bonding, and

finishing

● Industrial visits.

Course Outcome (CO)


● CO1: To understand the fabric formation techniques and to compare the woven and Non-woven

and knitted fabrics.

● CO2: to understand about the different types of weaves, properties and construction.

● CO3: To understand about the different types of weaving machinery.

● CO4: To understand about the introduction of non-woven,classification and the properties of

non-woven.

● CO5: To understand about different production methods of fabric manufacturing.

167



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H M M

CO2 M H M M M M M M

CO3 M M H H

CO4 H M H H H H

CO5 M H

Reference :

● FABRIC STUDIES by KVP Singh Kalyani Publishers


168

BFD303A Apparel Manufacturing Technology 3-0-0 [3]

Learning Objective:

The aim of this unit is to provide learners with the knowledge and understanding of the complete

Apparel Production & management process. The student will understand the production manager

position with apparel manufacturing Company which will benefit from intimate knowledge of apparel

industry, Apparel production & management department units, Process flow & management in apparel

manufacturing units for men’s & women’s wear.

UNIT 1 Introduction to Apparel industry

Apparel industry in India.

Domestic industry.

Size of industry.

Nature of the industry, its developments in recent years

UNIT 2 Process flow & management in apparel manufacturing units

Buyers-suppliers meeting, Production order placement.

Sampling, BOM generation for PO.

Pre –production sample.

Fabric washing.

Raw material inspection, raw material procurement.

Production shipment sample.

Finishing

● Packing –shipment

UNIT 3 Machineries in apparel production ● Spreading machines.

● Cutting machines.

UNIT 4 Sewing machine parts and performance measures

● Major sewing machines

● parts of the sewing machines

● BS for stitches and seams

UNIT 5 Pre & Post treatments of fabrics

● Washing, Pressing, finishing,Packaging

UNIT 6 Apparel production & management department units

Merchandising.

Sampling.

Fabric, trims and accessories.

Quality assurance.

169



CO1: To understand that how the industry works.

CO2: To understand the whole production process/system in the industry.

CO3: To understand the different spreading and cutting machines of the industry.

CO4: To understand the different parts of the machineries and performance measures in the

industry.

CO5:To understand the different parts of the industry like washing, pressing and Finishing &

Packaging Department etc.

CO6:To understand the different parts of the industry like Design & Sampling Department,

Cutting & Stitching Department, Merchandising, Fabric, trims and accessories department and

the Quality assurance.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M M

CO2 M H M M M M M M

CO3 M M H H H

CO4 H M H H H H

CO5 M

CO6 H M M

Reference :

Peyton B. Hudson (1989), Guide to Apparel Manufacturing, MEDI Apparel Inc.

● H.Carr. B. Latham, (1988), the Technology of Clothing Manufacture, Blackwell Scientific

Publications.

● The Apparel Design and Production Handbook: A Technical Reference, Fashiondex Incorporation.

● Richard Jones, (2006), the Apparel Industry, John Willey & Sons.

● Grace I, Kunz, (2004), Apparel Manufacturing: Sewn Product Analysis, Prentice Hall Publications.

170

BFD304A Fashion Illustration-II 0-0-6 [3]

Learning Objective:

Introducing students to illustrate figures with reference to eight-head figure and elongated eight-head

figures. This subject is an extension of fashion illustration-I, where the students would be encouraged to

sketch fashion figures, render the fabrics and work on fashion figures with reference to design

aesthetics.

The course is a study of illustration of different garments for Women, Kids and Men.

UNIT 1 Illustration of men’s/kids garments, different poses, importance of he

background.

Men’s features- Face, hair, hands and feet.

Illustrating men’s figures in different mediums.

UNIT 2 Individual style in illustration for different looks.

UNIT 3 Accessory designing and illustration

Illustration of Jewellery using various mediums like pearls, beads,

gold and silver, diamonds, wood, wires, velvet, net, etc,

Designing and illustration of head gears

Designing and illustration of bags and belts using various mediums

like leather, cane, pearls, beads, wires, velvet, net, etc.

Designing and illustrating footwear of all types

Designing and illustrating bows and ties on varied dresses.

Illustrating hairstyles



● CO1: To understand how to illustrate the idea of design with the skill of fashion illustration

technique.

● CO2: Understand human figures proportion, movements and postures.

● CO3: To understand the garment interpretation with accessory from a sketch.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M H

CO2 M M M M M M

CO3 M H M

171

Reference :

Abling, Bina, (2007), Fashion Sketchbook, Fairchild Publications, New York.

Allen, Anne & Seaman Julian,(2003),Fashion Drawing: The Basic Principles, Batsford Fashion

Books, Londan.

Barnes, Colin, (1994), Fashion Illustration: The Techniques of Fashion

Drawing,MacdonaldOrbis, UK.

M.W. Bryant,(2011), Fashion Drawing –Illustration Techniques for Fashion Designers,

Laurence King Publisher

Ireland, P.J. (1993). Fashion Design Illustration: Womenswear, Oxford, Batsford.

Ireland, P.J. (1993). Figure Templates for Fashion Illustration, Oxford, Batsford.

Mc Kelvey, K. and Munslow, J. (2007). Illustrating Fashion,New Delhi, John Wiley & Sons.

Drudi, E. and Paci, T. (2010). Figure Drawing for Fashion Design, Amsterdam, Pepin Press.

Borrelli, L. (2000). Fashion Illustration Now, London, Thames & Hudson.

Abling, B. (2003). Model Drawing,New York, Fairchild Books.


Riegelman, N. (2006). 9 Heads: A Guide to Drawing Fashion, London, Thames and Hudson.

Riegelman, (2006). Colors for Modern Fashion: Drawing Fashion with Colored Markers, London,

Thames and Hudson.

Steven, S. (2010). Illustrating Fashion: Concept to Creation,New York, Fairchild Books.

Endeavour, (2010). Modern Fashion Illustration,London, Endeavour.

Tate, S. L. (1995). The Complete Book of Fashion Illustration,New York, Prentice Hall

Publication.

Beer, R. (1995). Designer Guide to Girls’ and Junior Apparel,New York, Fairchild Books.

Armstrong, W., et al. (2005). From Pencil to Pen Tool: Understanding and Creating the Digital

Fashion Image, New York, Fairchild Books.

Drudi, E. (2003). Wrap and Drape Fashion: History, Design and Drawing, Amsterdam, Pepin

Press.

172

BFD305A Pattern Making & Garment

Construction-II

0-0-6 [3]

Learning Objective:

The purpose of this module is to provide learners with the opportunity to develop skills in the principles

of Indian wear pattern drafting and construction.

UNIT 1 Pattern Drafting

● Standardize concept of pattern making Direct Method

● Things to keep in mind while taking measurement

● Paper pattern of Salwar, Churidar, Plain kurta, Kalidar kurta

● Paper pattern of SareeBlouse, Choli blouse

● Marka-Making & Layouts

● Spec-Sheets of one designed garment

Documentation and Presentation of Work

In portfolio - All full-size patterns & 1/4 file document

UNIT 2 Garments Construction

Construction of Salwar /Churidar

Construction of plain kurta

Construction of kalidar kurta

Construction of plain blouse

Construction of choli blouse


In portfolio -- All women’s wear garment construction with proper

finish

UNIT 3 Advance Draping

Hands on:

Handling of new fabrics – georgette, chiffon, satin, knits, etc

Asymmetric drapes

Cowls – underarm, hip, etc.

Draping of accents & emphasis – peplum, frills, flounces, etc.

Conversion of Drapes in to flat patterns (developing of patterns

from drapes)

Conversion of drapes in to actual fabrics.

Garment Construction

Construction of mock-up garment from a chosen design.

Construction of final garment from a chosen design


In portfolio - Draping techniques, Pattern Making and Garment

Construction

173



● CO1: In this module student will learn to take bodice measurement related to the Indian wear

garment with different variation and produce them on drafting paperandcreate full-scale

pattern from creative designs and working drawings.

● CO2: To understand and appreciate the concept of fit and balance of garments

● CO3: Understanding of identify and differentiate between fabric varieties with understanding

of different materials and develop understanding on how to concealment of fabric joins within

garment with advanced knowledge in draping, pattern cutting and construction for women’s

clothing.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H M M M

CO2 M H M H M H

CO3 M M H M H H

Reference :

● H. G. Armstrong (2009) Pattern Making for Fashion Design, Prentice Hall, New York.

● W. Aldrich, (2008), Metric Pattern Cutting for women’s wear, Willey Blackwell Publication.

● W. Aldrich, (20080),Metric Pattern Cutting for Menswear Willey Blackwell Publication.

● Lynda Maynard, (2010) The Dressmaker’s Handbook of couture Sewing Techniques:

174

BFD306A Computer Application - II 0-0-6 [3]

Learning Objective:

The purpose of this module is to provide learners with the opportunity to develop skills in Draping and

Rendering technique through coral & Photoshop with Exact measurement & Fine finishing with Real

Looking & 3D Rendering and Draping

UNIT 1 Croqui and 3D Rendering

Introduction

Drawing the Croqui through Curve tool.

Import croqui (JPG) in photoshop and apply 3D Rendering.

Import 3D Render Croqui in Corel.

UNIT 2 Draping

Draping Fabrics.

Concept of Design variation & Color Variation.

Apply 3D Effect on Draped Design

Croqui Development with fabrics/ Texture/ Fleshing etc.

UNIT 3 Formatting

Concept of Page Setup.

Light Effect.

Concept of Page Margin.

Concept of Page Layout.

Setting of Document.

Formatting of Document.

Specification sheet.

Costing



● CO1:To develop 3D rendering on croqui.

● CO2: To develop a 3D Rendering of Drape design and skill About Fabric.

● CO3: To develop specification Sheet and Costing and Able to develop Industrial wise real

design.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


175

CO1 M H M M

CO2 M H M M M M M M

CO3 M M H H H

Reference :

● Reference Book of Corel Draw X7: Corel DRAW X7: The Official Guide, Author

Name of CorelDraw X7: The Official Guide: Gary David Bouton.

● Reference Book of Adobe Photoshop CC 2015 :- Adobe Photoshop CC Classroom in a Book

(2015 release) Author Name of Adobe Photoshop CC Classroom in a Book (2015 release):

Andrew Faulkner (Author), Conrad Chavez



176

BFD307A Design Project –II (Women Wear –

Draping Project)

0-0-6 [3]

Learning Objective:

The main objective of this module is to develop a design intellect and basic design system. Hands-on

experiences in the interpretation of image of fashion product/customer specifications, apparel design

concept development, illustrations, Draping and technical drawings, design for prototyping, and

manufacturing will be utilized in the instruction of the design process. Students will accurately

document their fashion product design experience through design process in a notebook.

The course would require the students to carry out research on the major women wear designers and

their brands along with the recognition of different women wear segments and their growth rate.


● Research







● Accessory board




UNIT 3 Process of Fitting ● Muslin fits (toile)

● Actualising the garment

● Costing

● Presentation







177



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M M

CO2 M H M M M M M

CO3 M M H H H

Reference :








178

SEMESTER – IV

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits

1 BFD401A Budgeting & Costing 3 3 3

2 BFD402A Trend Forecast and Analysis 3 3 3

3 BFD403A Surface Design 6 6 3

4

BFD404A

BFD404B

Elective (Choose any 1 )

A. Photography

B. Fashion Accessories

4 4 2


Construction-III (Men’s & Kids

wear)

6 6 3

6 BFD406A Computer Application – III (In

design and illustrator)

6 6 3

7 BFD407A Design Project –III (Indian Wear

craft based project)

6 6 3

Total 6 28 34 20

179

BFD401A Budgeting & Costing 3-0-0 [3]

Learning Objective:

Fashion is a hard-nosed industry that has to make profits and part of that profit making is in the

containment of costs. That might be the containment of manufacturing costs or the containment

of sourcing costs, but either way it will impact the final price point of the garment and the profit

margins to be obtained.

Concise understanding and examination of budgeting and costing for the rapidly changing

fashion industry encourages a realistic awareness of costing, manufacture and sourcing

UNIT 1 Introduction to costing & budgeting ● Garment Costing

● Budgeting

Elements of Costs

● Direct Materials

● Direct Labor

● Overhead

● Division of costs

UNIT 2 Cost classifications ● By Nature, Elements or Analytics

● By Function

● As Direct or Indirect Cost

● By Variability

● By Controllability

● By Normality

● By Time

● According to Planning and Control

● For Managerial costs

Methods of Costing ● Job costing

● Contract Costing

● Batch Costing

● Process Costing

● Unit Costing

● Operating Costing

● Operation Costing

● Multiple Costing

● .

●

UNIT 3 Techniques of Costing

● Uniform Costing

● Marginal Costing

● Standard Costing

180

● Historical Costing

● Direct Costing

Cost Sheet/Statement of Cost ● Stock of Raw Material

● Stock of Work-in-progress

● Stock of Finished Goods

UNIT 4 Composition of Cost of Garment ● Fabric

● Parameters that affect the fabric cost

● Minimum order quantity

● Inco term used

● Calculating the cost of Fabric

● Cost calculation of Fabric in a Garment

● Trims

● Types of Trims used in Garments

● UOM of trims used in Garments

● Calculation of Trim Charges

● Value Addition

● Types of Value Additions

● Calculation of Value Addition Charges

● CMT (Cost of Making) Cost

● Labor cost

● Cutting Cost

● Sewing Cost

● Production Cost

● FOB Cost of Garment

● Testing

● Types of Fabric and Garment Tests

● Test Standards, Requirements and Charges

● Documentation

● Types of Domestic and Export Documentation

● Documentation Charges

● Logistics

● Inco terms and factors affecting logistic charges

● Overheads and Mark-up

● Overhead Calculation

● Mark-up Methodology

UNIT 5 Pricing policies of Garment

● Selecting a Pricing Method

● Cost Oriented Pricing

● Tax & GST

● Competition based Pricing

● Market Oriented Pricing

● Break Even analysis

● Budgeting, Financial Planning and Business Plan

181



CO1: To refine costing and budgeting terminology used in apparel industry.

CO2: To understand the importance of a well-defined costing and budgeting process.

CO3: To determine elements of a basic cost sheet of a garment.

CO4: To Acquire techniques and best practices on budgeting / costing.

CO5: To learn how to build business plan imbibing cost and budget structure.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M M

CO2 M H M M M M M M

CO3 M M H H H

CO4 H M H H H H

CO5 H M M H

Reference :

● Weitz Levy, Edition April 2008, Retail Management, Irwin Professional Pub, ISBN:

9780073381046

● Carr, H.C., " The clothing Factory ", The Clothing Institute, London (1972)

● Jarnow, J.A., and Judelle B., “Inside the Fashion Business ", JWS (1974) 2nd edition.

● Swinney, John B, “Merchandising of Fashion ", Ronald press (1942).

● RichordD.IrwinIcn,”Principles of cost Accounting: Managerial Applications”Revised by Gayle

Rayburn 1983

● Sultan Chand & sons” Management Accounting” New Delhi,2nd edition 1998

182

BFD402A Trend Forecast and Analysis 3-0-0 [3]

Learning Objective:

Critically analyze, synthesize and reflect on complex theories and recent developments, both

local and international, at a micro and macro level, to extend and challenge knowledge and

practice in fashion entrepreneurship.

Investigate emergent global entrepreneurial issues and strategically respond to their impact in

the fashion and textiles industry.

Identify, evaluate and communicate the potential impact of cultural, social, economic and

technological components in the trend forecasting process.

UNIT 1 Trend Materials & Fashion Development

Materials for research

Color practice

Interactions between colors and materials

Briefing and mood board creation

Materials are buying

Product development

UNIT 2 Trend Design research, Transmission and interpretation

Fashion trend terminology

The trend industry

Nature of trends

Trends in urban environment

Information Management

Visualization techniques

Argumentation strategies

UNIT 3 Fashion market and marketing environment research

Market research

Trend research techniques

Research design & data sources

Sampling methods

Evaluating the collections

Forecasting Fashion

Market Segmentation marketing mix

Fashion consumer

UNIT 4 Trend Analysis

Evolution of fashion trend

Fashion trend implications for design/retail decisions

Consumer influence on market

UNIT 5 Fashion Forecasting

Fashion Forecasting Process

183

Diffusion of Innovation

Fashion Cycles

Cultural Indicators

Color Forecasting

Textile Forecasting

Styling Forecasting

Sales Forecasting Competitive Analysis



CO1: To assess and review the requirements and operational methods of the role of a trend forecaster

relevant to fashion and textiles entrepreneurship.

CO2: To understand the Trend Design research, Transmission and interpretation of fashion.

CO3: To understand the Fashion market and marketing environment research.

CO4: To substantiate and apply appropriate research methodologies to identify and analyze alternative

research sources for identifying global trend directions.

CO5: To research and critically analyze the challenges and opportunities of translating trend scenarios

into the development of textile and fashion products.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M H

CO2 M H M M

CO3 M H M M M M M M

CO4 M M H H H

CO5 H M H H H H

Reference :

Elaine Stone,” Fashion Merchandising”, Blackwell Science Ltd., 2000.

Eundeok Kim, Ann Marie Fiore, Hyejeong Kim, “Fashion Trends Analysis and Forecasting”,

Berg Publishers, 2011.

184

BFD403A Surface Design 0-0-6 [3]

Learning Objective:

This module is all about of dyes and Print style. In this module students will be able to

understand about classes of dyes, dyestuffs, techniques, dye auxiliaries, printing and printing

techniques, effects and defects of dyeing and printing.

The module is to teach the basic and complicated techniques of surface embellishment to the

students. A surface design technique makes the fabric beautiful by various methods. Surface

design refers to the process of adding color, pattern, texture or design to fabric through the use

of outside mediums such as dyeing, printing, batik, embroidery and many more.

UNIT 1 Dyeing Theory

Theory of Dyeing – Application of various dyes

dye-fiber interaction

Classification of Dyes- Natural dyes and synthetic dyes. Direct

dyes Reactive, vat, insoluble azoic, indigo sol, acid dyes, basic

dyes, Sulphur dyes, disperse dyes, pigments.

UNIT 2

Methods and Machinery

Methods and machinery for dyeing,

Pre and after treatments of dyeing

Defects of dyeing,

Care of fabrics.

UNIT 3 Application of Dyes

Practical application and swatch dyeing with direct, basic,

reactive, sulfur, vat, mordant, pigment and acid dye.

UNIT 4 Tie & Dye

Introduction to tie and dye.

Making samples of dye and dye with different dyes on different

fabrics and product making.

Creative exploration of dyeing techniques.

UNIT 5 Different styles of Printing

Styles of printing: Direct, Discharge and Resist styles on

cellulosic, Protein, manmade textiles and their blends,

Solvent dyeing, foam dyeing, spray dyeing.

After treatments: Steaming, curing, and ageing of Prints.

UNIT 6 Printing methods

Hand block, machine, block, roller and Screen-printing methods,

Advantages and drawbacks of all these printing methods,

Printing paste: Constituents of print paste,

Thickener and its types. Function of thickener, selection of

thickener.

185

UNIT 7 Resist style of Printing

● Introduction to Batik.

● Application of technique on various fabrics and product making.

UNIT 8 Printing Styles

● Practical introduction to printing methods and application of block,

stencil and screen printing

UNIT 9 Natural Prints

● Application of Dabu print with product.

● Application of Natural print (echo print) with product.

● Application of Pigment print with product.

● Practical application of Ice Dyeing with product



CO1: To Apply and select various dyes according to fabric.

CO2: To find Defects in dyeing and printing.

CO3: To learn the process of tie and dye

CO4: To learn the various classes of dyes and auxiliaries used in dyeing through practical application.

CO5: To demonstrate Hand block, machine, block, roller and Screen-printing methods. Advantages and

drawbacks of all these printing methods.

CO6: To understand Direct, Discharge and Resist styles on cellulosic, Protein, manmade textiles and

their blends andanalyze Pre and after treatments: Steaming, curing, and ageing of Prints.

CO7: To learn printing process, history of printing, different style of printing preparation of printing

paste practically.

CO8: To learn basic and complex hand embroideries through needle and anchor threads.

CO9: To apply various surface design techniques according to the design requirement.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M M

CO2 M H M M M M M M

CO3 M M H H H

CO4 H M H H H H

CO5 M M M

CO6 H H

CO7 M M M H M

CO8 M M M M M

CO9 H H M M H

186

Reference :

Textile Dyeing and Coloration(J. Richard Aspland)

Textile Preparation and Dyeing(A K Roy Choudhury )

Chemical Technology in the Pre-Treatment Processes of Textiles(S.R. Karmakar

Dyeing and Screen-Printing on Textiles: Revised and updated Joanna Kinnersly-Taylor

Fabric printing and dyeing; a practical handbook David Green

Fashion from concept to consumers – Frings 6th Ed.

187

BFD404A


A. Photography

0-0-4 [2]

AIM This unit aims to develop learners’ skills and understanding in Product Photography Students will get

Knowledge of the history of the photographic medium and how it relates to the history of the other fine

arts

OBJECTIVE Various aspects of photography including lighting for indoor & outdoor, handling of studio equipment

and set planning & composition.

UNIT

1

Various aspects of photography including lighting for Indoor & Outdoor

UNIT

2

Handling of studio equipment

UNIT

3

Set planning

UNIT

4

Composition.

UNIT

5

Final Product Photography


CO1 Be able to use space and equipment.

CO2 Be able to use sets, lights and backgrounds.

CO3: Apply the principles of lighting and color theory to a variety of photographic scenarios by

measuring, evaluating, and adjusting light and color to create quality images.

MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES LEADING TO THE ACHIEVEMENT OF

PROGRAM OUTCOMES AND PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES Course

Outcom

e


Outcome


CO1 H H M M H M

CO2 H H M H M

CO3 H H M H M


TEXT BOOKS

Understanding Exposure: How to Shoot Great Photographs with a Film or Digital

CamerabyBryan Peterson

https://www.goodreads.com/author/show/82078.Bryan_Peterson

188

The Photographer's Eye: Composition and Design for Better Digital Photos by Michael

Freeman

BFD404B


Fashion Accessories

0-0-4 [2]

Learning Objective:

The aim of this unit to impart intensive training for complete understanding of fashion accessories,

techniques and process, product development and quality, market intelligence, management and

operational methods.

UNIT 1 Lacquer Craft Accessories, Textile Craft Accessories.

UNIT 2 Fashion Jewellery

UNIT 3 Wood Craft Accessories

UNIT 4 Metal Craft Accessories

UNIT 5 Leather Craft & Packaging


CO1: Student will be able to understand about fashion accessories and understand the

techniques & process of fashion accessories.

CO2: Student will be able to understand the product development, quality & marketing

aspects.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M H M M

CO2 M H M H M H H M H

Reference :

Encyclopedia of Fashion Accessories author



189

Fashion Accessories- The Complete 20th Century Source book Hardcover – September, 2000

by John Peacock (Author)

BFD405A Pattern Making & Garment

Construction-III (Men’s & Kids wear)

0-0-6 [3]

Learning Objective:

The course is designed to inculcate the skills of making patterns for the men’s/Kids wear with

focus on fit and details which is expected to grow in Indian market in terms of exports and

domestic market.

Students would be encouraged to make their unique sketches and make the patterns for the

same.

To familiarize the students with the concept of grading for fashion

UNIT 1 Size chart of menswear shirt & Shirt terminology Paper pattern of Shirt

Paper pattern of Waist coat

Collars- (shirt collar, stand collar, roll collar), cuffs, plackets.

Standardization of measurements: fundamentals of grading and grading

terminology.

UNIT 2 Size chart of menswear trouser & Trouser terminology

Paper pattern of Trouser with zip fly.

UNIT 3 Garment Construction

Men’s Shirt with attachment of Collars, cuffs and plackets

Men’s Trouser with attachment of zip fly.

Men’s waist coat with lining attachment.

Specification Sheet and Costing.

Fabric selection and stitching.

UNIT 4 Pattern making of Kids Wear

Basic Bodice Block

Basic Skirt Block

Basic Sleeve Block

UNIT 5 Garment Construction

Construction of Basic patterns of Kids wear

http://www.amazon.com/John-Peacock/e/B001IR3IYO/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1

190



CO1: To understand the specialist skills and techniques used in the men’s wear pattern making

and understanding of size chart with making of basic shirt pattern with collar, placket, pocket &

cuff.

CO2: To understand how to make a basic trouser pattern with pocket, waist band & zipper fly

and produce men’s wear garment of pattern making to given specification.

CO3: To understand the special skills and techniques used in the garment making and

construction of Men’s wear shirt, trouser & waist coat.

CO4: To understand the specialist skills and techniques used in the kid’s wear pattern making

CO5:To understand the special skills and techniques used in the kids wear garment making.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M M M

CO2 M H M M

CO3 M H M M M M M M

CO4 M M H H H

CO5 H M H H H H

Reference :

1. Aldrich, W. (2010), Metric Pattern Cutting for Men’s Wear, Oxford, Willey Blackwell

Publishers.

2. Kershaw, G. (2013). Pattern Making for Mens Wear, London, Lawrence king Publishing.

3. Kim, I. and Kim, M. (2014). Pattern Making for Mens Wear: Classic to Contemporary, New

York, Fairchild Books.

4. Coffin, D. (1998). Shirt Making: Developing Skills for Fine Sewing, Newton, Taunton Press.

5. Coffin, D. (1998). Making Trousers for Men and Women: A Multimedia Sewing Workshop,

Newton, Taunton Press.

6. Doyle, M. and Rodgers, J. (2013). Essentials of Pattern Grading, Canada, Hanover Phist.

7. Price, J. (1996). Grading Techniques for Fashion Design, New York, Fairchild Books.

8. Moore, C. L. (2008). Concepts of Pattern Grading, New York, Fairchild Books.

191

BFD406A Computer Application – III (Advance

Photoshop and illustrator)

0-0-6 [3]

Learning Objective:

To enhance Professional competence in Fashion & Textile.

Providing a deep insight into the techniques for delivering effective presentations

Understanding of core aspects of Fashion Design Digitally.

Presentation of Product display and views to market in Industry

UNIT 1 Introduction to Illustrator

Introduction to Illustrator Interface

Navigation and Viewing

Introduction to Shape

Line Segment, Selection, Scale, Rotate, Pen, Pencil, Eraser and Type

Magic Wand & symbols.

Brief about Swatch, Gradient & Align Panel

UNIT 2 Digitizing the sketching

Understanding of Design process from Paper to Pixels,

Understanding of Color Dock panel for mixing up the swatches,

Fill apparel sketches with colors and patterns.Easier, manageable,

preservable and shareable of output, Detail bubbles and callouts on

illustration.

UNIT 3 Pattern Making

Customised patterns, textures and Designs, Making combinat ion for

Different Patterns, Creat ing technical illustrations for Pattern making,

Neat stitch lines and cut specifications. Create and modify textile designs,

repeats and colorways, Models of garments can be presented in different

fabric types with each fabric’s typical material pattern.

UNIT 4 Design & Product Development

Improvisation of Design & Patterns, Digital presentations of Product

Display



CO1: Overview of Illustrator terminology

CO2: Familiarization with the Digitally Product making and Coloring

CO3: Develop skills in visual and textual analysis

CO4: Overview of design and product development processes used in industry and how Illustrator fits

into the design workflow



Course

Outcome


Outcome


http://www.mypracticalskills.com/fashion-design-videos/adobe-illustrator-easy-rendering/

192

CO1 M H M M

CO2 M H M M M M M M

CO3 M M H H H

CO4 H M H H H H

Reference :

● Reference Book of Corel Draw X7: Corel DRAW X7: The Official Guide, Author

Name of CorelDraw X7: The Official Guide: Gary David Bouton.






193

BFD407A Design Project –III (Indian Wear craft

based project)

0-0-6 [3]

Learning Objective:

The course would require the students to carry out research on the major women’s (Indian) wear

designers and their brands along with the recognition of different women’s (Indian) wear segments and

their growth rate.


● Research







● Illustration board - Fashion Illustrations according to themes.

● Accessory board




UNIT 3 Process of Fitting

● Muslin fits (toile)

● Actualizing the garment

● Costing

● Presentation









Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M M

CO2 M H M M M M M M

194

CO3 M M H H H

Reference :








195

SEMESTER – V

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits

1 BFD501A Marketing & Merchandising 3 3 3

2 BFD502A Supply Chain Management

3 3 3

3 BFD503A Professional Practice &

Management

3 3 3



B. E-Commerce

4 4 2

5 BFD506A Computer Application – IV

(Portfolio and Digital PMC)

6 6 3

6 BFD507A Design Project (Men’s Wear) 6 6 3

7 BFD508A Educational Trip 2

Total 9 16 25 19

196

BFD501A Marketing & Merchandising 3-0-0 [3]

Learning Objective:

The Marketing & Merchandising course integrates the creative and business aspects of the fashion

industry. Incorporating current technologies. These courses provide students with training in consumer

behavior, product development, merchandising, Visual merchandising, retail distribution, marketing,

and sales, covering the complete fashion global supply chain.

UNIT 1 Significance of Garment industry

● Overview of the garment industry.

● Current scenario.

● Role of garment industry in Indian economy.

UNIT 2 Fashion merchandising

● Introduction to fashion merchandising.

● Role of merchandiser.

● qualities of a merchandiser.

● Responsibility of the fashion merchandiser.

UNIT 3 Visual merchandising and its elements ● Visual merchandising and its advantages for the buyer and seller

today.

● Fashion calendar.

● The planning cycle.

● Merchandise planner.

UNIT 4 Trend analysis and forecasting ● Trend prediction.

● Sales forecasting.

● Product selection and mix, Distribution mix.

● Distribution channels, from producer to ultimate consumer.

● Fashion supply chains.

● Buying calendar & Buying strategy.

UNIT 5 Retail fashion mix

● Role and responsibility of the retail fashion buyer.

● Customer identification, Supplier, Sourcing.

● Global sourcing, Range planning and range building.



● CO1: To demonstrate the applied skills of industry specific technology knowledge and skills.

● CO2: To utilize applied management topics to manage, control, and improve industry

environments.

● CO3: To understand about the visual merchandising.

197



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M M M M

CO2 M H H M M M

CO3 M H M M M M M M

CO4 M M H H H

CO5 H M H H H H

Reference :

● Fashion Buying by Helen Gowerk Blackwell series

● Weeks A., Miller M., Perenchio M., Metcalfe D., (1991), Effective Marketing Management:

Using Merchandising and Financial Strategies for Retail Success; A global Outlook, Fairchild

Publications.

● Lynda GamansPoloian (2011) Retailing Principles: A Global Outlook, Fairchild Publications

● Tim Jackson, David Shaw, (2009) Mastering Fashion Marketing, Palgrave Macmillan

198

BFD502A Supply Chain Management

3-0-0 [3]

Learning Objective:

Supply Chain Management (SCM) principles lie at the heart of modern day business operations. This

module provides an awareness of key fundamentals. Particular focus is placed on competitive

advantage in the context of cost and value as well as the operational and economic aspects. Students are

encouraged to critically engage with theory and practice by reference to academic references and

application.

UNIT 1 Understanding the Supply Chain

● What is a Supply Chain?

● Decision Phases in a Supply Chain.

● Process View of a Supply Chain.

● The Importance of Supply Chain Flows.

● Current trends in SCM.

● Supply Chain: The Beer Game/Textile Game.

● Review and discussion on Beer Game, Bullwhip effect.

● Examples of Supply Chains.

UNIT 2 SCM Concepts

● Supply Chain Concepts: flow of materials.

● Supply Chain Concepts: Wastes in the pipeline.

● Supply Chain Concepts: flow of information.

● Supply Chain Drivers.

Supply chain efficiency

● Role of Intermediaries in Supply Chain.

● Measuring Supply Chain Efficiency.

● Value Stream mapping in Supply Chain.

Inventory

● Planning & Managing Inventories in a Supply Chain: Cycle

Inventory.

● Planning & Managing Inventories in a Supply Chain: Safety

Inventory.

UNIT 3 Quick Response, VMI, Postponement

● Benchmarking the supply chain.

● Just in Time & QR Logistics.

● Vendor managed Inventory.

● Postponement in Supply Chain.

UNIT 4 Distribution & Procurement

Introduction to Apparel / Textile Supply Chain.

Distribution & Procurement Channels in Supply Chain.

UNIT 5 Collaborative Product Development

● Partnership as strategies options.

199

● Collaboration in Apparel Supply Chain.

● Collaborative Product Development.

● ECR, CPFR, VICS.

UNIT 6 Time based competition

● Strategic Lead Time Management time based competition the

concept of lead time & value engineering lead time gap.

● Time compression in supply chain.

● Critical Path Management in Supply Chain.

UNIT 7 Role of IT in SCM

● The role of IT in Supply Chain.

● Supply chain IT framework and IT practice.

● IT enabled Supply Chain Management (demonstration of a

SCM software solution).



● CO1: To Understand about the Supply Chain

● CO2: To manage responsibly and sustainably and behave ethically in relation to social, cultural,

economic and environmental issues

● CO3: To understand about supply chain management Concepts,efficiency and Inventory

● CO4: To approach for segmentation, targeting, positioning, and generating sales and the need

for innovation in product and service design.

● CO5: To analyze and evaluate a range of business data, sources of information and appropriate

methodologies, which includes the need for strong digital literacy, and to use that research for

evidence-based decision-making

● CO6: To understand about time based competition in supply chain management.

● CO7: To understand about role of IT in SCM



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M M M M M

CO2 M M M

CO3 M H M M

CO4 M H M M M M M M

CO5 M M H H H

CO6 H M H H H H

CO7 H M M H

200

Reference :

● W.J. Hopp and M.L. Spearman. Factory Physics: Foundations of Manufacturing Management.

Irwin, McGraw-Hill, 1996.

● David Simchi Levi, Philip kaminsky, and Edith Simchi Levi. Designing and Managing the

Supply Chain: Concepts, Strategies, and Case Studies. Irwin McGrawHill, 2000.

● R.B. Handfield and E.L. Nochols, Jr. Introduction to Supply Chain Management. Prentice Hall,

1999.

● Jeremy F. Shapiro. Modeling the Supply Chain. Duxbury Thomson Learning, 2001.

● Sunil Chopra and Peter Meindel. Supply Chain Management: Strategy, Planning, and

Operation, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.

● N. Viswanadham and Y. Narahari. Performance Modeling of Automated Manufacturing

Systems. Prentice Hall of India, 1998.

● N. Viswanadham. Analysis of Manufacturing Enterprises. Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2000.

● Ram Ganeshan and Terry P. Harrison. An Introduction to Supply Chain Management

● Y. Narahari and S. Biswas. Supply Chain Management: Models and Decision Making

● D. Connors, D. An, S. Buckley, G. Feigin, R. Jayaraman, A. Levas, N. Nayak, R. Petrakian, R.

Srinivasan. Dynamic modelling for business process reengineering. IBM Research Report

19944, 1995

● Anthony Chavez, Daniel Dreilinger, Robert Guttman, Pattie Maes, A Real-Life Experiment in

Creating an Agent Marketplace.

http://lcm.csa.iisc.ernet.in/scm/supply_chain_intro.html

http://lcm.csa.iisc.ernet.in/scm/coimbatore/index.html

http://lcm.csa.iisc.ernet.in/scm/ibm_dynamic.ps

http://lcm.csa.iisc.ernet.in/scm/paam97.pdf

http://lcm.csa.iisc.ernet.in/scm/paam97.pdf

201

BFD503A Professional Practice & Management 3-0-0 [3]

Learning Objective:

The objective of this unit is to extend learners’ knowledge of professional practices within their

specialist area and to relate these to personal goals and career opportunities.

UNIT 1 Quality and its Attributes ● Quality standards and compliances

● Quality certification and hallmarking

UNIT 2 IPR

● Introduction to Intellectual property rights (IPR) issues & Royalty.

● Overview & Importance; IPR in India and IPR abroad.

● Patents; their definition; granting; infringement; searching& filing.

● Copyrights; their definition; granting; infringement, searching &

filing, distinction between related and copy rights.

UNIT 3 ● Goal setting, Career direction, Responsibilities.

● Family business approach / advantages and concerns.

UNIT 4 Skills and development ● Presentation skills, Personal development

Promotional opportunities.



● CO1: To understand about the Quality and its Attributes

● CO2:To be able to place themselves and their work in the context of their selected discipline.

● CO3:To understand their specialist area and the career opportunities available.

● CO4:To understand how to promote themselves and their work professionally.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M M

CO2 M H M M M M M M

CO3 M M H H H

CO4 H M H H H H

202

Reference :

● P.N. Cheremisinoff, R.P. Ouellette and R.M.Bartholomew, Biotechnology Applications and

Research, Technomic Publishing Co., Inc. USA, 1985

● D.Balasubramaniam, C.F.A.Bryce,K. Dharmalingam, J. Green and K. Jayaraman, Concepts in

Biotechnology, University Press (Orient Longman Ltd.), 2002

● Bourgagaize, Jewell and Buiser, Biotechnology: Demystifying the Concepts, Wesley Longman,

USA, 2000.

● AjitParulekar and Sarita d’ Souza, Indian Patents Law – Legal & Business Implications;

Macmillan India ltd, 2006

● B.L.Wadehra; Law Relating to Patents, Trade Marks, Copyright, Designs & Geographical

Indications; Universal law Publishing Pvt. Ltd., India 2000

● P. Narayanan; Law of Copyright and Industrial Designs; Eastern law House, Delhi, 2010

● Enhancing Professional Practice Author Charlotte Danielson.

203

BFD504A



0-0-4 [2]

Learning Objective:

This course would require the students to develop merchandising plan for the women’s apparel. The

basics of visual merchandising, display windows, planning etc., would be covered in this course.

UNIT 1 Merchandising concepts and theories.

UNIT 2 Tools and techniques for merchandise display, windows.

UNIT 3 Creative thinking for merchandise display.

UNIT 4 Store layout, display

UNIT 5 Fashion retailing.



CO1:Apply basic design principles and colour theories to the construction of promotional

displays and advertising.

CO2:Present and coordinate merchandise so that related goods are shown in a unique, desirable,

and saleable manner.

CO3:Prepare and execute displays for exhibitions and promotional events using the visual

dynamics of light as a design element.

CO4:Understand the basic functions of retail store operations including store location and

layout, shopping centre analysis, retail market segmentation and strategies, and the

merchandising mix.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M M

CO2 M H M M M M M M

CO3 M M H H H

CO4 H M H H H H

Reference :

1. Laine Stone, Jean samples, (1985) Fashion merchandising- An Introduction McGraw Hill Book

Co. 1985.

2. Taarnow, Guerreiro&Judelio, (1995) Inside the fashion Business

3. Swapna Pradhan, (2007) Retailing Management, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.

204

4. A.J. Lamba, (2003) The Art of Retailing The Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd.

5. Martin M. Pegler (2011) Visual merchandising and Display, Fairchild Publications.

BFD504B


E- Commerce

0-0-4 [2]

Learning Objective:

The aim of this unit is to develop understanding of the dynamics of online business and online buying

behavior to create a consumer-oriented online business strategy along with holistic knowledge on

product development for E-Commerce platform.

UNIT 1 Online Industry Appreciation and Business World, Fundamentals of

Management, Creative Managerial Leadership, Market Dynamics, Fashion

& Lifestyle Products, Fundamentals of Ecommerce.

UNIT 2 Digital Marketing, Merchandising, Sourcing and Vendor management,

Project Management, Long Industry Attachment, Specialiation1a

Customer Relations Management, Specialiation1b Advanced Data

Analytics, Specialiation2a Visual Communication, Specialiation2b.

UNIT 3 User Experience Design & Business Plan



CO1: Student will be able to understand global online business sensibilities.

CO2: The student will be able to understand Global Online Business Industry.

CO3: The student will be able to understand with the knowledge and skills required to manage

the online venture for a long period of sustainable profits, but will also challenge them to

achieve career goals by fueling their passion.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H M M

CO2 M H M M M M M M

CO3 M M H H H

Reference :

Enterprise Resource Planning System Author Daniel E. O’leary.

Enterprise Resource Planning Author Ravi Shankar & S. Jaiswal.

205

E-Commerce Get it Right! Author Ian Daniel.

BFD506A Computer Application – IV (Portfolio

and Digital PMC

0-0-6 [3]

Learning Objective:

The objective of this module is to learn advanced computer graphic competency and learn, how to

Create Portfolio with help of Computer software.

UNIT 1 Concept of Page margin

● Concept of Page Margin.

● Concept of Page Layout.

● Setting of Document.

UNIT 2 Editing & Formatting

● Formatting of Document.

● Digital Portfolio Development

● Format of Portfolio.

UNIT 3 Projection of different board

● Complete project with story board and Inspiration.

● Mood Board

● Color Board

● Client Profile.

● Concept of Choosing Paper.

● Concept of Resolution.



CO1: To develop Pages with exact margin and Formatting.

CO2:To understand setting of document, choosing paper and concept of resolution.

CO3:To complete projects with story board, Inspiration, Mood Board, Color Board, Client Board and

Client profile



206

Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M M

CO2 M H M M M M M M

CO3 M M H H H

Reference :

● Reference Book of Corel Draw X7: Corel DRAW X7: The Official Guide, Author Name of

CorelDRAW X7: The Official Guide: Gary David Bouton.




BFD507A Design Project IV (Men’s Wear) 0-0-6 [3]

Learning Objective:

The course would require the students to carry out research on the major men’s wear designers and

their brands along with the recognition of different men’s wear segments and their growth rate.

UNIT 1 Design Development Process ● Research







● Accessory board




UNIT 3 Process of Fitting ● Muslin fits (toile)

● Actualizing the garment

● Costing

● Presentation

207









Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M

CO2 M H M M M M M M

CO3 M M H H H

Reference :








208

BFD508A Educational Trip 0-0-2 [1]

Objective:

To expose students to Historical, Vernacular and Contemporary architecture with their style and

costume.

Outline:

Vacation Assignment/ Study tour is to be undertaken after the end of V semester

exam and before the commencement of VI semester classes. This assignment could be a

measured drawing and documentation of a noted building or a study tour for visiting places of

architectural interest. The choice of the building to be documented and the places to be visited is

left to the concerned department. The assignment may be given as group work (4 to6 students

per group). The students have to submit a report on the measured drawing or thestudy tour

within 15 days from the beginning of the VI Semester. The reports are to be assessed by the

departments for progressive marks.

209

SEMESTER – VI

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits

1 BFD601A OFFICE TRAINING

(INTERNSHIP)

18

2 BFD602A Portfolio Submission 6

Total 24

210

BFD601A OFFICE TRAINING (INTERNSHIP) 0-0-18 [0]

Learning Objective:

This course will prepare students to enter into full-time employment in their area of specialization

upon graduation. It will provide students with the opportunity to test their career aptitude and aid them

adjusting from college to full-time employment. It will present students with the opportunity to

develop attitudes conducive to effective interpersonal relationships, increase their sense of

responsibility, and help them acquire good work habits. It will offer the opportunity for students to

understand informal organizational interrelationships and provide in-depth knowledge of the formal

functional activities of a participating organization.

UNIT 1 First hand exposure to an apparel organization, designer or Export House

and their working structures and systems.

UNIT 2 Specific project on the job to sharpen skills required for chosen area of

specialism.

Further development of generic/cognitive skills.

UNIT 3 Identification of industry for internship with student’s career path in mind.

UNIT 4 Internship log book: is a tool to help you record your daily activities along

with a reflection on the same. Reflective writing enables the

documentation experiences, thoughts questions, ideas and conclusions that

signpost the learning journey.

UNIT 5 Internship report: will focus on study of the organizational structure &

development objective of the internship. Personal design philosophy &

career path linked to learning in the internship. Learning process and its

analysis as internship progresses through detailed processes and projects

undertaken. Report should be a reflection of the internship experience of

the personal & professional development.



● CO1: To identify business strategies for buying and selecting product.

● CO2: To identify process and procedures for company purchases.

● CO3: To explore the buying process, Increase skills in buying and merchandising.

● CO4: To understand that how they write a report of their industry experience.

● CO5: To develop written communication skills

211



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M M

CO2 M H M M M M M M

CO3 M M H H H

CO4 H M H H H H

CO5 M H M H M

212

BFD602A Portfolio Submission 0-0-6[3]

Learning Objective:

The ability of a designer to exhibit and use design elements is highlighted which is further on translated

into garments. A portfolio is an exhibit of the overall knowledge of the student work which he/she has

gained through the course of three years. The purpose lies in promoting the skills of students in a single

format.

This course is devoted at developing a design portfolio for men’s wear/women’s wear/ Kids’s wear. The

design portfolio is an expression of a fashion designer involving his creativity, design ability, illustration

and presentation skills.

Course Content:

Research and theme based contextual project, design development, tech pack, flat sketch etc. complied into

a professional portfolio.

UNIT 1 Outline of portfolio ● Describe and speak articulately and critically about their work and

the field of visual communications.


● Mood board

● Color board & trims

● Client board

● Style direction

● Illustration 6 croqui

● Specifications

● Cost sheet

UNIT 2 Presentation

● Produce work that demonstrates creative thinking in order to

express a personal vision/point of view that communicates a

personal voice.

● A-3 format.

● Landscape.

● Digital power point.

UNIT 3 Analysis and realization of concept

Create art that incorporates the fundamental elements and

principles of design and select materials that express issues

such as content and subject matter. Apply and use analog and

digital processes in the creation of their work.

Decision making in choosing the concept.

UNIT 4 Style direction

UNIT 5 Specification

● Technical specification of garment construction and pattern.

making has to be exhibited by the student in order to prove the

viability of design.

213

UNIT 6 Cost specification sheet

A basic costing of the garment of the collection has to be done in

order to know the factory price of the garment.

UNIT 7 Design development

Development of the design through the elements which the student

has visualized through the concept.

The student will be evaluated on the precision of the format

completion.



● CO1: To focus on personal development through the use of self-evaluation and reflection

● CO2: To reflect on artifacts as well as how they match goals and standards.

● CO3: To communicate with stakeholders (students, faculty, administrators, and employers).

● CO4: To increase learning effectiveness and identify students’ strengths and weaknesses.

● CO5: To review, assess, and improve the effectiveness of curricular programs.

● CO6: To provide useful administrative data that will expedite decision making.

● CO7: To model professionalism, and enhances information technology skills to allow for

academic credits for learning beyond the classroom



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M M

CO2 M H M H

CO3 M M

CO4 M H M M

CO5 M H M M M M M M

CO6 M M H H H

CO7 H M H H H H

References:


http://www.style.com

http://www.littlefashiongallery.com/eu/


Bruke, S. (2006). Fashion Artist: Drawing Techniques to Portfolio Presentation, U.K., Burke

Publishing.

Riegelman, N. (2006). 9 Heads: A Guide to Drawing Fashion, London, Thames and Hudson.

Riegelman, N. (2006). Colors for Modern Fashion: Drawing Fashion with Colored Markers,

London, Thames and Hudson.



http://www.littlefashiongallery.com/eu/

214

SEMESTER – VII

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits

1 BFD701A Research Project & Dissertation 6 6 3

2 BFD702A Brand Design Management 3 3 3

3 BFD703A Project Management &

Entrepreneurship

3 3 3

4 BFD704A Production Method and Quality

Control

3 3 3

5 BFD705A Fashion Retail and Export 3 3 3

6 BFD706A Fashion Styling 2 2 1

7 BFD707A Final Project I 12 12 6

Total 12 20 32 22

215

BFD701A Research Project & Dissertation 0-0-6 [3]

Learning Objective:

The main objective of this module is to compose a fashion research around a craft cluster or industry,

including fashion collection designs, analysis & interpretation, materials& techniques consideration and

presentation. This module will cover visual studies, trends, culture, aesthetic, intellectual property

rights, technical translation and transformation, sample developments and technological support and

reference.

In addition to dissertation the student will be creating a fashion portfolio composing of visual

presentation and written materials in professional standard, design strategies, brand image and personal

styles and understands the overall research process. The purpose of research is information generation.

The study should seek to contextualize its findings within the larger body of research. The results of the

study should have implications for policy and project implementation.

UNIT 1 Harvard referencing and Literature review.

How to Research? Different approaches to research: Survey,

ActionResearch, Experiments etc.

Introduction to Research methodology.

Collection of Data: Primary and Secondary.

Analyzing and synthesizing the collected information.

Visual referencing and documenting.

Documentation and presentation skills in soft and hard cop

UNIT 2 Development of Project brief.

Development of PDP.

Experience and contribution as a design professional in an apparel

organization / craft industry / research area.

Project development in chosen area of specialism will include:

research and surveys, design development, client, material, trend

research and exploration, fashion presentation, design sampling,

and commercial applications.

Further development of generic / cognitive skills



CO1: To explore the fields of research design, research proposal development and the conduct

of research projects as applied to their dissertation topic and critically evaluate the fashion

design work of others and provide constructive criticism for ongoing work.

CO2: To deconstruct and reconstruct alternative collection developments from existing work

and consider the target audience (instructor, peers, and employers).

Sensitize with the craft cluster communities and provide solutions to the issues in the current

fashion industry.

216



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M M

CO2 M H M M M M M M

Reference:

Blaxter, L. et al. (2006). How to Research, U.K., McGraw-Hill International.

Kothari, C.R. (1985). Research Methodology - Methods & Techniques, New Delhi, New Age

International.

Kothari, S.R. (2012). Research Methodology Methods and Techniques, New Delhi, New Age

International.

Kumar, R. (2010). Research Methodology: A Step by Step Guide for Beginners, New Delhi,

Sage Publications.

Locke, L.F. (2009). Reading and Understanding Research, New Delhi, Sage Publications.

Creswell J. W. (2013). Research Design: Qualitative, Quantitative and Mixed Method

Approaches, New Delhi, Sage Publications.

Trochim, W. (2006). The Research Methods Knowledge Base, Ohio, The Atomic Dog

Publishers

Bhandari, V. (2005). Costume, Textile and Jewellery of India: Traditions of Rajasthan,

California, Mercury Books.

Singh, M., et al. (1995). Saris of India: Bihar and West Bengal, New Delhi, Wiley Eastern.

Gillow, J. and Barnard, N. (1991). Traditional Indian Textiles, London, Thames and Hudson.

Desai, C. (1988). Ikat Textiles of India, California, Chronicle Books.

Bhatnagar, P. (2008). Decorative Design History in Indian Textiles and Costumes, New Delhi,

Abhishek Publications.

Askari, N. and Crill, R. (1997). Colors of the Indus: Costume and Textiles of Pakistan, London,

Merrell Publishers.

Ghosh, G.K. (2011). Indian Textiles: Past and Present, New Delhi, Abhishek Publications.

Ellena, B. (2010). Indian Sutra: On the Magic Trail of Textiles, Gurgaon, Shubhi Publications.

Bhatnagar, P. (2005). Decorative Design History in Indian Textiles and Costume, New Delhi,

Abhishek Publications.

Mathur, A. (2006). Woven Wonder: the Tradition of Indian Textiles,NewDelhi,B.P.I. India.

Naik, S.D. (2010). Traditional Embroideries of India, New Delhi, Ashish Publishing House,

New Delhi.

217

BFD702A Brand Design Management 3-0-0 [3]

Learning Objective:

Towards the completion of this unit a student would think about the brand philosophy and development

with above parameters. The student will be able to develop own brand.

Student thinks about a very important variable of design called design philosophy which is unique and

is thinking how to transform one’s design philosophy into fashion and lifestyle products. Therefore,

this part of the project holds maximum importance in this assignment.

UNIT 1 Description of brand philosophy

Development of logo using colors and shapes.

Brand competitor studies and market research.

Consumer profiling and market segmentation.

UNIT 2 Research about the various brands globally for your inspiration. Do a

complete study of different brands and your own strengths and weakness

and assessment of various Apparel Brand having similar Categories and

Costs for Men or Women. create your brand name, brand story, image,

identity, logo and give the Promotional Policies for the same.



CO1: To make students understand of brand philosophy and market segmentation.

CO2: Understanding your strengths and weakness and create your brand, brand identity, image and

logo



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M M H H M M

CO2 M M H M M H

Reference Rethinking Place Branding, Comprehensive brand development for cities and

regions, Author Mihalis Kavaratzis – Gary Warnaby & Gregory J. Ashworth. Make a name for yourself Author Robin Fisher Roffer.

218

BFD703A PROJECT MANAGEMENT & ENTERPRENEURSHIP 3-0-0 [3]

AIM

The course will offer a broad perspective of Design thinking, LMC, idealization, data analytic, creating

MVP, various digital tools for marketing, financial and pitch deck for the business.

OBJECTIVE

To enable the student to incorporate in the structuring and development of the project the

concepts of project management, planning tools and controls.

Economic feasibility of projects.

Develop the project as a broad business process, covering the entire project life cycle.

Conceptual phases, planning and organization, implementation and closure.



Project Life Cycle




UNIT 2 Conceptual phases, planning and organization

Scope planning. Analytical structure of activities

Structuring people in projects

Costs and budget

UNIT 3

Implementation

Project execution, monitoring and control

Reviews and ratings

UNIT 4 Product packaging ● Introduction

● Packaging Media

● Quality Assessment & Performance Evaluation:

● Package Printing:

● Package Graphics:

● Package Storage and Handling:

● Packaging & Environment:

UNIT 5 Introduction to Entrepreneurship and Business Essentials

Who is an Entrepreneurs and Types of Businesses.

The Lean Approach

219

esigning Thinking

Lean Model Canvas / Business Model Canvas

UNIT 6

Forecasting Demands and Acquiring Customers

Identifying the Target Audience / Customer

Conducting Surveys

Building an MVP based on the Survey

Analyzing Competition

UNIT 7 Brand Building and Establishing Brand Presence

Digital Marketing and Social Media Marketing

Basics of PR and Importance of Digital Presence

Building a Website – Tools and Techniques

UNIT 8 Understanding Finance and Planning for Investment

Creating a Revenue Model

Developing Sales Projects, Unit Economics, Investment Deck

COURSE OUTCOME (CO)

At the end of this course students will:

CO1: Approach the ideas through design thinking and create its LMC

CO2: Identify the demand and its customers

CO3: Analyze the data and obtain info like target market, market size, competition

C04: Management of the product development process;

CO5: Strategic product planning and Project planning and Detailed project

CO6: Preparation of the production of the product and Product distribution and Evaluation of the

product and process

CO7: To understand the brand Building and Establishing Brand Presence.

Co8: To understanding the Finance and Planning for Investment.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M H M L

CO2 H H L M M

CO3 L H H H M L M

CO4 M M H H H

C05 M H H M

CO6 H H M L M

CO7

CO8 H M H M


TEXT BOOKS

220

The Lean startup by Eric Ries, Entrepreneurial Management by Robert J. Calvin

A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge: PMBOK® Guide (Sixth Edition)

The Automatic Startup by David S. Rose Publication Date: 2016

A Dozen Lessons for Entrepreneurs by Tren Griffin Publication Date: 2017

BFD704A Production Method and Quality Control 3-0-0 [3]

AIM

To develop knowledge of various production methods and evaluate various garment manufacturing

systems and equipment in the industry.

Learning Objective:

For efficient, effective and economical operation in a manufacturing unit of an organization, it is

essential to integrate the production planning and control system.

Production planning and control address a fundamental problem of low productivity, inventory

management and resource utilization.

Production planning is required for scheduling, dispatch, inspection, quality management,

inventory management, supply management and equipment management.

Production control ensures that production team can achieve required production target,

optimum utilization of resources, quality management and cost savings.

UNIT 1 Basic methods study – introduction, method study part in your job,

sequence of improvement, principles of motion economy, how to

record methods.

UNIT 2 Basic work measurements – work measurements, elements, timing,

timing errors, rating, allowances, standard time calculation, PMTS.

UNIT 3 Balancing – basics, theoretical balance, skills inventory, initial

balance, balance control.

UNIT 4 Production systems, planning and control

http://ezproxy.emich.edu/login?url=https://emich.summon.serialssolutions.com/#!/search?bookMark=ePnHCXMw42LgTQStzc4rAe_hAm1sNgQdImYGbBkAi0o4B1SrcBmBzjczNAaWkBzwcRFgFWhuYcjJIAoMJwVgC6mopLRAAeiB5OycTFA5yZIH7JtxM-i5uYY4e-gW5yeCD8k1MEzNLY2HDnnEg1sRBibmwM466MAVU9Ahn-pQDdmZOTnFwCIuHtSKLTYyqTCPT8pOgpzhCCybgSo1ISoTi7OB5QywDCopji_LAc9dFseDj

https://emich.summon.serialssolutions.com/#!/search?bookMark=ePnHCXMw42LgTQStzc4rAe_hSmEAn-ZjbmxopA8ahgB2KEArMcEH3wCbFqD629KYGY3PxsBlCDoHBphTzQw5oKkDND9kYWZuzMkg7-If5eqn4AN0ob9fsAKwt6Tg6hcS5Ap0s59raFAwDwNLHrD_xs2g5-Ya4uyhW5yfCD5I18AwNbc0HjosEg9qaZgCm0egRZTAYtwUdBCoOkQDrFCOB09YQldJxrs6OZsaAcsOI9Alu

221



CO1: Evaluate the principles of quality management and production method to explain how these

principles can be applied within quality management systems.

CO2: Identify the key aspects of the quality and production improvement cycle and to select and use

appropriate tools and techniques for controlling, improving and measuring quality.

CO3: Critically appraise the organizational, communication and teamwork requirements for effective

quality and production management.

CO4: Critically analyze the strategic issues in quality and production management, including current

issues and developments, and to devise and evaluate quality implementation plans.

222



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M M

CO2 M H M M M M M M

CO3 M M H H H

CO4 H M H H H H


Reference :

1. Gioello, D., et al. (1979). Fashion Production Terms, New York,Fairchild Books.

2. Waddell, G. (2004). How Fashion Works: Couture, Ready to wear and Mass Production, New

York, John Wiley & Sons.

3. Liu, C. (2010). Garment Merchandising, Hong Kong, Monsoon Hong Kong Ltd.

4. Rosenau, J. A. and Wilson, D. L. (2014). Apparel Merchandising: The Line Starts Here, New York,

Fairchild Books.

5. Myers- Mc Devitt P.J. (2010) Apparel Production Management and the Technical Package, New

York, Fairchild Books.

6. Kunz, G.I. (2004). Apparel Manufacturing: Sewn Product Analysis, New Jersey, Prentice Hall.

Kadolph, S. J. (2007). Quality Assurance for Textiles and Apparel, New York, Fairchild Books

223

BFD705A FASHION RETAIL AND EXPORT 3-0-0 [3]

AIM

After studying this subject, the students will understand marketing in domestic and international

markets and their quota systems. It focuses attention on apparel industry giving thorough knowledge of

merchandising.

OBJECTIVE

To enhance the marketing and selling skills.

To provide in-depth working knowledge of retail and export in Fashion industry.

Techniques to maintain better customer relations.

New development areas of retail stores and exports companies.

Be able to respond to professional design requirements and to develop skills in planning and


To train professionally with a view to enhance retail and export growth.

UNIT 1 Basic Concept of retailing – definition need and functions

UNIT 2 Introduction to various terms

Cost price, selling price, mark-ups, markdowns, distribution channel, wholesale, agent,

broker, vendor, distributor

UNIT 3

Introduction to retail organizations

Departmental store

Discount stores

Specialty stores

Direct Retailing

E- Retailing

UNIT 4 Concept of buying houses – definition, importance and types

Retail Mix

Concept of visual merchandising – definition, types of window display with examples

UNIT 5 Fashionmerchandising and export– definition, role of merchandiser, buyer –

merchandiser interface, time and action sheet

Consumer Buying Behaviour – definition, consumer black box, decision making

process.

COURSE OUTCOME (CO)

At the end of this course students will:

CO1: Understand the role of merchandiser in export environment.

CO2: Understand the factors & principles relevant to Fashion product eg concept, ergonomics, form,

function, aesthetics, trends, end user, lifespan, materials, manufacturing methods, costing, level of

finish, testing, sustainability.

CO3: Be able to respond to professional design requirements and to develop skills in planning and


CO4: Understand the connections between Export and Retail market.

CO5: Understand the consumer buying behavior.

224



Course

Outcome

Program Outcome Program

Specific

Outcome


CO1 M H M H M M

CO2 M H H H M

CO3 M H H H M L

CO4 M M H H

CO5 H M M H M



Export Import ManagementPaperback– 28 Oct 2013 by Justin Paul(Author), Rajiv

Aserkar(Author)

50th annual report 2015-2016 the Apparel export promotion council

49th annual report 2014-2015 the Apparel export promotion council

https://www.amazon.in/Justin-Paul/e/B003X0GM7O/ref=dp_byline_cont_book_1



225

BFD706A Fashion Styling 0-0-2 [1]

Learning Objective:

The course will teach students to become fashion stylist who selects each item appropriately so that

they complement and harmonize with all the other components successfully. It is for this reason that

fashion stylists have been called “Designers of Style”, setting the trends that everyone else follows.

UNIT 1 Styling Elements

understand the different roles of today's stylist working in various

fields including

styling designer collections, styling for magazines, styling for the

individual

use fashion forecasting to ensure the relevance of the styled

product

competently brief relevant people including the photographer, hair

stylist and make-up artist on the required look both verbally and

visually

communicate effectively using a professional styling, hairstyling

and make-up

vocabulary

compile relevant research on a range of period styles in history

with an emphasis on the decades of the 20th and 21st centuries

looking at clothing, hair and make-up

understand the influence of trends and subcultures

select all required items to put a look together including garments

and accessories.

compile relevant information on the items photographed/shown so

that correct details and credits can be supplied

explain the products and equipment used by professionals to style

hair and apply make-up

describe a selection of hair styling techniques and make-up

techniques commonly used by hair stylists and make-up artists.

Analyze the current trends in hair styling and make-up for

advertising, publicity, show and session work

understand the different requirements of make- up for photo

shoots, catwalk shows. Select make-up including highlighting,

shading and contouring techniques

Describe preparation of the model including selection of bases and

corrective make-up

Demonstrate ideas for a range of catwalk hair and make-up looks

226

and promotional photo shoot hair and make-up looks

UNIT 2 Photography and the Photo Shoot

Outline the history of fashion photography and its role in

promoting fashion in the 20th and 21st centuries.

Understand the different types of lighting, both natural and

artificial

plan the photo shoot to fit the client’s budget and deadline

Direct the professional team producing the photo shoot

Work on set/on location as part of a professional team

UNIT 3 Fashion PR and Fashion Journalism

Report fashion shows.

Study and analyse the writing of contemporary fashion journalist

Develop a fashion vocabulary suited to fashion journalism

Write a fashion article for the print media

Conduct an interview and write a profile



CO1: Be able to understand about the Styling Elements.

CO2: Be able to understand how to handle Photography and the Photo Shoot

CO3: Be able to understand about the Fashion PR and Fashion Journalism



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M M

CO2 M H M M M M M M

CO3 M M H H H

Reference :


www.style.com

www.wgsn.com




227

www.promostyl.com

www.trendz.com

www.wwd.com

BFD707A Final Project- I 0-0-12 [6]

Learning Objective:

The objective of this module is to further extend learner’s knowledge creating the final collection

putting all the knowledge and efforts students have gained so far and launch themselves as designers

creating their own brand identity, and brand image.

UNIT 1 Research about the various brands globally for your inspiration. Do

a complete study of different brands and their collection

Concepts inspired with a complete understanding of design process

and finally Select one concept. Only extensive research enables

designers to stay fresh and keep up to date with developments.

UNIT 2 Judgments and develop your own style with experimentation in

personal creative practice through explorations in design and

surfaces.

The design process along with difference between different

categories like avant-garde and prêt wear.

UNIT 3 Sketches, fabrics, trims and other detailing.

Technical part of the sketches and final test fits.

Produce the final collection completely accessorized.

Publicize work in the best visual way through styling and photo

shoot.



CO1: Be able to present research analysis to client groupsand extend and apply skills in

developing creative visual language.

CO2: Identify the major types of idea sources in clothing design and provide information about

each source. Recognize that these sources of inspiration help designers to create design elements

and principles of individual designs. In order to foster originality, sources of inspiration play a



http://www.wwd.com/

228

powerful role throughout the creative stage of design process, and also in the early stages of

fashion research and strategic collection planning.

CO3: To synthesize and critically evaluate experimentation in personal creative practice and

present a complete collection with photo shoots.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M M

CO2 M H M M M M M M

CO3 M M H H H

Reference :

Look at work of designers from around the globe ex – Jum Nakao, Issey Miyake and other

Look at the different costumes and art/ culture of countries and get inspired by them

Look around nature and other sources like discovery, national geography, BBC etc to get

inspired, which is the original source of inspiration for everything.


www.style.com

www.wgsn.com

www.promostyl.com

www.trendz.com

www.wwd.com






http://www.wwd.com/

229

SEMESTER – VIII

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits

1 BFD801A Final Project II 18 18 9

2 BFD802A Portfolio 12 12 6

Total 30 30 15

230

BFD801A Final Project- II 0-0-18 [9]

Learning Objective:

This project is the continues part of the final project-I.

The objective of this module is to further extend learner’s knowledge creating the final collection

putting all the knowledge and efforts students have gained so far and launch themselves as designers

creating their own brand identity, and brand image.

UNIT 1 Research about the various brands globally for your inspiration. Do

a complete study of different brands and their collection

Concepts inspired with a complete understanding of design process

and finally Select one concept. Only extensive research enables

designers to stay fresh and keep up to date with developments.

UNIT 2 Judgments and develop your own style with experimentation in

personal creative practice through explorations in design and

surfaces.

The design process along with difference between different

categories like avant-garde and prêt wear.

UNIT 3 Sketches, fabrics, trims and other detailing.

Technical part of the sketches and final test fits.

Produce the final collection completely accessorized.

Publicize work in the best visual way through styling and photo

shoot.



CO1: Be able to present research analysis to client groupsand extend and apply skills in

developing creative visual language.

CO2: Identify the major types of idea sources in clothing design and provide information about

each source. Recognize that these sources of inspiration help designers to create design elements

and principles of individual designs. In order to foster originality, sources of inspiration play a

powerful role throughout the creative stage of design process, and also in the early stages of

fashion research and strategic collection planning.

CO3: To synthesize and critically evaluate experimentation in personal creative practice and

present a complete collection with photo shoots.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H M M

231

CO2 M H M M M M M M

CO3 M M H H H

Reference:

Look at work of designers from around the globe ex – Jum Nakao, Issey Miyake and other

Look at the different costumes and art/ culture of countries and get inspired by them

Look around nature and other sources like discovery, national geography, BBC etc to get

inspired, which is the original source of inspiration for everything.


www.style.com

www.wgsn.com

www.promostyl.com

www.trendz.com

www.wwd.com






http://www.wwd.com/

232

BFD802A Portfolio 0-0-12 [6]

AIM:

Design portfolio is the expression of student to translate themes into design collections. Here one gets

inspired by different themes which could be art movements, sport, historic eras, music, dance,culture,

nature, traditions etc. and picks out tangible and intangible elements which are to be used as design

elements in the collection. The ability of a designer to exhibit and use design elements is highlighted

which is further on translated into garments. A portfolio is an exhibit of the overall knowledge of the

student work which he/she has gained through the course of four years. The purpose lies in promoting

the skills of students in a single format.

OBJECTIVE

Students will present a portfolio of all the files/ folders/ projects created during the course of study in I

to III year. The portfolio should include projects, industrial visit reports, any other projects made during

the academic session. The external examiner will evaluate the portfolio and take a viva of the student.

238



credit

Required

21 19 19 22 24 24 20 18 167 167




Options can be availed in Specialization, Interdisciplinary and General Subjects.

Choice Based Credit Summery Report of B.Des.Interior Design S.No. Category of Courses Credits(L,T,P) Total Credits


2 Core Courses (35,0,101) 136



5 Total (55,0,112) 167

239

INTRODUCTION

Interior Design addresses the importance of human habitat and the built environment that supports

human activities and values. It generates order to the space occupied by people, by making one aware

of how the space influences our identity, productivity and wellness. As an interior designer one has

the vital task to create intentional spatial interactions that can have a positive effect on human beings

in whichever space they may inhabit – working, living or recreational.

The Interior Design program is built to initiate a thoughtful and reactive design process. It facilitates

the students to understand and create human habitation spaces through varied understandings

of theory, studio, practical skills, live projects, case studies, field trips and encounters with industries

and professionals. It also aims at inculcating an environmental awareness within the student

for the benefit of human health, well being and productivity.

The students are trained in representative skills through regular studios and a team of

specialized Design Faculty that focus on freehand drawing, technical drawing and model making.

These skills are further supplemented through elective subjects such as Interior Lighting,

Interior Landscape, Sustainable Interior, Set Design, Interior Project Management, Furniture Design

and Product Design. The program aims at promoting a holistic approach to the designing

process by simultaneously involving inputs from theory, allied subjects and electives into design.

The program pushes the student to become an independent and effective learner and opens

up a range of prospects on completion of the course. The industry offers opportunities to young

designers in large set ups of architecture, interior design, kitchen design and exhibition design

practices. Graduates are equipped to begin their own practice or further their education by applying to

study in post-graduate programs ranging from furniture, exhibition, product and interaction design to

craft & technology, history- theory- criticism and Energy efficiency & green design.

VISSION STATEMENT



designers and new entrants who aspire to become professional advertising field and designers.

To become a renowned centre of higher learning, work towards academic, professional, cultural and

social enrichment of the individuals and communities.

MISSION STATEMENT

The mission of the Faculty of Design is to build a successful career of its students. The school provides

a prolific and dynamic program designed to meet individual needs of students with diverse aspirations,

learning capacities, Scopic regimes, artistic sensibilities and innovations.

PROGRAME MISSION STATEMENT (INTERIOR DESIGN)

240

The Program aims to encourage, foster and expose the students to a more diverse art and design

practice through new research and developments within academic and professional parameters. From

multidisciplinary approaches to self-directed studies, students initiate and integrate assimilated

knowledge from a diverse range of subjects to arrive at innovative and challenging solutions to

previously explored and unexplored notions including new technologies and techniques. Students are

introduced to different ways of approaching, perceiving and appreciating Interior through studio and

theory components within the course structure.

Workshops, Seminars and Field visits help students to source historical and modern contexts through a

critical eye. Fundamental knowledge of tools, materials and processes is complemented with

development of ideas and concepts, leading to development of wearable and non-wearable portfolios,

for the domestic and international market.

PROGRAM OBJECTIVES:

1. To enable the students to work systematically through a design brief to impart skills in research,

conceptual development, design and fabrication for creative outcomes.

2. To give students a contextual reference in terms of design and how technological, environmental,

economic, social and political issues influence the industry and the art and design world.

3. To develop linkages between academia, industry and the indigenous craft sector.

4. To train students to contribute to the community through design interventions within socio-cultural

limitations.

5. Introduce students to the design process and in particular to the role research has to play in

encouraging original and innovative thinking.

6. To encourage independent thinking through professional practice students are guided in the process

of self-evaluation and criticism, placing their work in the broader contexts of society and with

knowledge of current practitioners.

7. To gain an understanding of the basic financial aspects of entrepreneurial ventures plus marketing

and sales.

STRETEGIC PLAN

241



designers and new entrants who aspire to become professional Interior designers.

PROGRAME OBJECTIVE’S ASSESSMENT

The following table illustrates how each of the above program objectives is measured and the actions

taken as a result of these measurements.

The three tools for assessments of program objectives are:

1. Employer Survey

2. Alumni Survey

3. Graduating Students Survey

4. Existing student Survey

5. Parents Survey

Objectives How

Measured

When to be

Measured

Improvement

Identified

Improvement Made

1 Graduating

Students

Survey

At Conclusion of

three year

program

Better integration of

skills required

between different

design areas

Development of projects

and close monitoring of

design objectives and

outcomes

2 Alumni Survey

Graduating

Students

Survey

Within one year

of graduation

Diversity of exposure

to various art and

design outcomes

Close supervision of

research oriented projects

and following of design

events, fairs and

competitions

3 Employer

Survey

Within one year

of graduation

After completion

of community

projects

Further development

of Industry oriented

assignments

More frequent interaction

between academia and the

industry through

internships and visits

4 Graduating

Students

Survey

Conclusion of

four year program

Identification of

community related

projects

Introduction of community

based design modules as

part of coursework

5 Alumni Survey

Graduating

Students

Survey

Within one year

of graduation

More emphasis on

research and

analytical skills

Emphasis on research skill

development through

theory

Courses

6. Alumni Survey

Graduating

Students

Survey

Conclusion of

four year program

Development of

communication and

presentation skills

Regular critiques and

presentations to peers and

professionals

7 Alumni Survey

Employer

Survey

Within one year

of graduation

Need for Market

surveys and

comparative costing

modules

Inclusion of pricing,

costing and sales modules

in Interior Major Studios

and marketing course

242

PROGRAME OUTCOME (PO’S)

A graduate of the Bachelor of Design Program will demonstrate:

PO1: Design Knowledge -The ability to give comprehensive knowledge of design methodology,

production and its management in the field of design.

PO2: Problem analysis -The ability to design and perform manufacturing, as well as to analyze the

forecast and trends of design industry

PO3: Design/development of solutions- The ability to design a system, component, or process to meet

desired needs within realistic projects related to economic, environmental, social, political, ethical,

health and safety, manufacturability, and sustainability.

PO4: Individual and team work -The ability to function effectively as an individual, and as a member

or leader in diverse teams on multidisciplinary environments

PO5: Problem Solving- The ability to identify, formulate, and solve engineering problems

PO6: Ethics- The understanding of professional and ethical responsibility

PO7: Communication Skills- The ability to communicate effectively.

PO8: Project Management and Finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the design

and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to

manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.

PO9: Life-long learning: Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in

independent and life- long learning in the broadest context of technological change.

PO10: Professional Skills: To demonstrate Event Management, Team Work, Leadership,

Entrepreneurial and Business Skills.

PROGRAME SPECIFIC OUTCOME

Program Specific Outcome:

PSO1: Professional Skills :The ability to understand, analyze and develop plan and design interior

vertical circulation, structural, non-structural, and distribution building systems while evaluating the

connection between Design and all interior building systems..

PSO2: Problem-Solving Skills: The ability to apply standard practices and strategies in Project

development using open-ended programming environments to deliver a quality product for business

success.

PSO3: Successful Career and Entrepreneurship: The ability to employ modern software's,

environments, and platforms in creating innovative career paths to be an entrepreneur, and a zest for

higher studies

243

B.Des. (Interior Design) Program Educational Objective (PEO’s):

A graduate of the B.Des (Interior Design) Program should:

PEO- I

Provide a curriculum that is responsive to Interior Design professional standards and industry

requirements. Students will develop themselves as effective professionals by solving real problems

through the use of Interior Designing knowledge and with attention to team work, effective

communication, critical thinking and problem solving skills.

PEO-II Prepare professionals who contribute to dynamic interior environments that are functional and safe for

inhabitants.

PEO- III

Offer faculty-led design projects at all levels that are strongly related to field applications in Interior

Design.

PEO-IV

Students will be provided with an educational foundation that prepares them for excellence, leadership

roles along diverse career paths with encouragement to professional ethics and active participation

needed for a successful career.

Course Objectives :-

1. COGNITIVE: (Development of critical thinking skills, conceptual constructs, specialized

vocabulary and art history.)

A. The student will be able to identify the formal elements of the language of two- and three-

dimensional form as it applies to interior design.

244

B. The student will develop the special vocabulary of interior design, both in order to explicate

such works and to verbally discuss issues of quality.

C. The student will develop and understanding of the role of craftsmanship in articulating ideas.

D. The student will develop a repertoire of possibilities in the pursuit of the creative process as

evidenced in physical works of interior design.

E. The student will develop an understanding of the application potential of two- and three

dimensional concepts.

F. The student will develop and understanding of concept vs. process in the design of interior

environmental form.

G. The student will develop confidence in the ability to assess quality in the design of residential,

commercial, and recreational interiors.

H. Each student will develop a thorough understanding of the building process.

I. Each student will be able to understand the principles of relative design studio technology and

safety.

J. Each student will be able to research and identify characteristics of historical and contemporary

interiors.

K. Each student will be able to write a fundamental, comprehensive analysis of the design of a

living/working/playing environment.

L. Each student will be able to offer a fundamental oral critique of interior design solutions.

M. Each student will be able to participate in group critiques.

N. The student will demonstrate interest in interior design by seeking design information from a

variety of sources such as books, periodicals, exhibitions, museums, etc.

O. The student will demonstrate a capacity for synthesis by creating designs which incorporate and

unify disparate elements, processes, motifs, and concepts.

P. Each student will be able to use vocabulary specific to the interior design processes.

2. PSYCHOMOTOR: (Development of manipulative, work-oriented skills; demonstration of specific

skills)

A. Each student is required to complete a range of projects that explore various approaches to

controlling the viewer's attention, merging medium and concept, and engaging the creative process.

245

B. Each student will demonstrate flexibility and adaptability by using a variety of technical and

conceptual strategies in resolving interior design problems.

C. The student will demonstrate fluency by producing several different solutions to the same

problem.

D. The student will be able to understand studio technology and safety.

E. The student will be able to control form so that a finished presentation is accomplished,

including architectural weight/support sufficiency.

F. The student will be able to create two- and three-dimensional forms, which explore various

design concepts.

G. The student will demonstrate respect for interior design by presenting neat, clean, well - crafted

projects.

H. Each student will be able to create installations for ideal contextual viewing.

I. Each student will be able to effectively assemble various media fro the construction of required

projects.

J. Each student will be able to control form so that a finished presentation is accomplished.

K. Each student will be able to apply the unifying principles of design to functional interior

environments (including repetition, variety, rhythm, balance, emphasis, and economy).

L. Each student will be able to orally critique interior design projects.

3. AFFECTIVE: (Development of behavioral skills which help the student acquire a positive attitude

toward self, other students, faculty, facilities and equipment, housekeeping in the work area, and the

ability to carry out directions, meet deadlines, meet attendance requirements, etc.)

A. The student will demonstrate interest in interior design by regular and punctual class

attendance.

B. The student will demonstrate the ability to follow task instructions as well as intrinsic

motivation by persistence in staying on task and frequently exceeding the production

requirements set by the instructor. c. The student will demonstrate courage and tenacity

by persistence in resolving interior design problems and completing assignments in a

timely manner – by repeated attempts to resolve or improve upon solutions to these

problems, especially in the face of risk taking and failure.

C. The student will demonstrate resistance to premature closure and openness to discovery

by allowing technical and conceptual processes to evolve and by permitting and even

seeking a variety of sources and processes to generate design ideas and products.

D. Each student will demonstrate the ability to self-initiate tasks.

246

E. The student will demonstrate awareness by producing interior designs in which nuance

is evident (nuance in form, nuance in content).

F. the student will demonstrate independence of judgment (and resistance to peer

sanctions) by producing interior designs which are personally unique or unusual in

character.

G. the student will demonstrate confidence by his or her willingness to attempt difficult or

complex design problems.

H. The student will demonstrate persistence in working on interior design problems in

which neither the problem or the solution is clearly evident or defined.

I. The student will observe safe studio and shop practices.

J. The student will demonstrate an ability to analyze by verbally identifying and

articulating the salient elements in particular interior designs.

K. Each student will demonstrate the ability to focus on personal and group objectives.

L. Each student will participate in group critiques.

M. Each student will demonstrate the ability to dialogue effectively.

N. Each student will demonstrate that the disciplined focus of class objectives can be used

as creative stimulus.

O. The student will demonstrate the ability to tolerate diverse views.

P. The student will demonstrate the ability to offer and receive constructive criticism.

Q. The student will demonstrate the ability to participate in class discussion and

demonstrate critical thinking skills.

R. The student will demonstrate interest in interior design by asking relevant questions and

participating, without prompting, in group and individual critiques.

S. The student will demonstrate the ability to contribute to the studio working environment.

T. The student will demonstrate the ability to prepare adequately for examinations.

COURSE OUTCOMES :-

B.Des. (Interior Design) is structured and organized to develop each student's basis of visual

knowledge, critical thinking skills, and working disciplines so that by the end of the semester he or she

will:

1. Have demonstrated knowledge of the language of two- and three-dimensional form and space as

it applies to this discipline.

247

2. Have a greater understanding of the cultural relativity of contemporary styles by increasing

knowledge of the history of art and architecture.

3. Have demonstrated confidence in and strategies toward individual creativity within the

boundaries of discipline.

4. Have demonstrated sensitivity for the psycho-physiological “language” of color within the

discipline of interior design.

5. Have demonstrated knowledge of interior design as an integral part of cultural expression.

6. Be able to critically reassess the environment of man-made objects and architecture.

7. Have performed exercises in visualization and critical thinking

8. Have performed basic technical practices with two- and three-dimensional mediums.

9. Possess a higher level of perceptual awareness

10. Have translated perceptual awareness into three dimensional plastic form

11. Have demonstrated knowledge of and performed safe and effective studio practices.

COURSE OUTCOMES

1. Problem Solving: Solve communication problems and carry projects from creation through to the

production process; including the skills of problem identification, research and information gathering,

analysis, generation of alternative solutions, prototyping, user testing, integration of feedback and the

evaluation of outcomes.

2.Communication: Describe and respond to the audiences and contexts, which communication

solutions must address, including recognition of the physical, cognitive, cultural, and social human

factors that shape design decisions.

3. Demonstration: Create and develop visual concepts in response to communication problems,

including an understanding of the principles of visual organization, information hierarchy, symbolic

representation, aesthetics, and the construction of original meaningful forms.

4. Technique: Understand tools and technology, including their roles in the creation, reproduction, and

distribution of visual messages. Relevant tools and technologies include drawing, designing,

manufacturing, photography, and time-based project submission.

5. Application: Be able both to determine the mode(s) of production required to achieve a specific

product and to demonstrate level-appropriate mastery of skills, manual and/or digital, necessary to

achieve those products. Apply the principles of color, composition, design and manufacturing as they

248

relate in the various media that exist in design.

6.Aesthetic Fluency: Recognize and apply aesthetic principles of design history, theory, and criticism

from a variety of perspectives, including those of art history, linguistics, communication and

information theory, technology, and the social and cultural use of design objects.

7.Professionalism: Understand the basic business practices and trade ethics related to graphic arts,

including the ability to organize design projects and to work productively in client-designer and team

relationships in the implementation and evaluation of projects.

8.Portfolio: Organize and present a portfolio of work that gives evidence of the skills, knowledge, and

abilities to begin a Interior design career or transfer to a three-year college for additional study.

B.DES. INTERIOR DESIGN

SEMESTER- I

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits Type

1 BMC 128A English Communication &


3 - - 3 3 C

249

2 BMC051A Environmental Science 4 - - 4 4 C

3 BDI101A Design Foundation - - 12 12 6 C

4 BDI102A Basic Art & Design - - 4 4 2 C

5 BDI103A Graphic Representation - - 6 6 3 C

6 BDI104A Fundamentals of Computer 3 - - 3 3 C

Total 10 - 22 32 21

SEMESTER – II

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits Type

1 BDI201A Theory of DESIGN 3 - - 3 3 C

2 BDI202A MATERIALS &

CONSTRUCTION I

- - 6 6 3 C

3 BDI203A Interior Hardware & Software 3 - - 3 3 C

4 BDI204A GRAPHICS - I - - 6 6 3 C

5 BDI205A Architectural Planning Studio - - 12 12 6 C

6 BDI206A Photography Workshop - - 2 2 1 C

Total 6 - 26 32 19

SEMESTER – III

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits Type

1 BDI301A HISTORY OF INTERIOR

DESIGN - I

3 - - 3 3 C

2 BDI302A Services-I 3 - - 3 3 C

3 BDI303A INTERIOR DESIGN STUDIO –

I

(Residential Design)

- - 8 8 4 C

4 BDI304A Furniture Design & Style-I - - 6 6 3 C


CONSTRUCTION II

- - 4 4 2 C

6 BDI306A CADD-Auto CADD (2D & 3D) - - 6 6 3 C

7 BDI307A Model Making Workshop - - 2 2 1 C

Total 6 - 26 32 19

SEMESTER – IV

250

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits Type

1 BDI401A Architectural History-I (World) 3 - - 3 3 C

2 BDI402A Services-II 3 - 3 3 C


II (Office Spaces)

- - 8 8 4 C

4

BDI404A

BDI404B


C. LIGHTING AND COLOUR IN INTERIORS

D. Environmental control in Interiors

3 - - 3 3 E

5 BDI405A W.D. & Estimation - - 3 3 3 C

6 BDI406A Furniture Design & Style-II - - 4 4 2 C

7 BDI407A CADD-3DS Max - - 6 6 3 C

8 BDI408A Seminar - - 2 2 1

Total 9 - 23 32 22

251

SEMESTER – V

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits Type

1 BDI501A ADAPTIVE REUSE AND

RECYCLING

3 - - 3 3 C

2 BDI502A Architectural History-II (Indian)

3 - - 3 3 C


III

(Public & Commercial Spaces)

- - 8 8 4 C

4

BDI504A

BDI504B


A. MARKETING

TECHNIQUES

B. Entrepreneurial Development

3 - - 3 3 E

5 BDI505A Exhibition & Retail Design - - 6 6 3 C

6 BDI506A INTERIOR LANDSCAPE

DESIGN

- - 3 3 3 C

7 BDI507A CADD- Photoshop & Portfolio

Making

- - 6 6 3 C

8 BDI508A Educational Trip - - 2 - 2 C

Total 9 - 23 32 24

SEMESTER – VI

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits Type

1 BDI601A OFFICE TRAINING

(INTERNSHIP)

- - - 18 C

2 BDI602A Portfolio Submission - - - 6 C

Total - - - 24

252

SEMESTER – VII

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits Type

1 BDI701A INTERIOR DESIGN CODES 3 - - 3 3 C

2 BDI702A ADVANCED DESIGN STUDIO - - 12 12 6 C

3 BDI703A Research Project & Dissertation - - 6 6 3 C

4 BDI704A TEXTILE DESIGN - - 6 6 3 C

5

BDI705A

BDI705B


A. PRESENTATION TECHNIQUES

B. INTERIOR DESIGN PHOTOGRAPHY

4 - 4 4 E

6 BDI706A Seminar - - 2 2 1 C

Total 7 - 26 33 20

SEMESTER – VIII

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits Type

1 BDI801A Thesis Project - - 20 20 10 C

2 BDI802A Project Management

&Entrepreneurship

4 - - 4 4 C

4 BDI803A Professional Practice &

Management

4 - - 4 4 C

Total 8 - 20 28 18

253

SEMESTER- I

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits Type

1 BMC 128A English Communication &


3 - - 3 3 C

2 BMC051A Environmental Science 4 - - 4 4 C

3 BDI101A Design Foundation - - 12 12 6 C

4 BDI102A Basic Art & Design - - 4 4 2 C

5 BDI103A Graphic Representation - - 6 6 3 C

6 BDI104A Fundamentals of Computer 3 - - 3 3 C

Total 10 - 22 32 21

BMC128A Business Communication & Personality

Development

3-0-0[3]

Objective



Minimize the Grammar Translation Method of ELT while trying to replace it with Direct

Method.

Introduce Communicative Method of ELT and focusing the teaching pedagogy on the student-

centred learning rather than on the teacher-centred learning.

Ability to master three major forms of communications which are vital in academic and

professional settings namely professional presentations, interviews and group communications

respectively.

Providing a deep insight into the techniques for delivering effective presentations, winning job

interviews, and actively participating in various forms of group communication.

UNIT 1 Basic Writing Skills: Tenses, Voice, Narration,

UNIT 2 Vocabulary Building: Word Formation, Affixes, Synonyms, Antonyms,

One Word Substitution

UNIT 3 Composition: Composing a CV/Resume, Letter Writing, Email Writing,

Précis Writing

UNIT 4 Communication Skills: What is Communication, Process, features of

communication, Types, Flows of Communication and Barriers to

communication.

254

UNIT 5 Prose and Poetry: The Gift of Magi (O’ Henry), How Much Land Does a

Man Need (Leo Tolstoy), Where the Mind is Without Fear (Rabindra Nath

Tagore), If (Rudyard Kipling)



CO1: Ability to design a language component or process to meet desired need within realistic,

Constraints such as economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, scenario.

CO2: Ability to analyze the usage of English words in different contexts.

CO3: An understanding of technical and academic articles’ comprehension.

CO4: The ability to present oneself at multinational levels knowing the type of different standards

of English.

CO5: The ability to use the target language in real context of their aspired workplace with

accuracy.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 L M H

CO3 M M

CO4 H H


Text Books:

1. Communication Skills for Engineers and Scientists, Sangeeta Sharma and Binod

Mishra, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. (New Delhi)

2. English Grammar and Composition, Gurudas Mukherjee, Ane Books Pvt.

Ltd.(New Delhi)

3. Current English Grammar and Usage with Composition, R.P. Sinha, Oxford

University Press (New Delhi)

4. Effective Technical Communication, M Ashraf Rizvi, Tata McGraw Hill (New

Delhi)

5. Business Communication, Meenakshi Raman & Prakash Singh, Oxford University

Press (New Delhi)

Reference Books:

1. Professional Communication, Aruna Koneru, Tata McGraw Hills, New Delhi.

255

BMC051A Environmental Studies 4-0-0[4]

Objective

Understanding and Application of Basic Ecology and Ecological Systems with reference to built

environment.



To Understand the Social issues, Environment, Laws and Sustainability.

UNIT 1 Introduction and Natural Resources: Multidisciplinary nature and public

awareness, Renewable and nonrenewal resources and associated problems,

Forest resources, Water resources, Mineral resources, Food resources, Energy

resources, Land resources, Conservation of natural resources and human role.

UNIT 2 Ecosystems: Concept, Structure and function, Producers composers and

decomposers, Energy flow, Ecological succession, Food chains webs and

ecological pyramids, Characteristics structures and functions of ecosystems

such as Forest, Grassland, Desert, Aquatic ecosystems.

UNIT 3 Biodiversity and Conservation: Definition, Genetic, Species, and Ecosystem

diversity, Bio-geographical classification of India, Value of biodiversity at

global, national, local levels, India as a mega diversity nation, Hot sports of

biodiversity, Threats to biodiversity, Endangered and endemic species of India,

In-situ and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity.

UNIT 4 Environmental Pollution- Definition, Causes, effects and control of air

pollution, water pollution, soil pollution, marine pollution, noise pollution,

thermal pollution, nuclear hazards, human role in prevention of pollution, Solid

waste management, Disaster management, floods, earthquake, cyclone and

landslides.

UNIT 5 Social issues and Environment- Unsustainable to sustainable development,

Urban problems related to energy, Water conservation and watershed

management, Resettlement and re-habitation, Ethics, Climate change, Global

warming, Acid rain, Ozone layer depletion, Nuclear accidents, holocaust,

Waste land reclamation, Consumerism and waste products, Environment

protection act, Wildlife protection act, Forest conservation act, Environmental

issues in legislation, population explosion and family welfare program,

Environment and human health, HIV, Women and child welfare, Role of

information technology in environment and human health.







CO3: An ability to Apply systems concepts and methodologies to analyze and understand


256

CO4: An ability to understand the Environmental awareness, Environmental education in present

day context.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 H L M H

CO3 M L M M

CO4 H M

Reference Books:


2. Cunningham, W.P., et al., Environmental Encyclopaedia, Jaico Publishing House, Mumbai, 2003.


4. Bharucha Erach, Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmadabad, 2002.

BDI101A Design Foundation 0-12-0 [6]

Aim

257

To make students see, make and appreciate the basic design concepts. The first level includes the

vocabulary of design and principles of composition. This level includes 3D composition and study of

Volumes. The aim of this course is to understand the method of visualizing and drawing from nature,

cast and product drawing. Learners will be introduced to a brief history and introduction to 3D

materials, tools and processes and made aware of the range of possibilities of different materials in their

2D and 3D application to design. This may be done through lectures / ppt presentations / swatches/

samples. The aim of this unit is to enable learners to develop knowledge and understanding of the

issues that have informed debate on the purposes and processes of design. This unit aims to give

learners opportunities to develop skills and knowledge in the development of new products or services

in design pathways.

Objective

Know the phases of the design development cycle


Know in principle the physics of color (light), the chemistry of color (pigment), and the impact

of color (psychology).







UNIT 2 Principle of design- Balance, types of balance emphasis, unity, repetition (rhythm,

pattern), harmony, proportion (scale), variety (alteration), contrast, functionality.

UNIT 3 Colour- Colour Wheel and colour chart, Colour Exploration, Colour Interaction.

Primary colours- Colour Wheel, Colour Composition

258

Secondary colours- Colour Wheel, Colour Composition

Tertiary colours- Colour Wheel, Colour Composition

Colour schemes- Monochromatic, Achromatic, Complimentary, Split

Complimentary, Double-Split Complimentary Polychromatic.

Tint, tone & shades- Application of Gray Scale and Black & White.

Mediums in art- Pencil, Charcoal, Pastels, Water & Poster,

Embossed Art Composition

Resist Art Workshop.

UNIT 4 Drawing

o Nature-drawing Composition,

o Free-Hand Sketching.

o Object drawing-2D & 3D

o Human drawing- Outline Sketches

o Shades & Shadow Composition, Light- Dark Tone Composition,

positive and negative spaces

o Product drawings; method of representing

UNIT 5 View- Perspective, Isometric

Geometry- Lines & Angle bisecting, Constructing Regular & Semi Regular

Tessellation, Constructing 3D Tessellation.

Course Outcome (CO): At the end of this course students will have: CO1: An ability to color mixing and fine color-discernment. CO2: An ability to know in principle the physics of color (light), the chemistry of color (pigment), and

the impact of color (psychology).

CO3: An ability to rendering and presentation techniques in design presentations.

CO4: An ability to Recognize the relationship between lighting, surface and perception.



Course Program Outcome Program Specific

259

Outcome Outcome


CO1 M H M H M L

CO2 H H L M M

CO3 L H H H M L M

CO4 M M H H H


Reference Books:

1. Broomer, Gerald F., (1974), Elements of Design: Space, Davis Publications Inc. Worcester,

Massachusetts.

2. Bruce D. Kurty, (1987), Visual imagination- An introduction of Art, Prentice Hall, New

Jersy.

3. Hayashi Studio, (1994) Water Colour Rendering, Graphic-Shaw Publishing Co.

4. Richard Rochan, Herald Linton, (1989), Colour in Architectural Illustration, Van Nostrand

Reinhold.

5. Robert W. Gill, (1984), Manual of Rendering in pen and ink, Thames and Hudson, London.

6. Wong Wucius, (1977), Principles of three-dimensional Design, Van Nostrand Reinhold,

NY.

7. Wong Wucius, (1977), Principles of two-dimensional Design, Van Nostrand Reinhold, NY.

8. Hanlon, Don. (2009), Compositions in architecture, John Wiley & Sons.

9. SaraswatiBidyanath, (2001), The nature of man and culture: alternative paradigms in

anthropology, Indira Gandhi National Centre for the Arts.

10. Bruce. D. Kurty (1987) Visual imagination- An introduction of Art, Prentice Hall, New

Jersey.

260

BDI102A Basics Art & Design 0-3-0 [3]

Objective

To Understand of the social, psychological, cultural, historical and commercial factors.

Development of Graphic Skills, Ability And Comprehension. Establishing Significance of Art.

To Understand the influences on art and design activities.

UNIT 1 Introduction to Interior Design, Need for Interior Designer, Study of Artists,

Study of Architects, Study of Designers

UNIT 2 Application of Basic Design Elements: Line, Form, Shape, Color, Texture,

Light; Analyzing different elements in Interior spaces & creating new;

Introduction to different color shades & Color Chart; Shades & Shadows.

UNIT 3 Application of Design Principles and Spatial Organization: Central

Organization, Linear, Organization, Radial Organization, Clustered

Organization, Grid Organization.

UNIT 4 Free hand sketching of indoor plants & interiors . Lettering, alphabets, free

hand stencils in pencil and ink. Free hand sketches for plan and elevation

UNIT 5 Indian Art- Worli, Fadd, Madhubani, Modern Art, Blue Pottery, Fresco,

Meenakari , glass mosaic, Miniature Art, Kalamkari, Inlay-Work.



CO1: An ability to understand influences on art and design activities and outcomes through the

interpretation and analysis of information.

CO2: An ability to be able to assess, interpret and evaluate information.


261



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H H L M L

CO2 L M H

CO3 M L M


Suggested readings:

9. Broomer F. Gerald, (1974), Elements of Design, Space, Davis Publications Inc., Worcester,

Masschusetts.

10. Dodson B., (1990), Keys to Drawing, North Light Publications, Cincinnati.

11. Mark W., Mary W. (1999), Drawing for Absolute Beginner, F&W Publications, Cincinnati.

12. Davis M.L. (1996), Visual Design in Dress, Prentice Hall, Canada.

13. Graves M., (1951). The Art of Colour and Design, McGraw-Hill Book Company.

262

BDI103A Graphic Communication &

Representation-Studio

0-6-0 [3]

Objective

To Develop understanding of the scale, Dimensions and functions.

To understand the techniques of various methods of drawings in 2D & 3D.

To make them understand the different development of Surfaces.

UNIT 1 Introduction to Graphic Representation

Sketches of All equipment.

Different types of Letterings- Single Stroke, Double Stroke, Italics, Modern

Roman.

Geometrical Constructions- Different Geometric Shapes.

Scale: Different types of Scale Proportions.

Dimensioning- Aligned and Unidirectional.

UNIT 2 Two-Dimensional Projections-

Plan, Elevations & Sections- Developing 2D views from 3D Views (Live &

Sketches)

Orthographic Projections: First Angle & Third Angle Views.

UNIT 3 Development of surfaces-

Surface development of solids e.g. cubes cylinder, pyramids, cone etc.

UNIT 4 Three-Dimensional Projections

Isometric Projections- Developing Isometric views from 2D views.

Axonometric Projections- Developing Axonometric views from 2D views.

UNIT 5 Perspective Projections-

One Point Perspective- Perspective view development of objects & a room

Two Point Perspective- Perspective view development of objects & a room



CO1: An ability to understand the basics concept of Graphic Representation.

CO2: An ability to Develop Drawing Skills As a Thinking Tool, Visualization, And

Representation of Design.

CO3: An ability to use graphic systems, including the plan, section, axonometric, and perspective,

and drawing techniques to represent outline, tone, texture, shade, and shadow.

CO4: An ability to combine graphic systems and drawing techniques, to develop renderings that

graphically express your understanding of the subject matter.

CO5: Understanding different methods of graphic representation including diagrams, perspective

and mechanical drawings.

263



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L H L

CO2 H L M H

CO3 M M L M M

CO4 M L

CO5 H L

Suggested Readings 1.Engineering Drawing by N.D. Bhatt

264

BDI104A Fundamentals of Computer 3-0-3 [3]

Objective

To provide the students a foundation in the techniques of drafting using computer as a drafting

tool.

To understand the technology of computer and its terminology.

To enable the students to understand the applications of the software and graphic systems.

To Develop Awareness Of Computer And Its Environment.

UNIT 1 Introduction: Generation of Computer, Functional components of

Computer

Number Systems: Number systems, fixed and floating-point representation,

addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of fixed point numbers.

UNIT 2 Software: System Software, Application Software.

Human Computer Interface: Operating System as User Interface, System

Tools, Control Panel settings and Utility Programs

UNIT 3 Computer Architecture: Logic Gates, Boolean algebra, Circuits, Decoders,

Multiplexers, Registers, Bus System, Instruction cycle, Instruction Format,

Addressing Modes.

UNIT 4 Devices: Input and Output Devices.

Memory: Primary Memory, Secondary Memory and Cache Memory.

UNIT 5 MS- Office Tools: Introduction to Word Processor, Electronic Spreadsheet, and

Presentation tool.

265



CO1: An ability to identify the components of a computer system.

CO2: An ability to demonstrate basic understanding of commonly used applications.

CO3:An ability to understand the impact of computers on society; explore computer careers;

identify fundamental programming structures; and demonstrate proficiency in basic operating

system functions.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 H L M M H

CO3 M M M

Reference Books :

1. W. Stallings, Computer Organization and Architecture-Designing for Performance, 8th Edition,

Pearson Education/PHI, Inc., 2010.

2. J. P. Hayes, Computer Architecture and Organization, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2012.

3. P.K. Sinha, PritiSihna , Computers Fundamental, 6th Edition BPB Publication,2011

4. M. M. Mano, Computer System Architecture, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2008.

5. V Rajaraman, Fundamentals of Computers, Fifth Edition, PHI, 2010.

266

SEMESTER – II

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits Type

1 BDI201A Theory of DESIGN 3 - - 3 3 C


CONSTRUCTION I

- - 6 6 3 C

3 BDI203A Interior Hardware & Software 3 - - 3 3 C

4 BDI204A GRAPHICS - I - - 6 6 3 C

5 BDI205A Architectural Planning Studio - - 12 12 6 C

6 BDI206A Photography Workshop - - 2 2 1 C

Total 6 - 26 32 19

267

BDI201A THEORY OF DESIGN 3-0-0 [3]

Objective

Understanding various aspects such as form, scale, light, dimension, height, transitional

elements etc affecting interior space.

Understanding and applying design vocabulary such as Point, Line, shape, color, texture, area,

mass, volume etc.

Understanding and applying design principles such as ratio, proportion, scale, balance,

harmony, unity, variety, rhythm, emphasis.

Understanding the process involved in design including analysis, synthesis and evaluation.

UNIT 1 INTERIOR SPACE 9

Space – definition; Interior space – spatial qualities: form, scale, outlook;

structuring space with interior design elements; spatial form; spatial dimension

– square, rectangle, curvilinear spaces; height of space; spatial transitions –

openings within wall planes, doorways, windows, stairways.

UNIT 2 DESIGN VOCABULARY 6

Form – point, line, volume, shape, texture & colour – in relation to light, pattern

etc. and application of the same in designing interiors.

UNIT 3 DESIGN PRINCIPLES 9

Ratio; proportions – golden section; relationships; scale; Balance – symmetrical,

radial, occult; harmony; unity; variety; rhythm; emphasis

UNIT 4 ANTHROPOMETRICS 9

Definition, theory of standard dimension based on human figures for activities,

functions, circulation, furniture design, spatial requirements etc.

Study of Ergonomics

Design of Furniture for Living, Dining, Kitchen, Office etc.

UNIT 5 DESIGN CONTROL 12 Design process – Analysis, synthesis, design evaluation; Design criteria –

function and purpose, utility and economy, form and style; human factors -

human dimensions, distance zones, activity relationships; fitting the space –

plan arrangements, function, aesthetics.

268



CO1 : After successful completion of this course, student should be able to understand &

Study of Evolution of theories of Design – Painting, Sculpture, Architecture, Textiles, Arts &

Crafts- in the history of Social, cultural, Industrial, developments.

CO2: An ability to understand the interior space and their arrangements.

CO3: An ability to understand the Anthropometric data.

CO4: An ability to understand the phases of the different design styles.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H H L L

CO2 L M L H

CO3 M M M

REFERENCE BOOKS :

Francis. D. K. Ching, Interior design Illustrated, Van Nostrand Reinhold

John. F. Pile, Interior Design, Harry Abrams Inc.

Sam. F. Miller, Design process – a primer for Architectural and Interior Design, Van Nostrand

Reinhold.

Gary Gordon, Interior lighting for designers, John Wiley & Sons Inc.

Harold Linton, Colour in Architecture, McGraw Hill

Jonathan Poore, Interior Colour By Design, Rock Port Publishers.

Sherrill Winton, Interior Design and Decoration, Prentice Hall.

Johanness Itten, The Art of Colour, John Wiley and Son

269

BDI202A MATERIALS & CONSTRUCTION-I 0-6-0 [3]

Objective

Understanding the basic components of the buildings envelope for small buildings

Foundations

Walls

Openings

Roofs

Understanding simple roof & floor finishes

270

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO MATERIALS

Wood - Soft and hardwood, plywood, laminated wood and particle boards –

properties, manufacture & uses.

Synthetic Materials – Different types of Glass, their properties, manufacturing

processes and uses. Plastics – injection molding & other manufacturing

methods, etc.

Fabrics – textile, Jute, leather etc. different types and their uses

UNIT 2 BUILDING COMPONENTS

Drawings of the components of a building indicating

Foundation – brick footing, stone footing & rcc column footing

concrete flooring, plinth beam & floor finish

superstructure- brickwork with sill, lintel, windows & sunshade

Flat rcc roof with weathering course, parapet & coping.

.

UNIT 3 Doors & Windows-

Introduction; Location of Door & Windows; Technical Terms; Standard Sizes;

Types of doors- Battened Ledged & Braced Door, Battened Ledged & Framed

Door, Paneled Door, Framed & Paneled Door, Glazed & Sash Door, Flush

Door, Louvered Door, Sliding Door, Swing Door, Revolving Door;

Types of Windows- Fixed Window, Pivoted Window, Sliding Window, Sash

Window, Louvered Window, Bay Window, Corner Window, Metal Window,

Dormer Window, Gable Window, Lantern Window; Skylight, Ventilators;

Joinery & Fixing of Doors & Windows

UNIT 4 STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS

Structures – Components of a load bearing wall & rcc slab roof system - rcc

beams, columns and framed structure

UNIT 5 Staircase

Introduction; Technical Terms; Requirement of Good Staircase; Dimensions;

Classification based on design- Half Turn, Quarter Turn, Three Quarter Turn,

Bifurcated, Continuous; Staircase design

271


The Implementation Strategy will consist of various methods like problem identification and

alternative solution, self study, demonstration and actual site visits with discussion.

CO1: After successful completion of this course, student should be able to Explore and Work with

different Materials.

CO2: Understanding the limitations and properties of different materials to be able to prepare

working models of the designs and also to visualize the final product.

CO3: Study of subject and of materials museum and use of the same in the practice, preferably

during actual site visits.

CO4: Conducting carpentry workshops for understanding detailed and micro construction of

furniture with various alternative materials.

CO5: Demonstrating carpentry joinery through models.

CO6: Collecting and studying for deeper understanding of the details of interior construction

related various hardware and their proper applications with uses.

CO7: Market survey, study and understanding of construction techniques and practice in interior

design.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L L

CO2 M L M H

CO3 M H M

CO4 H M

CO5 M M

TEXT BOOKS

1. S. C. Rangwala - Engineering materials - Charotar Publishing, Anandz

2. Francis D. K. Ching - Building Construction Illustrated, VNR, 1975

272

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Bindra, S.P. and Arora, S.P. Building Construction: Planning Techniques and Methods of

Construction, 19th ed. Dhanpat Rai Pub., New Delhi, 2000.

2. Moxley, R. Mitchell‟s Elementary Building Construction, Technical Press Ltd.

3. Rangwala, S.C. Building Construction 22nd ed. Charota Pub. House Anand, 2004.

4. Sushil Kumar. T.B. of Building Construction 19th ed. Standard Pub. Delhi, 2003.

5. Chowdary, K.P. Engineering Materials used in India, 7th ed. Oxford and IBH, New Delhi,1990.

6. Rangwala, S.C. Building Construction: Materials and types of Construction, 3rd ed. John Wiley

and Sons, Inc., New York, 1963. Francis D. Ching, Building Construction Illustrated, Wiley

publishers, 2008.

7. Building Construction by Dr B.C. Punmia.

8. Building Construction by Ashok Kumar Jain

9. Building Construction by Arun Kumar Jain

10. W.B.Mckay –Building construction Vol1 –Longmans, UK 1981

11. W.B.Mckay –Building construction Vol 3 –Longmans, UK

273

BDI203A Interior Hardware & Software 3-0-0 [3]

Objective

The main objective of this course is to equip the students of interior design on material and

construction methodology.

To understand the construction of basic elements of an interior space such as floors & roof.

To understand the hardware detail of elements such as doors & windows.

UNIT 1 Floor Coverings & Wall Coverings

Rugs, Carpets, PVC Coverings, Vinyl Floors, Linoleum floors, Wallpapers,

Paints & Finishes, Cladding; Market Survey.

UNIT 2 Interior Furnishings

Curtains, Blinds, Upholstery, Tapestry, Covers, Cushions, Bathroom & Table

Linen- Styles, Material Classification, Functions, Fittings; Market Survey.

UNIT 3 Kitchen & Toilets

Fixtures & Fittings; Finishing Material; Market Survey

UNIT 4 Door & Window Hardware

Hinges, Handles, Locks, Door Stoppers, Etc.- Types, Material Classification,

Function; Market Survey.

UNIT 5 Lighting

Natural & Artificial- Fixtures, Fittings, Light Controls- Switches, Dimmers,

Contractors, Photocells, Timers, Occupancy Sensors, Light sensitive Controls,

Decorative Lighting Style, Special Effect Lighting, Selection of Amount of

lighting for an area, Market Survey.



CO1: An ability to understand the construction detail that use a variety of techniques, including

manual drafting, to convey the design solution clearly.

CO2: An ability to understand the interior design on material and construction methodology.

CO3: An ability to understand the Hardware detail of elements such as doors & windows.

274



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 H L M H

CO3 M L M M

Reference Books :.

1. Interior Design Materials & Specifications by Lisa Godsey

2. Interior Design by Ahmed A. Kasu

275

Objective

To help students to learn & understand the techniques of various methods of drawing.

To make them understand the use of colours & their effects in drawing.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO FREE HAND DRAWING

Basic exercises, Still life, Basic forms, effect of lines to represent textures -

Understanding of different types of perspective views using vanishing points,

Shading exercises etc.

UNIT 2 SKETCHING

Outdoor sketching including Lawns, bushes, Water Bodies, Plants & trees in

different media. Indoor sketching – furniture’s, lights, corridor, lobby, class

room etc.

UNIT 3 MEASURED DRAWING

Lettering - types, Scale, Measured drawing of furniture, Wall paneling,

flooring pattern, ceiling pattern, doors and windows.

UNIT 4 GEOMETRICAL DRAWING

Orthographic projections - Projection of lines, planes and solids, section of

primary solids such as pyramids, cones, cylinder, prism, sphere, cuboid, etc.

UNIT 5 ISOMETRIC DRAWING

Isometric projection of all platonic solids such as cube, cuboid, hexagonal

prism, pyramids, cone and sphere etc – isometric projection of singly and

doubly curve surfaces.



CO1: An ability to understand the basics concept of Hand drafting .

CO2: An ability to Develop Drawing Skills As a Thinking Tool, Visualization, And

Representation of Design.

CO3: An ability to use graphic systems, including the plan, section, axonometric, and perspective,

and drawing techniques to represent outline, tone, texture, shade, and shadow.

CO4: An ability to develop sketching concepts.

BDI204A GRAPHICS - I 0-6-0 [3]

276

CO5: Understanding different methods of graphic representation including diagrams, geometric

and isometric drawings.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H H L M M L

CO2 L M H

CO3 M H L M

Reference Books :

Drawing – A creative Process, Francis D.K. Ching, John Wiley Sons, New York

How to paint & draw, Bodo W.Jaxtheimer, Thames & Hudson, London

Geometrical drawing for art students, 2nd revised edition - I.H.Morris, Orient Longman,

Calcutta, 1995.

Architectural drafting and design, 4th edition – Ernest R. Weidhaas, Allyn and Bacon, Boston,

1981.

Building drawing, 3rd edition – M G Shah, C M Kale, Tata Mcgraw – Hill publishing, New

Delhi

278

BDI205A Architectural Planning Studio 0-12-0 [6]

Objective

To Familiarize Students With Theoretical Basis and Design Process Through Observation

Comparison, Analysis With The Help of Prototypes, Model And Drawings.

To understand the Anthropometric & Ergonomics data and its importance & relation in interior

design.

To introduce the elements; principles and objective in orientation to Architectural Design.

To introduce the basics of designing for retail interiors and to develop skills required for the

same.

Introduce to the basics of designing for Residential interiors and to develop skills required for

the same.

UNIT 1 Anthropometric & Ergonomics

Structural Dimensions, Functional Dimensions, Human Dimensions, and

Generalized Heights. Accessibility and Barrier free codes: Manoeuvring

Clearances, Seating, Living Space, Dining Space, and Sleeping Space.

UNIT 2 Introduction to the Basic Design features

UNIT 3 Introduction & formulation of concept & Zoning

UNIT 4 Design Project-I

Residential Planning-

Introduction, Designing of a Model Residence

Case Study, Design Project.

UNIT 5 Design Project-II

Case Study, Design Project for a Retail Store or Office building



CO1: An ability to understand the project studies, case studies of various related topics for

interiors will be used. Presentation of data collected will be done by means of seminars / visits /

books / visuals.

CO2: An ability to understand about the Anthropometric & Ergonomics

CO3: An ability to understand the specific requirements of exhibition and retail design

CO4: An ability to understand how to work in a professional context.

279



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H L H L

CO2 L M H

CO3 M L M M

CO4 H L M

Reference Books :.

1. Time Savers Standards for Interior Design & Space Planning by Joseph Dechiara, Julius Panero

& Martin Zelink.

2. Time Savers Standards for Architectural Design by Michael J. Crosbie & Donald Watson

3. Human Dimension and Interior Space: A source book of Design reference

280

BDI206A Photography Workshop 0-2-0 [1]

Objective

To Develop Photographic Skills, to understand Simple Architectural Forms, Joinery and

Construction Details Through Field Exercises and Model Making.

To develop observations through the different material workshops.

To develop skills and understanding of learners who intend to follow careers as model makers

in the architectural, interior design, industrial design, media or entertainment industries.

UNIT 1 Introduction to Photography

UNIT 2 Components & working of Compact & SLR Camera, Peripheral equipment

like cables, lights, flashguns, lenses, filters, tripods etc.

Assignments oriented towards using camera, Indoor & outdoor photography.

UNIT 3 Techniques of using camera, basics in optics, light, exposure, focus, depth of

field, aperture. Dark room techniques, digital printing.

Assignments oriented towards using camera, Indoor & outdoor photography.

UNIT 4 Reading a photograph, Understanding subject in a photograph, composition

basics, light, exposure to various types of photography like nature, portraits,

wildlife, sports, documentation, journalism etc.

Assignments oriented towards using photography for presentations.

UNIT 5 Photographic investigation of a location and situation.

Assignments culminating into a small presentation investigating a case.



CO1: An ability to Use Photography as a means of communication and Documentation; a tool to

demonstrate concepts and ideas, document situations, & objects in general; get familiar with

camera, film, digital technology & techniques and understand aesthetics of photography,

composition and light.

CO2: An ability to use space and equipment

CO3: An ability to to use sets, lights and backgrounds.

281



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 H L M L H

CO3 M M M

Reference books:

1. Point view- The art of architectural photography , E.Manny A Ballan, VNR 2.Professional

2.Photography photographing buildings, David Wilson, Rotovisio

282

SEMESTER – III

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits Type

1 BDI301A HISTORY OF INTERIOR

DESIGN - I

3 - - 3 3 C

2 BDI302A Services-I 3 - - 3 3 C


I


- - 8 8 4 C

4 BDI304A Furniture Design & Style-I - - 6 6 3 C


CONSTRUCTION II

- - 4 4 2 C

6 BDI306A CADD-Auto CADD (2D & 3D) - - 6 6 3 C

7 BDI307A Model Making Workshop - - 2 2 1 C

Total 6 - 26 32 19

283

BDI301A HISTORY OF INTERIOR DESIGN-I 3-0-0 [3]

Objective

To help the student understand the designs from Prehistoric Period to the Middle Ages.

To know more on the Modern Movements in Interior design from the beginnings of 20th century.

UNIT 1 EARLY CLASSICAL PERIOD

Prehistoric Cave paintings – Primitive Designs- Interiors during Egyptian,

Greek, Roman, Gothic, Early Christian & Renaissance Periods.

UNIT 2 MIDDLE AGES

Interiors in Romanesque, Gothic, and renaissance periods

UNIT 3 COLONIAL TO THE BEGINNING OF THE 20TH CENTURY

Colonial, Victorian designs, Arts & Crafts movement, Art Nouveau, Eclectism,

Frank Lloyd Wright.

UNIT 4 BAUHAUS TO POST WAR MODERNISM

Walter Gropius/ Bauhaus, De Stijl, Mies Van Der Rohe, Le Corbusier, Art Deco,

Postwar Modernism

UNIT 5 PROJECTS

Projects based on Historical Styles in Interiors & Assignments.



CO1: An ability to understand the architecture styles and the work in Mauryan Period.

CO2: An ability to understand the architecture styles and the work in Mughal Period.

CO3: An ability to Locate significant works of architecture in their historical and stylistic context.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 L M H

CO3 M M

284

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Interior Design Course, Mary Gilliat Coyran, Octopus Ltd., London

2. Interior Design & Decoration, Sherril Whiton, Prentice Hall

3. Interior Design, Francis D.K. Ching, John Wiley & Sons, New York

4. History of Architecture, Sir Banister Fletcher, CBS Publishers & distributors, New Delhi

5. Time Saver Standards for Interior Design, Joseph De Chiara, McGraw Hill, New York.

BDI302A Services-I 3-0-0 [3]

Objective

The main objective of this course is to equip the students with concept and principle in advanced

design and commercial interior including services provided in such commercial centers.

To study water supply and sanitation in building design.

To Study electrical services in building design..

To Study Mechanical services in building design.

To equip the students with through knowledge of Domestic Surveillance System.

UNIT 1 Lighting & Electrical Services:

Introduction; Types of Lighting-Interior & Exterior; Essentials of Lighting

Systems- Residential, Retail, Offices, Commercial Spaces; Electrical Layout

Symbols, Electrical Layout Plans, Electrical Connections, Looping, Criterion for

selection of no. of lights per loop, Design Project

UNIT 2 Sanitary, Drainage & Plumbing Services:

Sewer & Water Drainage- Introduction, House Drainage General Principles,

Pipes & Traps, Sanitary Fittings, Plumbing for Drainage System, House

Drainage Plans, Septic Tanks & Soak Pits;

Plumbing Services- Introduction, Water Distribution System, Material & Size for

Service Pipes, Service Connections, Water Meter & Valves, Storage Tanks, Hot

& Cold-Water Supply System; Design Project.

UNIT 3 Acoustics & Sound Insulation:

Acoustics- Introduction, Characteristics of Sound, Common Acoustical Defects,,

Absorption & Absorbents of Sound;

Sound Insulation- Introduction, Effects of Sound, Sound Insulating Materials.

UNIT 4 Ventilation

Ventilation- Definition & Need, System of Ventilations-Natural & Artificial;

UNIT 5 Air Conditioning- Introduction, Principle of Air Conditioning, System of Air

Conditioning- Window Units, Split, & Central Air conditioners, Principles of

ducting & distribution.



CO1: An ability to understand the knowledge and use of water supply and sanitation in building

design.

CO2: An ability to understand the Mechanical services in building design.

CO3: An ability to understand the Acoustics & Sound Insulation.

285



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 H L M H

CO3 M M M

Reference Books :

1. Interior Design- Principles & Practice by M. Pratap Rao.

2. Interior Design by Ahmed A. Kasu.

BDI303A INTERIOR DESIGN STUDIO – I


0-8-0 [4]

Objective

To develop understanding of the scale, function and options existing when designing small-scale

spaces in residences such as toilets, kitchens, living, bedrooms etc.

Development of ideas with regard to false ceiling, wall paneling, flooring, floor coverings,

curtains, windows, doors and other elements of residential interiors.

UNIT 1 KITCHENS

Work triangle, planning for activity – anthropometrics – types of kitchen-

Modular kitchens. Materials used in counters, shelves, worktops, washing areas

& their comparative study. Lighting & colour scheme – natural & artificial light.

UNIT 2 TOILETS

Anthropometry – various types of sanitary ware and their use – types of layouts –

concepts in modern day toilet interiors – materials & finishes – colour, texture &

pattern.

UNIT 3 BEDROOMS & LIVING ROOMS

Concepts in bedroom & living room interiors – various layout of these spaces –

the use of furniture and accessories to create a certain type of ambience –

materials & finishes – lighting, colour & texture.

UNIT 4 RESIDENCE

Holistic concepts in residential interiors – ability to integrate various individual

spaces into one theme – treatment of patios, courtyards, verandahs & other semi

sheltered spaces – integration of built form and open spaces.



CO1: An ability to manipulate interior environments to meet design requirements

286

CO2: An ability to respond to the aesthetic and functional requirements of an interior design brief

CO3: An ability to employ technical processes to respond to an interior design brief

CO4: An ability to understand how to operate as a professional interior designer.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 H L M L H

CO3 M M M

REFERENCE BOOKS


2. Standards by Julius Panero & Martin Zelnik

BDI304A Furniture Design & Style - I 0-6-0 [3]

Objective

To Provide the students knowledge on furniture design and its various aspects.

To understand about the various anthropometric aspects, human factors and other design criteria

involved in the design of furniture's.

To make the students understand about the various materials & Technology involved in the making

of the furniture's.

UNIT 1 Ergonomics & Anthropometry of Furniture Design:

Ergonomic of various Human postures like Sitting, Standing, Moving etc.

Standard Sizes of Furniture.

Tables:

Centre Table, Bed Side Table, Study Table, Dining Table, Console, Ottoman–

Designing, Working Drawings with Material & hardware details.

UNIT 2 HUMAN FACTORS

Study of Anthropometry & Design criteria involved in the design of

Sofa, settee, couch, etc.

Cot, bedside lockers, wardrobes

Cupboards, shelves

Bunk beds, beds, study table

Display furniture

Furniture for the physically challenged

Sitting Furniture:

2/3 Seater Sofa, Dinning Chair, Easy Chair, Rocking Chair- Designing

UNIT 3 ROOM PLANS AND FURNITURE ARRANGEMENT

Types of furniture – Built in furniture – Movable furniture – Systems furniture –

Specially Designed furniture – Readymade furniture – Modular, Knockdown &

287

Economy Furniture.

Traffic pattern and furniture layout for residence, commercial and office areas

UNIT 4 Kitchen Furniture:

Overhead Cabinets, Under Counter Cabinets – Designing, Working Drawings

with Material & hardware details.

UNIT 5 PROJECTS

Designing & detailing of

Residential Furniture – Seating, Sleeping, Storage & Children’s furniture

Commercial furniture – Showcases, Counters, Display units, Restaurant

furniture, Bar furniture

Office furniture – Adjustable desks & storage, Mobile & Resilient chairs,

Portable chairs, Movable Tables, Lounge seating.



CO1: An ability to do research and studying furniture pieces.

CO2: An ability to become familiar with basic traditional and modern joinery.

CO3: An ability to do sketching basic joints used in furniture and cabinet making.

CO4: An ability to develop knowledge and critical comprehension of key concepts, methodologies,

current trends, and theoretical approaches in all studio concentrations in order to understand the

relationship among them.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 H L M H

CO3 M L M

CO4 M M

Reference Books :

1. Furniture Design by Graves (Garth)

288

BDI305A MATERIALS & CONSTRUCTION II 0-4-0 [2]

Objective

To understand the construction of basic elements of an interior space such as walls & partitions,

floors & roofs.

UNIT 1 WALLS- TYPES OF MASONRY

Different types - Stone walls – random rubble, coursed rubble, square rubble,

polygonal rubble & Ashlar etc

Brick masonry -Types of bonds - single & double Flemish bond, header bond,

stretcher bond, rat trap bond, ornamental bonding.

UNIT 2 FLOORS

Floor coverings- - softwood, hardwood- resilient flooring - linoleum, asphalt tile,

vinyl, rubber, cork tiles - terrazzo , marble & granite – properties, uses & laying.

Floor tiles- ceramic glazed, mosaic and cement tiles- properties, uses and laying,

details for physically handicapped.

UNIT 3 FALSE CEILING

Construction of various kinds of false ceiling such as thermacol, plaster of paris,

gypboard, metal sheets, glass and wood

Construction of domes, vaults, & other special ceilings

UNIT 4 WALL PANELING

Paneling – Using wooden planks, laminated plywood, cork sheets, fibre glass

wool & fabric for sound insulation and wall paneling for thermal insulation.

UNIT 5 FINISHES

Paints- enamels, distempers, plastic emulsions, cement based paints- properties,

uses and applications- painting on different surfaces – defects in painting , clear

coatings & strains- varnishes, lacquer, shellac, wax polish & strains- properties,

uses and applications. Special purpose paints- bituminous, luminous, fire

retardant and resisting paints- properties, uses and applications



CO1: An ability to understand and draft the construction details.

CO2: An ability to understand the different Building Materials and Elements and their Details.

CO3: An ability to understand the properties and use of protective finishes, floors and its products.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 H L M M H

289

CO3 M L L M

Reference Books

1. Bindra, S.P. and Arora, S.P. Building Construction: Planning Techniques and Methods of

Construction, 19th ed. Dhanpat Rai Pub., New Delhi, 2000.

2. Moxley, R. Mitchell‟s Elementary Building Construction, Technical Press Ltd.

3. Rangwala, S.C. Building Construction 22nd ed. Charota Pub. House Anand, 2004.

4. Sushil Kumar. T.B. of Building Construction 19th ed. Standard Pub. Delhi, 2003.

5. Chowdary, K.P. Engineering Materials used in India, 7th ed. Oxford and IBH, New Delhi,1990.

6. Rangwala, S.C. Building Construction: Materials and types of Construction, 3rd ed. John Wiley

and Sons, Inc., New York, 1963. Francis D. Ching, Building Construction Illustrated, Wiley

publishers, 2008.

7. Building Construction by Dr B.C. Punmia.

8. Building Construction by Ashok Kumar Jain.

290

BDI306A CADD- Auto CADD (2D&3D) 0-6-0 [3]

Objective

This unit intends to equip the students with concepts and principle of CAD pertaining to Interior

Design using software like AUTOCAD and similar ones.

UNIT 1 Introduction, Brief History of Drawing Interrelationship of Engineering

Drawing and Design

Engineering Drawings Today

Engineering Drawing and the Computer

Computer-Aided Design and Drafting (CADD)

How CADD Drawings are used, Computer-Aided Designing and Manufacturing

(CAD/CAM),

The Educational Value of Engineering Drawing,

Introduction to AutoCAD

Explaining AutoCAD GUI

Drawing simple sketches - Line, Circle, Arc

Filing information - New, Open, Qsave, Save as, Close, Exit

Polygon, Ellipse

Move, Copy, Array and Mirror, Rotate

Scale, Offset, Break

Drawing settings - Limits, Dsettings, Units.

UNIT 2 Enhanced editing tools - Trim, Extend, Stretch

Object selection methods

Giving annotations - Text, Style, Ddedit, Mtext

Assigning object properties - Color, Linetype, Lineweight

Display control - Zoom Pan, and View

Layer management,

Changing object properties,

Properties, Change, Match prop,

Advanced object selection methods,

Q Select

UNIT 3 Hatching utilities - Bhatch, hatch, hatchedit,

Fillet, Chamfer, Inquiry commands - Id, Dist, List, Area,

Advanced drawing objects & their editing - P line, P edit, Spline, Spline edit

Dimension Utilities - Dim linear, Dim aligned, Dim radius, Dim diameter, Dim

center, Dim ordinate, Dim baseline, Dim continue

Qleader, Multileader, Multileader Style, Dim edit, Dimtedit, Dimension

Associative, Dimstyle,

Construction lines - Xline, Ray

UNIT 4 Concepts on blocks - Block, Insert,

Divide, Measure,

Gemetric Constraints, Dimensional Constraints

Defining & Editing Attributes - Attdef, Attedit, Attdisp, Base

291

External references - Xref, Xbind,

Etransmit

Introduction to plotting,

Plot,

Page set up

UNIT 5 3D drawings- Introduction to 3D

3D forms

Material application

Rendering Tools & Techiniques

Project Setting up plotters and print



CO1: An ability to understand the total use of all commands relate to windows and AutoCAD for

making designs.

CO2: An ability to understand the 2D drawings Line compositions to be taken Color compositions,

painting in windows.

CO3: An ability to understand the Drawing simple geometry objects and drafting of room give

building / apartment / flat and Bungalows.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H H L L

CO2 L M H

CO3 M M M

Reference Books:

1. Beginning AutoCAD 2016 by Cheryl R. Shrock

2. autocaddhelp/guide/tutorial

292

BDI307A Model Making Workshop 0-2-0 [1]

PURPOSE

To introduce the students to basics of Model making with various materials.

INSTRUCTIONAL OBJECTIVES

Acquisition of hands on experience in model - building.

UNIT

1 INTRODUCTION TO MODEL MAKING 8 Introduction to concepts of model making and various materials used for model

making, Drawing settings - Limits, D settings, Units

UNIT

2 BLOCK MODELLING 12 Preparation of base for models using wood or boards

Introduction to block models of buildings (or 3D Compositions) involving the

usage of various materials like Thermocol, Soap/Wax, Boards, Clay etc.

UNIT

3 DETAILED MODELLING 20

Making detailed models which includes the representation of various building elements like Walls, Columns, Steps, Windows/glazing, Sunshades, Handrails using materials like Mountboard, Snow- white board, acrylic sheets.

Representing various surface finishes like brick/stone representation, stucco finish etc.

Various site elements – Contour representation, Roads/Pavements, Trees/Shrubs, Lawn, Water bodies, Street furniture, Fencing etc.

UNIT

4 INTERIOR MODELS OF INTERIOR SPACES 25 Making models of the various interior spaces such as

Residences

Offices

Retail Spaces

Recreational Spaces Scaled models of furniture.

UNIT

5 CARPENTRY 25 Introducing the techniques of planning, chiselling & jointing in

timber to learn the use of hand tools. Exercise involving the design

of simple furniture and making a model of the same.

293



CO1: Understand the technological principles of model making in a commercial context

CO2: Be able to plan and design a model for commercial production

CO3: Be able to make models to a brief.

CO4: Be able to employ professional practice in commercial model making.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 H L M L H

CO3 M M M

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. BENN, The book of the House, Ernest Benn Limited, London

2. Jannsen, Constructional Drawings & Architectural models, Karl Kramer Verlag Stuttgart, 1973.

3. Harry W.Smith, The art of making furniture in miniature, E.P.Duttor Inc., New York, 1982.

294

SEMESTER – IV

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits Type

1 BDI401A Architectural History-I (World) 3 - - 3 3 C

2 BDI402A Services-II 3 - 3 3 C


II (Office Spaces)

- - 8 8 4 C

4

BDI404A

BDI404B


A. LIGHTING AND COLOUR IN INTERIORS

B. Environmental control in Interiors

3 - - 3 3 E

5 BDI405A W.D. & Estimation - - 3 3 3 C

6 BDI406A Furniture Design & Style-II - - 4 4 2 C

7 BDI407A CADD-3DS Max - - 6 6 3 C

8 BDI408A Seminar - - 2 2 1

Total 9 - 23 32 22

295

BDI401A Architectural History-I (World) 3-0-3 [3]

Objective

To make the students understand about the various materials & Technology involved in the

Mauryan Period.

To make the students understand about the styles and form involved in the Mughal Period.

Understanding the works and philosophy of Temple Architecture.

UNIT 1 Mauryan Architecture:

Timber Structure in buildings; Pillars; Torans; Viharas; Stupa- Sanchi Stupa;

Ashok Pillar at Sarnath; Lion Capital at Vaishali; Cave Temples - Ajanta &

Elllora Caves – Architectural features & Importance, art work, Interior details.

UNIT 2 Mughal Architecture:

Akbar Reign:

Tomb of Humayun; Fatehpur Sikri – Tomb of Salim Chishti, Buland Darwaja,

Jodh Bai’s Palace, Birbal House, Panch Mahal, Diwan-E-Khas, Diwan-E-Aam,

Peacock Throne, Jama Masjid.

UNIT 3 Post Akbar Reign:

Jahangir- Tomb of Akbar; Shah Jahan- Red Fort, Delhi; Jama masjid, Delhi; Taj

Mahal, Agra; Moti Masjid.

Temple Architecture of India:

UNIT 4 Sun Temple at Konark, Temples of Khajuraho; Cave Temple, Mahakuta.

UNIT 5 Temples of South & South- Eastern India:

Laad Khan Temple, Aihole; Durga Temple, Aihole; Lingraj Temple,

Bhubneshwar; Shikhar Temples, Orissa.








Course

Outcome


Outcome


296

CO1 H L L

CO2 L M H

CO3 M M

Reference Books :

1. History of Architecture by Sir Banister Fletcher

2. The Great Ages of World Architecture by G. K. Hiraskar

BDI402A Services-II 3-0-3 [3]

Objective

The main objective of this course is to equip the students with concept and principle in advanced

design and commercial interior including services provided in such commercial centers.

To study fire fighting and security systems in building design. and Differentiate between the

various types of extinguishing agents.

To Study Thermal Insulation in building design..

To Study Mechanical services in building.

To equip the students with through knowledge of Data Automation System.

UNIT 1 Fire Alarming & Fighting System:

Introduction, type of Fire- Normal, Electrical Short Circuits, Fuel & Spirits,

Importance of Fire Fighting System, Water Supply Sprinklers, Extinguishers,

Fire Alarm System, Smoke Detectors.

UNIT 2 Security & Alarm System

Types- Visual & Non-Visual, On the spot & Remote Surveillance, CCTV, Infra-

Red Sensors, RFID, Motion Detectors, Night Vision.

UNIT 3 Data Automation-

Introduction to Data Automation, Importance of data automation, Installing data

automation in a building, Techniques of data automation- Data Cable, Wi-Fi,

EPBAX, Intercom

UNIT 4 Thermal Insulation-

Introduction, importance of thermal insulation, types of thermal heat, different

materials to use for insulation and their characteristics.

UNIT 5 Air Conditioning-

Cooling- Water & Dry Cooling, Warming & Fresh Air System- Description with

reference to a small residential unit & commercial Units, Malls, Use of Duct-able

Unit.



CO1: An ability to understand the knowledge and use of firefighting equipment specific to the given

task.

CO2: An ability to understand the basics of heat transfer: conduction, convection and radiation.

CO3: An ability to understand the knowledge of Data Automation System.

297



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 M L M H

CO3 M M M

Reference Books:

1. Interior Design- Principles & Practice by M. Pratap Rao


BDI403A INTERIOR DESIGN STUDIO – II

(Office Spaces)

0-8-0 [4]

Objective

Explore to a preliminary level basic spatial and material design concepts.

This unit intends to equip the students with concept and principles of Basic Design pertaining to

office design.

To develop the skills in elements of design, color, texture, anthropometrics, planning of a office.

To understand the basic function of the office, which are required in planning of the interior of

office.

UNIT 1 Office design

Introduction to work space design; Requirement of a work space; Types of

Office system-Open Office, Closed cabin system; Planning of an Office;

Ambience of an office; Office layout Patterns- Grid & random.

Office Spaces - General Offices & Workstation and Planning Data; Different

types of Workstations; Different types of Conferences Layouts; general offices &

Multiple Workstation Planning Data.

UNIT 2 Office Design Procedure:

Design on Paper and Practical Approach- Visiting the site, Preparing

Personal Data Card, Making out Requirements, Designing, and

Evaluating.

UNIT 3 Interiors of Office:

Colour Schemes; Use of Colour Scheme; Factors Influencing the colour Scheme-

Individual choice, Utility, Direction Wise, Region Wise.

Light- Open Light & Concealed Light; Factors influencing Lighting- Position,

Movability, Adaptability, Adjustability, State, Purpose, Direction, Architectural,

Application; Layout of Lighting- Chessboard, Perimeter, Diagonal, Neutral,

Square; Principles of Lighting.

Material Selection- Selection Criteria in an Workspace.

298

UNIT 4 Design project-I

Architect’s/ Designer’s Office- Planning, Interior Designing- Inspiration,

Theme, Concept, Functional Requirements, Working Drawings & Presentation

Drawing and Material Specification.

UNIT 5 Design Project-II:

Parlour Design- Planning, Interior Designing- Inspiration, Theme, Concept,

Functional Requirements, Working Drawings & Presentation Drawing and

Material Specification.



CO1: An ability to understand the Design Process Through Observation Comparison, Analysis With

the Help of Prototypes, Model and Drawings.

CO2: An ability to understand the different areas and their anthropometrics in office design.

CO3: An ability to understand the project studies, case studies of various related topics for interiors

will be used. Presentation of data collected will be done by means of seminars / visits / books /

visuals.

CO4: An ability to develop motivation of inspiration through the works of renowned designers and

architects. Critical observation of interior projects for their merits and demerits by means of

reading, study of drawings, interpretation and discussion.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H H L L L

CO2 L M H

CO3 M M M

Reference Books:

1. Time Saver Standards for Interior design & Space Planning by Joseph Dechiara, Julius Panero

2. Martin Zelnik.

3. Lighting for Interior Design by Lighting for Interior Design.

299

BDI404A

BDI404B

Elective-I

LIGHTING AND COLOUR IN

INTERIORS

ENVIOREMENTAL CONTROL IN

INTERIORS

3-0-3 [3]

A :- LIGHTING AND COLOUR IN INTERIORS

Objective

To help the student understand day lighting and technology of artificial lighting.

To equip the student to understand and successfully apply lighting techniques with colour effects.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO DAY LIGHTING

Nature of light – Wavelength, Photometric quantities – intensity, Flux,

illumination and luminance, visual efficiency, sources of light, day light factor

concept, design sky concept, day lighting requirements.

UNIT 2 ARTIFICIAL LIGHTING

Electric lamps – incandescent, fluorescent, sodium vapour, mercury, halogen and

neon. Different types of lights in interior and exterior - task lighting, special

purpose lighting. Calculation of artificial lighting, guidelines for lighting design,

Glare in artificial lighting.

UNIT 3 EFFECT OF COLOR IN LIGHTING

Colors, color schemes - Monochromatic, analogous, complementary colour

schemes, triadic and tetradic schemes, effects of color in different areas, color

temperature, psychological effects of colour in interiors, factors affecting colour,

Prang theory – Colour wheel, Munsell system and Oswald system.

UNIT 4 LUMINARES & FIXTURES

Definition, different luminaries for lighting, lighting control system- benefits &

application, Impact of lighting, fixture types - free standing or portable, fixed,

light fixture control.

Lighting accessories- switches, sockets, fused connection units, lamp holders,

ceiling roses etc.

UNIT 5 CASESTUDY

Study of projects based on different lighting concepts used in interiors and

exteriors.



CO1: An ability to understand the knowledge of Lighting in building design.

CO2: An ability to understand the Mechanical services in building design.

CO3: An ability to understand the effect of lighting in interiors.



300

Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H H L L L

CO2 L M H

CO3 M M M

REFERENCE BOOK

1. The Art of living- Randall whitehead,

2. Lighting design, source book- Randall whitehead,

3. Light right- M.K.Halpeth, T.Senthil kumar, G.Harikumar

4. Concepts of lighting, Lighting design in Architecture- Torquil Barker

B :- ENVIOREMENTAL CONTROL IN INTERIORS

Objective

To enable the students to understand the importance of environment control in the interiors.

Acquire knowledge on the different types of heating and cooling systems.

UNIT 1 Environment control – meaning of environment, importance of environment

control, advantages, elements to be controlled in the interiors – Temperature, air

quality, sound, sanitation, light.

UNIT 2 Ventilation – Definition, importance, Types of ventilation – Natural and

mechanical Guidelines for natural ventilation.

UNIT 3 Heating – Need for room heating, types of heating system – central, radiant,

forced air; solar system – Active solar system and passive solar system.

UNIT 4 Air conditioning – Meaning, Principles, need for conditioning, air conditioning

applications, Humidity control, types of air conditioning - central air

conditioning, and packaged.

UNIT 5 Acoustics – Definition, requirements of good acoustics, properties of sound –

sound waves wave

length, frequency, velocity, resonance, sound levels, loudness, noise, sound

reflection, echoes, reverberation; Sound absorption – sound absorbent materials,

qualities of acoustic material, guidelines for good acoustical design.

301









CO4: An ability to understand the Acoustics & acoustical design.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 H L M H

CO3 M L M M

CO4 H M

REFERENCES:

1. Pratap R.M (1988) Interior design principles and practice, Standard publishers distribution, Delhi.

2. Faulkner, S., and Faulkner. R, (1987), Inside Today’s Home, Rinehart publishing company, New

york.

3. www.wixipedia.orga. Air conditioning.

4. Park, K (1995), Text Book of preventive and social medicine, Banaridas Bhanot Publishers,

Jabalpur.

5. Punnia, B.C (1995), A. Text book of building construction, Lakshmi Publication Pvt.Ltd., New

Delhi.

http://www.wixipedia.orga/

302

BDI405A W.d. & Estimation 0-3-0 [3]

Objective

This unit intends to equip the students with all the procedures of estimation & costing principles of

estimating all works of interior design project.

UNIT 1 Estimating & Costing

Introduction to Estimating & Costing; Importance; Units of Measurements;

Types of estimates- Preliminary or Approximate Estimate or Abstract Estimate,

Plinth area estimate for building, Cube Rate Estimate for Building Renovation,

Approximate Quantity Method Estimate, Detailed Estimate or Item Rate

Estimate, Revised Estimate, Supplementary Estimate, Annual Repair or

Maintenance Estimate;

General principle of approximate method of costing;

Approximate Methods of Costing for Various Interior Works.

UNIT 2 Specifications

Introduction; Objects of Specifications; Importance of Specifications;

Types of Specifications; Brief specifications; Detailed specifications;

Principles of Specifications; Typical Specifications.

UNIT 3 Taking Out Quantities

Introduction; Essentials of an Estimation; Requirements of an Estimation;

Methods of Taking out Quantities; English method of taking out

quantities; Units of Measurements; Modes and Unit of Measurement For

Different Types Of Trades; General rules for measurements.

UNIT 4 Tenders

Introduction; Invitation to Tender; Tender Notice- Essentials of Tender

Notice; Opening of Tender; Acceptance of Tender; Tender Document;

Types of Tender- Item Rate, Lump Sum, Lump Sum Plus Percentage,

Cost Plus Percentage, Cost Plus Fixed Fee, Cost Plus Fixed Fee with

Bonus/Penalty, Labor Tender, Demolition Tender.

UNIT 5 Detailed working drawing of a project.



CO1: Student will be able to know the procedure of estimation & costing

303

CO2: Student will be able to plan a project using the estimation & costing

CO3: Student will be able to prepare bills, contracts, agreements etc.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H H L L

CO2 L M L H

CO3 M M M

Reference Books:

1. Estimating & Costing in Civil Engineering by B.N.Dutta

2. Estimating & Costing- by G.S. Birdie

BDI406A Furniture Design & Style -II 0-4-0 [2]

Objective

To Provide the students knowledge on furniture design and its various aspects.

To understand about the various anthropometric aspects, human factors and other design criteria

involved in the design of furniture's.

To make the students understand about the various materials & Technology involved in the making

of the furniture's.

UNIT 1 Sitting Furniture:

Executive Chair, Sofa Chair, Lounge, Deck/ Outdoor Chair, Bar Chair/Stool -

Designing, Working Drawings with Material & hardware .

UNIT 2 Tables:

Reception desk, Manager’s table, Drafting Table, Trolley Table - Designing,

Working Drawings with Material & hardware.

UNIT 3 Sleeping Furniture:

Day Bed, Canopy Bed, Poster Beds, Infant Bed- Designing, Working Drawings

with Material & hardware.

UNIT 4 Storage Furniture

Display Islands, Book Case/ Racks, Chester drawers- - Designing, Working

Drawings with Material & hardware.

UNIT 5 Multipurpose Furniture:

Sofa Cum Bed, Office Work Stations with storage, Bar Counters cum storage-

Designing, Working Drawings with Material & hardware.

304



CO1: Be able to Research and studying furniture pieces.

CO2: Be able to becoming familiar with basic traditional and modern joinery of furnitures.

CO3: Be able to Sketching basic joints used in furniture and cabinet making.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 H L M L H

CO3 M M L M

Reference Books:

1. Furniture Design by Graves (Garth).

305

BDI407A CADD-3DS Max 0-6-0 [3]

Objective

This unit intends to equip the students with concepts and principle of CAD pertaining to Interior

Design using software like AUTOCAD and similar ones.

This unit intends to equip the students with throughout Knowledge of application of Computer in

interiors and efficient working in 3D & 3D Animation and Walk Through.

UNIT 1 Module 1:

Introduction - About Max

System Configuration

Max Interface

Customize Viewports

Standard Primitives

Creating objects using Keyboard Entry

Setting projec

Creating Extended Primitives

Defining Object Name & Color

Using Manipulator

Using Navigation Tools

Transforms [Move, Rotate, and Scale with short-cut keys]

Using Absolute / Relative Transform Type-in dialog box

Restrict to X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, ZX with short-cut keys

Using Clone (Copy option only)

UNIT 2 Module 2:

Selection Regions

Selection Types

Select by Name dialog box

Group & Sub menus

Assembly

Shading type in Viewports

Co-Ordinate System

Unit Setup

Using 3D Snap

Angular Snap

306

Percent Snap

Using Grid & Snap Settings dialog box

Align Tool, Clone and Align Tool, Mirror Tool, Quick Align

UNIT 3 Module 3:

Applying basic 3D Modifiers – Bend, Taper, Twist, Noise ,Relax, Skew.

Applying basic 3D Modifiers-Affect Region, Displace, Lattice, Mirror, Push,

Ripple, Stretch, Squeeze, and Spherify, Shell, Slice and Wave.

2D-Shapes,

About Start New Shape.

Editing Line Object

2D Modifiers - Edit Spline Modifier, Lathe, Extrude, Bevel, Bevel

Profile,Sweep, Fillet/Chamfer

Compound Objects – Boolean

AEC Extended Objects – Foliage, Railing, and Wall, Stair, Doors, Windows.

UNIT 4 Module 4:

Introduction to lights - Standard Lights – Omni

Target Spot, and Free Spot

Target Direct, Free Direct, Sky Light, ,

Photometric Lights –Target Point, Free Point, Target Linear, Free Linear, Target

Area, Free Area.

Copying Objects – Clone, Instance, Reference, Array, Spacing Tool, Normal

Align, and Align view, Align Camera.

Working with Shape Boolean

Edit-Spline

Compound object- Loft

Deforming Loft Objects – Scale, Twist, Teeter, Bevel, Fit - Modifying Objects

UNIT 5 Module 5:

Introduction to Material Editor, Tools in M.E,

Assign Material to selection, assigning 2D maps,

Get Material, Save Material Library, Maps Rollout,

Material / Map Navigation, Rendering Map

Extended Parameters

Cameras – Target, Free Rendering basics - Output image sizes,

Export as JPEG, File handling – Save, Save as, Save Copy as, Save selected,

Archive, Summary Info, View Image File, Hold, Fetch, Undo/Redo

Project.



CO1: An ability to understand the total use of all commands relate to windows and AutoCAD for

making designs


painting in windows

CO3: An ability to understand the Implementation Strategies will include use and regular practice of

all related commands of AUTOCAD 3D, 3D studio, Photoshop, Walk through Animations. The

generation of drawings and animation should satisfy the client’s requirements and it should ease

the planning, design and execution of the interior work.



307

Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H H L L

CO2 L M M H

CO3 M M

Reference Books:

1. Creating and Rendering Exterior Visualizations In 3ds Max Video Tutori

2. Kelly L. Murdock's Autodesk 3ds Max 2015 Complete reference guide Inside 3D Studio MAX 2,

Volume 1by Stylin Elliott & Philip Miller

3. http://shadowmysticstudios.daportfolio.com

BDI408A Seminar 0-2-0 [1]

Objective

An avenue to enhance academics learning through practical knowledge from experts.


Gain exposure to a professional field with the experiences shared by professionals.

Understand their specialist area and the career opportunities available.


EXPERT SEMINARS & VISITS

Student has to attend various seminars and visits conducted by the university regarding their

subjects to be taken by expert from the industry, to enhance the technical practical knowledge of

the field.

Students have to submit a comprehensive report at the end of the semester, compiling the

experiences and knowledge gained at these seminars & visits.

https://www.googleadservices.com/pagead/aclk?sa=L&ai=DChcSEwjMkJPZmLnRAhUIJGgKHamlBbkYABAI&ohost=www.google.co.in&cid=CAASIuRotbSA0b-FUtjfn4PcVRSYTYZ398ZEH6ifQdmpCXvvq70&sig=AOD64_0oeXLcRQzsWejqnnfK4SMBYU4uFQ&ctype=5&q=&ved=0ahUKEwjMjZDZmLnRAhUGTI8KHXCvCmYQ9A4Iew&adurl=

https://www.amazon.com/Kelly-Murdocks-Autodesk-Complete-Reference/dp/158503911X

https://www.amazon.com/Inside-Studio-MAX-Mark-Williamson/dp/1562058576

https://www.amazon.com/Inside-Studio-MAX-Mark-Williamson/dp/1562058576

http://shadowmysticstudios.daportfolio.com/

308

SEMESTER – V

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits Type

1 BDI501A ADAPTIVE REUSE AND

RECYCLING

3 - - 3 3 C

2 BDI502A Architectural History-II (Indian)

3 - - 3 3 C


III


- - 8 8 4 C

4

BDI504A

BDI504B


A. MARKETING

TECHNIQUES


3 - - 3 3 E

5 BDI505A Exhibition & Retail Design - - 6 6 3 C

6 BDI506A INTERIOR LANDSCAPE

DESIGN

- - 3 3 3 C

7 BDI507A CADD- Photoshop & Portfolio

Making

- - 6 6 3 C

8 BDI508A Educational Trip - - 2 - 2 C

Total 9 - 23 32 24

309

BDI501A ADAPTIVE REUSE AND RECYCLING 3-0-3 [3]

OBJECTIVE

To enable the student to understand the need for adaptive reuse of old heritage buildings and

applications of using recycled materials.

To expose the students to the basics of adaptive reuse and recycling.

UNIT 1 NEED FOR ADAPTIVE REUSE

Cultural inheritance – heritage buildings and old structures – ascertaining the

structural stability – estimation of the prolonged life of the building – strategies

of adaptive reuse – investigation into material finishes etc.

UNIT 2 NEED FOR RECYCLING OF MATERIALS

The logic behind recycling – recycling of steel, wood, glass etc - estimation of

the quality of recycled timber – criteria for recycling of steel, glass etc.

UNIT 3 CONCEPT OF SUSTAINABILITY

Earth summit declaration – definition of sustainability – economic, social and

environmental issues – green rating of buildings – criteria for LEED rating.

UNIT 4 RECYCLING OF WASTE WATER

Sullage and sewage – techniques of water purification for sullage – treatment

plant for sewage – techniques of biological and chemical purification.

UNIT 5 NEED FOR CONSERVATION

Architectural conservation – conservation of heritage and important buildings –

levels of intervention – structural, construction related, finishes etc. Revival of

old building techniques and finishes.



CO1: An ability to understand the concepts & principles of Environment Design, climatology, natural

and manmade conditions of environment and other aspects of environmentally conscious and

efficient design.

310


pertain to the design and evaluation of sustainable policies and institutions.



CO4: An ability to understand the Sustainability & Role of Designers in sustainable design.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M H L L

CO2 L M L H

CO3 M H M M

CO4 H L M

Reference Books:

1. Sustainable Urbanism: Urban Design with Nature by Douglas Farr

2. The Sustainable Design Book: Rebecca Proctor

Objective

To make the students understand about the various materials & Technology involved in the

Mauryan Period.

To make the students understand about the styles and form involved in the Mughal Period.

Understanding the works and philosophy of Temple Architecture.

UNIT 1 Mauryan Architecture:

Timber Structure in buildings; Pillars; Torans; Viharas; Stupa- Sanchi Stupa;

Ashok Pillar at Sarnath; Lion Capital at Vaishali; Cave Temples - Ajanta &

Elllora Caves – Architectural features & Importance, art work, Interior details.

UNIT 2 Mughal Architecture:

Akbar Reign:

Tomb of Humayun; Fatehpur Sikri – Tomb of Salim Chishti, Buland Darwaja,

Jodh Bai’s Palace, Birbal House, Panch Mahal, Diwan-E-Khas, Diwan-E-Aam,

Peacock Throne, Jama Masjid.

BDI502A Architectural History-II (Indian) 3-0-3 [3]

311

UNIT 3 Post Akbar Reign:

Jahangir- Tomb of Akbar; Shah Jahan- Red Fort, Delhi; Jama masjid, Delhi; Taj

Mahal, Agra; Moti Masjid.

Temple Architecture of India

UNIT 4 Sun Temple at Konark, Temples of Khajuraho; Cave Temple, Mahakuta.

UNIT 5 Temples of South & South- Eastern India:

Laad Khan Temple, Aihole; Durga Temple, Aihole; Lingraj Temple,

Bhubneshwar; Shikhar Temples, Orissa.








Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 L M H

CO3 M M

Reference Books :

1. History of Architecture by Sir Banister Fletcher

2. The Great Ages of World Architecture by G. K. Hiraskar

BDI503A INTERIOR DESIGN STUDIO – III


0-8-0 [4]

Objective

The course concentrates on larger scale spaces with an emphasis on planning commercial spaces.

The main aim is to develop visually literate students who are proficient at analytical thinking,

conceptualization and the problem-inquiry, solution cycle. The course also examines the

connection between abstract design principles and the physical and visual environments.

UNIT 1 SHOPS

Planning for retail activity – anthropometrics – types of Shop layouts Modular

units. Materials used in counters, shelves, worktops, their comparative study.

Lighting & colour scheme – natural & artificial light.

UNIT 2 COMMERICIAL SPACES

The art of selling-displays/products/marketing, design of display units, design of

312

boutiques, showrooms. Concepts in modern day Retail interiors – materials &

finishes – colour, texture & pattern.

UNIT 3 SHOPPING MALLS

Product display – windows/internal displays/hierarchy of product display/power

of visual communication/graphics

Exhibition spaces – display for exhibition

Lighting design for commercial spaces – task/display/atmospheric/focal lighting

Colouring commercial spaces – coding/decoding/visual communication

Design of commercial Environments such as Malls, Shopping Arcades Etc.



CO1: An ability to understand the Design Process Through Observation Comparison, Analysis With

the Help of Prototypes, Model and Drawings.

CO2: An ability to understand the different areas and their anthropometrics in commercial design.

CO3: An ability to understand the project studies, case studies of various related topics for interiors

will be used. Presentation of data collected will be done by means of seminars / visits / books

/visuals. Motivation of inspiration through the works of renowned designers and architects. Critical

observation of interior projects for their merits and demerits by means of reading, study of drawings,

interpretation and discussion.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 L M M H

CO3 M L L M

Suggested Readings:

1. The Design Hotels Book: Edition 2015 by Design Hotels (Editor)

2. Hotels: Architecture & Design by Carles Broto

3. The Best of Hospitality Architecture and Design by Cindy Allen (Editor)

BDI504A Elective-II 3-0-3 [3]

A. MARKETING TECHNIQUES

Objective

To understand the need of market supply and Marketing Position with exposure to various fixtures

and fittings, water supply and sanitary installations at work sites.

To expose the students to the basic principles of Organizational capabilities..

UNIT 1 WHAT IS MARKETING?

Introduction, definition, Organizational conditions and USP, Environmental

factors, marketing concept – marketing strategy – marketing tactics, Planning,

operation and Implementation.

UNIT 2 BUILDING A MARKETING STRATEGY

Competitive settings, marketing decisions in a competitive setting, formulating

overall marketing strategy, factors in selecting marketing inputs, the three C’s of

a marketing strategy, Components of a product/market strategy, hierarchy of

strategies, how to develop a product/market strategy, finding a suitable market

strategy.

https://www.amazon.com/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&text=Design+Hotels&search-alias=books&field-author=Design+Hotels&sort=relevancerank

https://www.amazon.com/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&text=Carles+Broto&search-alias=books&field-author=Carles+Broto&sort=relevancerank

https://www.amazon.com/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&text=Cindy+Allen&search-alias=books&field-author=Cindy+Allen&sort=relevancerank

313

UNIT 3 UNDERSTANDING CUSTOMERS

How marketing influences society – economic aspects, buyers behavior, the

environment, how society influences marketing – public opinion and political

pressure, legislative action, pitfalls of neglecting customers, management

mistakes, benefits of understanding customers, types of benefits, feature Vs

benefits.

UNIT 4 MANAGING VALUE

Components of perceived value, perceived value analysis, measuring perceived

value, customer management, role of perceived value in competition, strategic

themes, increasing perceived value.

UNIT 5 ORGANISATIONAL CAPABALITIES AND MARKETING POSITIONING

Analysing competitors, capabilities and market strategies, types of capabilities,

evaluating capabilities, competitive advantage and benefit advantage, macro

trends, market segmentation, characteristics of market segment, determining a

target market, role of segments and target market in marketing strategy, segment

identification analysis, segments and decision making, market selection criteria,

types of market segments, what is positioning, competitive advantage analysis,

determining positioning, positioning and perceived value.



CO1: An ability to understand the Marketing strategies and its components.

CO2: An ability to understand the different Marketing challenges.

CO3: An ability to understand the ORGANISATIONAL CAPABALITIES AND MARKETING

POSITIONING



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 L M M H

CO3 M L L M

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Marketing 101, Don Senton, Wiley.

2. Fundamentals of Modern marketing, Edward w. cundiff, Richard R.Still, Norman A.P Goroni, PHI.

3. Marketing Management, Phillip Kotter, PHI.


Objective

To enable the students to Develop entrepreneurial skills.

To enable the students to Analyze the environment related to small scale industry and business.

Understand the process and procedures of setting up small enterprises.

To Develop Management skills for entrepreneurship development.

UNIT 1 Entrepreneurship - Entrepreneur, Enterprise and Entrepreneurship - meaning,

need, transition from income generation to self employment and

314

Entrepreneurship, qualities of a good entrepreneur, problems of entrepreneurs.

UNIT 2 Factors influencing entrepreneurial development - Economic, Legal,

Socioeconomic, Psychological and Environmental factors.

UNIT 3 Agencies supporting entrepreneurial Development Programme - SIDCO, DIC,

TllC, EDII, SIPCOT, KVIC. Institutional Finance to Entrepreneurs – IDBI,

ICICI, RBI, LIC,

UNIT 4 Project identification and classification - Meaning of Projects, Project

identification, Project Classification, internal and external constraints, Project

objectives.

UNIT 5 Project formulation – Concept, need, elements. Project selection, appraisal

format, check list for feasibility report, planning commission guidelines.



CO1: Student will be able to understand about entrepreneurship and evolution of entrepreneurship.

CO2: Student will be able to understand creating and starting the venture.

CO3: Student will be able to understand managing, growing and ending the new venture.

CO4: Student will be able to understand entrepreneurship Development and Government.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M L H L H

CO2 H L M

CO3 M M M

RELATED EXPERIENCE:

1. Visit to SIDCO, DIC and TIIC.

2. Case study of an enterprise and two entrepreneurs.

3. Preparation of a project proposal for funding.

REFERENCES:

1. Gupta C.B, and Srinivasan N.P, Entrepreneurship development in India, Sultan Chand

& Sons, New Delhi, 2004.

2. Chunawalla S.A, Sales Management, Himalayan Publishing House, New Delhi, 1991.

3. Vasant Desai, Project Management and entrepreneurship, Himalaya Publishing House,

New Delhi, (2000).

4. David H.Moll, Entrepreneurship, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1999. Frank

Jerkins, Advertising, Prentice Hall of India, New India, 2000.

315

BDI505A Exhibition & Retail Design 0-6-0 [3]

Objective

Understanding theory of exhibition design and their principles..

To understand the construction details of Retail design.

To study about the various lighting and graphics.

UNIT 1 Exhibition Design

Introduction, History of Exhibition Design, Principles of Exhibition Design.

UNIT 2 Retail Design

Importance of Retail Design; Types of Retail Stores- Department Stores,

Boutiques, Outlet Store, Specialty Shops, Jewellery, Hyper Markets & Super

Markets, Shopping Centre/ Malls; Elements of Retail Store- Space, Spatial

Organization, Store Layout, Presentation of Merchandise, Design of Store,

Lighting, In-Store Graphics.

UNIT 3 Construction & Material Selection

Selection of material for Exhibition, Designing & Construction of Exhibitions

Stands/Kiosks

UNIT 4 Lighting & Graphics

Lighting for Exhibition- Lighting Plan of an Exhibition, Environment Light,

Exhibit Focused Lighting, Feature Lighting, Color Lighting, Lighting for

comfort; Lighting Specifications; Do’s & Don’ts for Exhibition Lighting.

Graphics for Exhibition- Importance of Graphics in Exhibition; Stand Alone

Installation; Approaches to exhibition Graphics- Legibility, Readability; Printing

of Graphics- Vinyl text, Rubdown/Dry Transfer, Cut-Outs, Inkjet Printing,

Digital Printing, Mounting Techniques; Outdoor Application; Dos & Don’ts of

Graphic for exhibitions.

316

UNIT 5 Design Project

Designing of Exhibition stands one of each category - Commercial &

Non- Commercial Category- Planning, Designing- Concept & Functional

Needs, Working Drawings, Wall Finishes with Material Specification.

Services detail.

Designing of Retail Stores any two categories – Planning, Designing-

Concept & Functional Needs, Working Drawings, Presentation Drawing,

Wall Finishes with Material Specification. Services detail.



CO1: Understand the specific requirements of exhibition and retail design.

CO2: Be able to develop and communicate design ideas in response to identified needs.

CO3: An ability to develop the design of exhibitions for commercial category.

CO4: An ability to understand the graphics of exhibition and set design.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M L L

CO2 H L M M H

CO3 M M

Suggested Readings:

1.Creating Exhibitions: Collaboration in the Planning, Development, and Design by Janet Kamien and

Polly

2. McKenna-Cress

3. Exhibition Design by Philip Hughes.

317

Objective

To develop an understanding about the design of interior landscape with special emphasis on the

choice and care of plant materials used in the interior spaces.

To study about the various landscaping elements and their application in interior spaces.

To study the concepts of interior landscaping and their application in the design of interior spaces.

UNIT 1 INTERIOR LANDSCAPING

Definition, classification of plants, indoor plants and their functions, layout &

components, Floriculture – commercial, ornamental, Selection of plants & pest

control.

UNIT 2 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF PLANTS

Physical requirements of plants – light, temperature, water, planting medium,

soil separator, weight of plants, acclimatization & maintenance.

Techniques to meet physical requirements.

UNIT 3 INTERIOR LANDSCAPING ELEMENTS & PRINCIPLES

Various interior landscaping elements – water bodies - pools, fountains, cascades

Plants, rocks, artifacts, paving & lighting, Design guidelines- plant texture &

colour, plant height, plant spacing.

UNIT 4 ROOF AND DECK LANDSCAPE

Protection of the integrity of the roof and structure, provisions for drainage, light

weight planting medium, irrigation, selection of materials, water proofing,

provision for utilities and maintenance.

UNIT 5 EXERCISE ON INTERIOR LANDSCAPE

Courtyard design

An outdoor room design

Terrace garden



CO1: An ability to understand the theory and design of landscape and site plan.

BDI506A INTERIOR LANDSCAPE DESIGN 0-3-0 [3]

318

CO2: An ability to develop the design of interior landscape with special emphasis on the choice and

care of plant materials used in the interior spaces.

CO3: An ability to develop and understanding about the design of interior landscape with special

emphasis on the choice and care of plant materials used in the interior spaces.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 M L L

CO2 H L M M H

CO3 M M

Suggested Readings:

1. Residential Landscape Design by Dean Herald.

2. Residential Landscape Architects by Norman k Booth & James E. Hiss.

BDI507A CADD- Photoshop & Portfolio Making 0-6-0 [3]

:

Objective

This unit intends to equip the students with concepts and principle of Project Management work.

This unit intends to equip the students with throughout Knowledge of application of MSP.

To understand the Application of Photoshop.

Have the necessary professional communication skills. These include a wide array of tools like

making CV’s and presentations, preparing for job tests and interviews and the necessary computer

skills to produce these.

Knowledge about the local and international markets and their operations.

Career planning, channels for job search, basics of entrepreneurship.

The course will also assist students to be able to present their portfolios in various modern formats

like USB’s, digital photography, websites, CD’s etc.

319

UNIT 1 Project Management Frame work

Organization Structure & Project Lifecycle

Project Initiation

Develop Project Management Plan

Plan scope Management

Collect requirements

Develop schedule

Plan Cost Management

Plan Quality Management

Plan Human Resource Management

Plan communication Management

UNIT 2 Estimate costs

Perform quality Assurance

Manage Communication

Control Quality

Control communication

Control Quality

Control communication

INTRODUCTION

Introduction About MSP

MSP Road Map

MSP –GUI

CALENDAR

Calendar Types

Define the Calendar

Assigning Calendar in Gantt chart

TASK AND ITS RELATIONSHIP

Entering Dependencies In Various Ways

Critical Path

UNIT 3 WORK BREAKDOWN STRUCTURE

About WBS

WBS Codes

Types of WBS Code

320

CONSTRAINTS & RECURRING TASK

Types of Constraint

Deadline

Recurring Task

DEFINE AND ASSIGN RESOURCES

Types of Resources

Enter Names in Resource Sheet

RESOURCE ANALYSIS & LEVELING

Views

Resource Levelling

TRACKING

Estimates Versus Actuals

Introducing about Baseline

Updating Tasks with Actual Information

Different Types of Percent Complete

EARNED VALUE ANALYSIS

Earned Value Fields

Calculate Earned Value Methods

FILTERS & GROUPS

Default Task Filters.

Groups

Sorting Tasks

CUSTOMIZATION & FORMATTING

Custom Field

Formatting

REPORTS

Reports

Report Types

Creating a Project Report

Visual Reports

PHOTOSHOP

UNIT 4 Introduction to Vector and Raster graphics,

Resolution,

About Interface Creating canvas and customizing the size.

File-New, Open, Browse, Close, Close all, Save, Save As.

Keyboard short cuts. Opening the existing image and Changing the image size

and saving with different file formats like JPEG, BMP, TIFF, TGA, PNG.

Using Selection Tool-Rectangular Marquee, Elliptical marque, Single row

marquee, Single column marquee

How to select Images Using Lasso tool, Polygonal lasso, Magnetic Lasso, Magic

wand tool, Quick Selection tool.

Select – All, Deselect, Reselect, Inverse, Grow, Similar,

Transform Selection, Load Selection, Save Selection. Edit- Cut, Copy, Paste,

Paste into. Crop tool, Creating designs using Brush, Creating our own Brush,

Clone Stamp Tool, Pattern stamp Tool.

Undo, Step Forward, Step Backward.

321

Using Eraser Tool, Background Eraser, Magic Eraser.

Gradient, Paint Bucket

UNIT 5 Fill, Stroke.

Changing the Background color, Foreground color.

Pen Tool, Free form, Add anchor, Delete Anchor, Convert Point tool.

Path and direct selection tool.

Applying brush tool on the stroke.

Working with Text, Applying Layer Style.

Creating Reflections. Working with vector shapes.

Creating layers,

Arranging layers, Merging Layers, Flattening Layers.

Changing the Background.

Applying Blending Modes. Group layers, Ungroup layers

Using Modes – RGB, CMYK. Applying Adjustments - Color Balance,

Brightness & Contrast.

How to create own designs. Page setup, Print, Printer Settings

How to create own designs. Page setup, Print, Printer Settings.

Project

Poster making

Picture pakage



CO1: An ability to understand the total use of all commands relate to windows and Photoshop for

making designs.


painting in windows.

CO3: An ability to understand the concepts and principle of Project Management work.

CO4: An ability to understand the Implementation Strategies will include use and regular practice of

all related commands of Photoshop, Walk through Animations. The generation of drawings and

animation should satisfy the client’s requirements and it should ease the planning, design and

execution of the interior work.

CO5: Students will present a portfolio of all the files/ folders/ projects created during the course of study

from I to III year. The portfolio should include projects, industrial visit reports, any other projects

made during the academic session. The external examiner will evaluate the portfolio & take a viva of

the student and award the marks.

CO6: A Copy of Portfolio needs to be submitted with the department at the time of final assessment.

emphasis on the choice and care of plant materials used in the interior spaces.



CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7

CO1 H H H H M

CO2 H H M

CO3 L H

CO4 M M H H H = Highly Related; M = Medium L = Low

Suggested Readings:

1. Msphelp/guide/tutorial

2. Adobe Photoshop CS6 by Mike Wooldridge & Stuart

3. Photoshop CC for Dummies: Peter Bauer

4. Microsoft Project 2013: Microsoft Official Academic Course by Gregg D. Richie, PMP

322

Objective:

To expose students to Historical, Vernacular and Contemporary architecture.

Outline:

Vacation Assignment/ Study tour is to be undertaken after the end of V semester

exam and before the commencement of VI semester classes. This assignment could be a

measured drawing and documentation of a noted building or a study tour for visiting places

of architectural interest. The choice of the building to be documented and the places to be

visited is left to the concerned department. The assignment may be given as group work (4 to

6 students per group). The students have to submit a report on the measured drawing or the

study tour within 15 days from the beginning of the VI Semester. The reports are to be

assessed by the departments for progressive marks.

BDI508A Educational Trip 0-2-0 [2]

323

SEMESTER – VI

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits Type

1 BDI601A OFFICE TRAINING

(INTERNSHIP)

- - - 18 C

2 BDI602A Portfolio Submission - - - 6 C

Total - - - 24

BDI601A OFFICE TRAINING (INTERNSHIP) 0-0-0 [18]

Aim

In this semester the learner will be equipped with knowledge and skills needed such as management of

office along with current practices, codes of conduct required to enhance skills and techniques of

managing small and large scale residential and commercial interior projects.

OBJECTIVE

To encourage students to work in with relevant industries.

An avenue to enhance academics learning through hands on work experience.


Gain exposure to a professional work atmosphere.

Be able to place themselves and their work in the context of their selected discipline

Understand their specialist area and the career opportunities available


The aim of this unit is to extend learners’ knowledge of professional practices within

their specialist area and to relate these to personal goals and career opportunities.

324

INTERNSHIP TRAINING

In the VI semester, student will undergo a internship of 20 Weeks Duration in an Interior designing

or Architectural firm and form a project report about his/her practical experience gained by

working on various projects worked under the supervision of a professional designer, so that they

can understand the existing working practices, conditions and acquire an in depth technical

knowhow.

The student has to submit a certificate regarding their successful training with the firm.

A Copy of Report needs to be submitted with the department along with the performance

certificate issued by the firm Manager/ Owner and one with the Firm (where internship is pursued).

After the Internship, student needs to appear in front of jury members for a presentation seminar,

who will judge the performance based on their presentation, report, and Viva-voce and award

marks to student.

PROJECT REPORT to be submitted

o Background of industry

o Number of employees

o Project detail on which assisted

o Manufacturing process

o Hand & Computer sketches

o Experience

o Any other details


CO1: Student will be able to understand about entrepreneurship and evolution of entrepreneurship.

CO2: Student will be able to understand creating and starting the venture.

CO3: Student will be able to understand managing, growing and ending the new venture.

CO4: Student will be able to understand entrepreneurship Development and Government.




325

Outcome Outcome


CO1 H H L M L

CO2 L M H H

CO3 M H M M

BDI602A Portfolio Submission 0-0-0 [6]

Objective :

To assess the performance of student in the practical training, a final jury will be conducted in the

month of January, after commencement of the new session.

The student have to be present in the jury along with their training reports (properly binded), on the

basis of which marks for VI sem. will be awarded.

The jury will be taken on the Training Report & not on the sheets.

Note : Students has to follow the instructions as guided in the training manual.

326

SEMESTER – VII

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits Type

1 BDI701A INTERIOR DESIGN CODES 3 - - 3 3 C

2 BDI702A ADVANCED DESIGN STUDIO - - 12 12 6 C

3 BDI703A Research Project & Dissertation - - 6 6 3 C

4 BDI704A TEXTILE DESIGN - - 6 6 3 C

5

BDI705A

BDI705B


A. PRESENTATION TECHNIQUES

B. INTERIOR DESIGN PHOTOGRAPHY

4 - 4 4 E

6 BDI706A Seminar - - 2 2 1 C

Total 7 - 26 33 20

OBJECTIVE

To develop understanding of the duties and liabilities of an Interior designer along with knowledge

of bye- laws that relate to the building & the environment in the Indian context.

To expose the students to the various problems and issues encountered in the practice of Interior

design as a profession & to teach them the methods of legal redressal.

UNIT 1 FIRE SAFETY CODES

Fire – combustibility – NBC – fire resistant rating of materials – fire fighting

requirements – wet riser, dry riser, fire zones, fire escape stair case, fire alarms,

smoke detectors and fire lifts.

UNIT 2 CODES FOR LIGHTING

Measurement of illumination and luminous intensity – day light factor – sky

BDI701A INTERIOR DESIGN CODES 3-0-3 [3]

327

luminance – ERC, IRC – light output ratio – recommended illumination levels

for various spaces such as library, class room, garment factory, etc. Energy

conservation in lighting.

UNIT 3 CODES FOR VENTILATION

Ventilation rates – air changes per hour – relative humidity – cross ventilation,

stack effect, recommended ventilation rates for kitchen, toilet, etc.

UNIT 4 CODES FOR ELECTRICAL LAYOUT

Typical electrical layout for a building – location requirement for switch rooms

and distribution panels – codes for fan points, power points and light points –

PVC sheathed wiring system – protective earthing – earth electrode

UNIT 5 CODES FOR BARRIER FREE ENVIRONMENT

Requirement of toilets, corridors, etc. for handicapped persons – wheel chair

clearances – ramps for handicapped,etc. according to ISO 9001 Standards.



CO1: An ability to understand the different codes for fire safety.

CO2: An ability to understand the different standard codes of NBC.

CO3: An ability to understand the codes for barrier free environment.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 L M H

CO3 M M

TEXT BOOK

1. National Building code of India 2005 – Bureau of Indian Standards

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. V.K.Jain – Fire Safety in Buildings, New age International (Pvt Ltd) publishers, Chennai, 2007.

2. IS 9668 : 1990 – Fire fighting code of practice - Bureau of Indian Standards.

OBJECTIVE

To study and develop innovative schemes for hotel and auditorium interiors. Knowledge of

working drawings is also intended.

Hospitality industry- exposure to design standards in five star hotels. To impart knowledge about

interior design possibilities in auditorium.

UNIT 1 AUDITORIUM

Spatial and environmental standards for various auditorium – performing arts,

BDI702A ADVANCED DESIGN STUDIO 0-12-0 [6]

328

cinema, convention centre. Detail schematics of wall paneling, false ceiling and

carpeting to satisfy acoustic requirements.

Lighting study to develop ideas for foyer, auditorium and stage requirements.

UNIT 2 FIVE STAR HOTELS

Spatial and service standards for five star hotels – integration of interior design

schemes for rooms, restaurants, bars, health clubs, shopping arcade and other

guest areas with the general theme of the hotel.

Special ideas for suites and banquet halls – contemporary interior schemes to

integrate new concepts in lighting and materials.



CO1: An ability to understand the theory of auditorium design.

CO2: An ability to develop the design of five star hotel.

CO3: An ability to understand the design process for a large scale project.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 L M H

CO3 M M

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Designs for 20th century Interiors – Fiona Leolie, VH Publications, London.

2. Interior Design; The New Freedom, Barbaralec Diamonstein, Rizzoli International Publications,

New York, 1982.

In this semester the learner is introduced to basic research principles and research methods, report

writing skills and dissertation writing. Students are expected to choose their own topic of research on

a specific area/field after consultation with the dissertation guide/subject coordinator.

He / She are also required to do the following before the end of the semester:-

BDI703A Research Project & Dissertation 0-6-0 [3]

329

finalize the topic and guide,

set the aim-objectives and scope of study,

conduct research and review related literature,

identify and conduct related case studies and project reviews,

collect data and critically analyze the data,

finalize the Interior Design brief/programme and

identify and finalize the site for design.

Note: Continuous assessment of sessional work may consist of the above in the given time frame as set

by the guide/subject coordinator.

At the end of the Semester each Student is required to submit the final printed two copies of the

dissertation volume supplemented with finished, rendered drawings to suitable scale with related

detailing, all certified by the guide/subject coordinator and Principal which may be presented for final

Viva-voce examination.



CO1: An ability to formulate a project

CO2: An ability to implement the project within agreed procedures and to specification

CO3: An ability to evaluate the project outcomes

CO4: An ability to present the project outcomes.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 L M H

CO3 M M

OBJECTIVE

To gain knowledge and understanding of the functional and aesthetic requirements of textiles

for a range of applications

To familiarize the students of Interior Design on textile materials used in interior.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO FABRICS

Fabric, yarn and fibre structure, Fabric structure- woven- warp, weft,

selvedge ,knitted- course, non- woven, Fabric types and classification-

woven, including plain, twill, satin, Jacquard, crepe and pile weaves, knitted-

including single knit, double knit, tricot knit, pile knit, lace and net ,non-

woven-including felts webs and films, identification and properties of

fabrics, yarns and fibers.

UNIT 2 APPLICATION OF ELEMENTS AND PRINCIPLES

Application of elements and principles of design across a range of textiles.

Describe and analyze elements and principles of design -furnishings, textile

arts, non-apparel. Functional and aesthetic requirements and features of

textile range

UNIT 3 COLOUR ON FABRICS

Fabric coloration and decoration- Principles of applying color to fabrics.

Textile arts and crafts in interiors, traditional and modern materials and

methods. Preparing samples on tie and die printing, batik printing, appliqué,

macramé and braiding.

UNIT 4 FURNISHINGS

Furnishings-classification, types of curtain, curtain construction, selection

criteria relation to backgrounds in walls , floors and ceilings.

Slip covers , cushion covers , bed linen and table linen

Floor coverings -rugs and carpets, types selection , care and maintenance,

installation of floor coverings

UNIT 5 OTHER NATURAL MATERIALS

Jute or hessian – dyed jute fabric and its applications – various kinds of

processed leather, its application in interior design.



CO1: An ability to understand the different fabrics and their application.

CO2: An ability to understand the different colours on fabrics and furnishing.

CO3: An ability to understand the elements and principle of fabrics.

BDI704A TEXTILE DESIGN 0-6-0 [3]



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 H L M H

CO3 M M M

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Inside today’s home, Faulkner, R.and Faulkner 1987,Rinebart Winston, New York

2.Interior Design & Decoration, Sherril Whiton, Prentice Hall

3. Introduction to home furnishings, Stepat,D.D,1991,The macmillan company,New York.

4.The themes and Hudson manual of textile printing , Storey joyce ,1992, London

5.Colour in interior Design Jhon,F.P, 1997, Mc Graw Hill Company

A PRESENTATION TECHNIQUES : OBJECTIVE

To equip the students with various tools of sketching and rendering like pencils, pens,

charcoal, ink brushes etc.

To familiarize the students with some of the concepts of 3D modeling and the presentation

techniques.

UNIT 1 COLORING STUDY

Introduction of colors, Usage of water colors, poster colors, pen & ink,

rendering techniques, etc.

UNIT 2 DRAWING AND SKETCHING INTERIOR ENVIRONMENTS

Drawing and sketching interior environments, one point interior perspective,

two point interior perspective, refined linear perspective methods, two point

plan projection method, and perspective traced from photographs.

UNIT 3 RENDERING WITH PEN AND INK

Introduction to pen and ink rendering, materials, media and tools, rendering

orthographic projection drawings, rendering perspective drawings.

UNIT 4 RENDERING WITH COLOUR PENCILS AND SKETCH PENS

Rendering of interior perspectives with colour pencils and sketch pens –

stroke effects, smudge effects – use of schoeller and kent sheets – leather

cartridge etc.

UNIT 5 RENDERING WITH POSTER/WATER COLOURS

Use of kent/ cartridgde sheets for poster colours and waterman/cartridge

sheets for water colours – transparency effects in water colours – block

effects in poster colours.



CO1: An ability to understand the visual characteristics of drawings.

CO2: An ability to develop designs and communicate ideas.

CO3: An ability to Understand the rendering with colour pencils and sketch pens



BDI705A

BDI705B

Elective-III 4-0-4 [2]

Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H H L L

CO2 L M H H

CO3 M M

Reference books:

1. Interior Design Visual Presentation 2nd and 3rd Edition-Maureen Mittom

2. Architects Sketching and Rendering techniques for designers and architects.-

Stephen.A.Klimet

3. Architectural Rendering Techniques-A Color Reference-Mike.W.Lin

4. Color Drawing-Design drawing skills & techniques for architects-Michael.E.Doyle.

5. Color Vision-Leo Marvullo

6. Water Color-Hon graham Scholes

Text Books

1. 3DS Max-Advanced 3D Modeling and animation-Cadd Centre

2. Adobe Photoshop 7.0 classroom in a book-Adobe creative team.

B: INTERIOR DESIGN PHOTOGRAPHY:

OBJECTIVE

To help the student understand the principles and technology of photography.

To enable the student to understand the applications of photographs in interior.

To expose the students to the basic principles of photography in interiors.

UNIT 1 PRINCIPLES OF COMPOSITION

Rule of thirds, perspective-worm’s eye view, normal eye view, bird’s eye

view, one-point perspective, two- point perspective, three point perspective,

exercises in composition.

UNIT 2 PRINCIPLES OF PHOTOGRAPHY

Technical definitions, understanding a camera, anatomy of a SLR camera,

technical setting in a SLR camera, different types of lenses

UNIT 3 PRINCIPLES OF INTERIOR LIGHTING

Technical definitions, lighting sources, types of lighting fixtures, types of

lamps, calculating lighting levels, flash photography, types of flashes,

controlling lighting levels with flash photography

Exercise in interior lighting photography with artificial light and black and

white photos

UNIT 4 PRINCIPLES OF COLOUR

Color rendering in photographic medium, color rendering in photographs

under different lighting condition, lighting colors and its effect on a

photograph, color filters in a camera

Exercise on color photography of interiors

UNIT 5 INTEGRATION

Project work/exercise in integrating all prior units



CO1: An ability to use Photography as a means of communication and Documentation; a tool

to demonstrate concepts and ideas, document situations, & objects in general; get familiar with

camera, film, digital technology & techniques and understand aesthetics of photography,

composition and light.

CO2: An ability to understand the principle of lighting in interior.

CO3: An ability to use sets lights and backgrounds.




Outcome Outcome


CO1 L H L L

CO2 L M H H

CO3 M L M

Reference books:

1. Point view- The art of architectural photography , E.Manny A Ballan, VNR 2.Professional

2. photography –photographing buildings, David Wilson, Rotovision.

Objective

An avenue to enhance academics learning through practical knowledge from experts.


Gain exposure to a professional field with the experiences shared by professionals.

Understand their specialist area and the career opportunities available.


EXPERT SEMINARS & VISITS

Student has to attend various seminars and visits conducted by the university regarding their

subjects to be taken by expert from the industry, to enhance the technical practical knowledge

of the field.

Students have to submit a comprehensive report at the end of the semester, compiling the

experiences and knowledge gained at these seminars & visits.

BDI706A Seminar 0-2-0 [1]

SEMESTER – VIII

Sr.

No.

Course

Code


Hrs.

Credits Type

1 BDI801A Thesis Project - - 20 20 10 C

2 BDI802A Project Management

&Entrepreneurship

4 - - 4 4 C

4 BDI803A Professional Practice &

Management

4 - - 4 4 C

Total 8 - 20 28 18

OBJECTIVE

To demonstrate an ability to comprehend the nature of Interior problem and

create a brief which sets the frame work for design.

To demonstrate an advanced level design ability to convert the brief set forth earlier

into a speculative proposition of design.

To articulate and delineate the propositions of design into an architectural & Interior solution

addressing all the dimensions

Outline:

Interior Design projects can be of any scale and size (in terms of built areas) as long as

the required rigor and depth is demonstrated by the student to merit consideration as a final

project. Very large campus projects can be avoided as the work tends to be repetitive and

more often ends with a large number of Structures but with minimal variations and

content. It is expected that all genre of projects (study or design) would end with a design

solution; in fact all projects should be grounded in some kind of critical enquiry. The

maximum weight age for study will be 25% in the case of a Study + Design Project. The

depth of enquiry can be extended and the time spent on design can be reduced in a specific

case, but such a project should demonstrate clarity in terms of research design. The following

stages have been identified as a generic model of the studio. The stages can be fine tuned

depending on the resources. It is expected that this project will be run as a studio with

individual guidance under a project coordinator.

1. Pre-Project – This stage should ideally be accomplished in the previous semester. The

work involves students to discuss with the faculty to identify an area of interest or specific

types of buildings. The pre project stage should end with a project proposal giving routine

information on site, location, need, broad requirements and scale. In addition, the proposal

should clearly indicate the “project question” or an area (or areas) of interest.

2. Project seminar – Student shall present a seminar on the project topic which would

include the following; 1. Precedents of similar projects, either actual visit to such projects or

through literature reviews. 2. Cultural, contextual, historical, technological, programmatic

concerns of the project. 3. Prevalent or historical models of architectural approach to such

projects and a critique of such models and 4. A rhetorical or a speculative statement that

would be the basis of further investigation. (For example: Interiors in the information

BDI801A Thesis Project 0-20-0 [10]

age: Design of libraries in the new virtual reality regime). Documentation which is a part of

this presentation shall be taken as completion of “case study” part of the final requirement.

3. Mid Review – There shall be a review to clarify the conceptual statements and

assumptions of the students. Students shall present a clearly articulated response to context,

programme and users. Conceptual framework and preliminary architectural scheme shall be

the end products of this stage.

4. Final Review – Final review should consist of all the works which would be presented at

the viva. Mode of presentation shall be tentative. Number of sheets shall be limited to

maximum of 15 plus two case study sheets. Study Models are expected to be presented.

The final output shall include a report, all drawings, study models and a presentation

model.

The report in typed or computer printed form shall discuss the programme, site- analysis,

literature review, case studies, design criteria, concept and detailed design. Three copies of

the reports shall be submitted along with drawing and models.

Note –

1) The requirements pertaining to the handicapped and elderly people and children are to be

addressed in design and detailing.

2) At the time of Viva examination, the student shall show to the jurors the portfolio

containing the evolution of his/her design from the beginning to the final output. All the

drawings and reports shall be certified by the Head of the Department as bonafid work

carried out by the student during the semester



CO1: An ability to understand that how to handle a live project design.

CO2: An ability to develop the whole project.

CO3: An ability to understand the design process for a large scale live project.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L M L

CO2 H L M H

CO3 M H M

OBJECTIVE

To expose the students to the currently prevalent techniques in the planning, programming

and management of a project.

Knowledge about the methodology of executing a Project greatly enhances the professional

ability of an Interior Designer.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION

Project planning and project scheduling and project controlling, Role of

Decision in project management, Method of planning and programming,

Human aspects of project management, work breakdown structure, Life cycle

of a project, disadvantages of traditional management system

UNIT 2 ELEMENTS OF NETWORK

Event, activity, dummy, network rules, graphical guidelines for network,

numbering of events

UNIT 3 CRITICAL PATH METHOD AND PERT ANALYSIS

CPM network analysis & PERT time estimates, time computation & network

analysis

UNIT 4 PROJECT TIME REDUCTION AND OPTIMIZATION

Project cost, Indirect project cost, direct project cost, slope of the direct cost

curve, total project cost and optimum duration, contracting the network for

cost optimization, steps in cost-time optimization

UNIT 5 PROJECT UPDATING AND ALLOCATION

When to update? Data required for updating, steps in the process of updating

Resource usage profile: Histogram, Resource smoothing and Resource

leveling, Computer applications in project management.



CO1: An ability to understand the project planning and project scheduling

CO2: An ability to understand the different method for calculate the project time.

CO3: An ability to understand the cost optimization of the project.

BDI802A Project Management &Entrepreneurship 4-0-4 [4]



Course

Outcome


Outcome


CO1 H L L

CO2 L M H

CO3 M M

TEXT BOOK

1. Dr. B.C.Punmia et al. Project planning and control with PERT and CPM, Laxmi Publications,

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Jerome D.Wiest and Ferdinand K.Levy, A Management Guide to PERT, CPM, prentice Hall

of India Pub, Ltd., New Delhi, 1982

2. R.A. Burgess and G.White, Building production and project Management, The construction

press, London, 1975

OBJECTIVE

To enable the students to plan residential interiors and commercial interiors Gain knowledge

in estimating and costing understand the preparation of quotation and tenders.

UNIT 1 Residential Interiors – Space planning for residential interiors – living room,

dining room, kitchen, bedroom.

UNIT 2 Commercial interiors – Space planning for office interiors – cabinets,

conference rooms open office systems.

UNIT 3 Estimating – Definition of estimates, types, unit and mode of measurement,

quantity surveying –systems adopted, analysis of rates, schedule of items,

schedule of rates, schedule of quantities.

UNIT 4 Specifications – definition, uses, importance, types, requirements, points to

be included in the specifications.

UNIT 5 Tenders and quotations – Tenders – meaning types, preparation of tenders,

quotations, contracts.



CO1: An ability to understand the calculation of a project cost.

CO2: An ability to understand the process of tendering.

CO3: An ability to understand the project scheduling. and estimating.



Course

Outcome


Outcome


BDI803A Professional Practice & Management 4-0-4 [4]

CO1 H L M L

CO2 H L M H

CO3 M M L M

REFERENCES:

1. Deshpande, R.S. (1995) ; Modern ideal Homes for India, Deshpande Publication, Poona

Tessie, A., (1986), The House, its plan and use, J.B. Lippincett, New York.

2. Day P.G. (1982), A guide to professional architectural and industrial scale model building,

Eagle wood clifts, N.J. Prentice Hall.

3. Indian Standards Institutions (1983), National building code of India ISI rol, 1 New Delhi,

Marak Bhavan.

4. Arulmanickam A.P. and T.K. Palaniappan (1993), Estimating and costing, Pratheeba

Publishers, Coimbatore.

jewellery design fashion design interior design batch (2020

Documents

Transcript of jewellery design fashion design interior design batch (2020